55fa90af5f
scrollkeeper is nowadays included in rarian, so the omf.mk file should be there as well. Adapt all references.
9171 lines
361 KiB
Text
9171 lines
361 KiB
Text
The pkgsrc guide
|
|
|
|
Documentation on the NetBSD packages system
|
|
|
|
Alistair Crooks
|
|
|
|
<agc@NetBSD.org>
|
|
|
|
Hubert Feyrer
|
|
|
|
<hubertf@NetBSD.org>
|
|
|
|
The pkgsrc Developers
|
|
|
|
Copyright 1994-2007 The NetBSD Foundation, Inc
|
|
|
|
$NetBSD: pkgsrc.xml,v 1.26 2007/09/18 08:17:21 rillig Exp $
|
|
|
|
Abstract
|
|
|
|
pkgsrc is a centralized package management system for Unix-like operating
|
|
systems. This guide provides information for users and developers of pkgsrc. It
|
|
covers installation of binary and source packages, creation of binary and
|
|
source packages and a high-level overview about the infrastructure.
|
|
|
|
-------------------------------------------------------------------------------
|
|
|
|
Table of Contents
|
|
|
|
1. What is pkgsrc?
|
|
|
|
1.1. Introduction
|
|
|
|
1.1.1. Why pkgsrc?
|
|
1.1.2. Supported platforms
|
|
|
|
1.2. Overview
|
|
1.3. Terminology
|
|
|
|
1.3.1. Roles involved in pkgsrc
|
|
|
|
1.4. Typography
|
|
|
|
I. The pkgsrc user's guide
|
|
|
|
2. Where to get pkgsrc and how to keep it up-to-date
|
|
|
|
2.1. Getting pkgsrc for the first time
|
|
|
|
2.1.1. As tar file
|
|
2.1.2. Via SUP
|
|
2.1.3. Via anonymous CVS
|
|
|
|
2.2. Keeping pkgsrc up-to-date
|
|
|
|
2.2.1. Via tar files
|
|
2.2.2. Via CVS
|
|
|
|
3. Using pkgsrc on systems other than NetBSD
|
|
|
|
3.1. Binary distribution
|
|
3.2. Bootstrapping pkgsrc
|
|
3.3. Platform-specific notes
|
|
|
|
3.3.1. Darwin (Mac OS X)
|
|
3.3.2. FreeBSD
|
|
3.3.3. Interix
|
|
3.3.4. IRIX
|
|
3.3.5. Linux
|
|
3.3.6. OpenBSD
|
|
3.3.7. Solaris
|
|
|
|
4. Using pkgsrc
|
|
|
|
4.1. Using binary packages
|
|
|
|
4.1.1. Finding binary packages
|
|
4.1.2. Installing binary packages
|
|
4.1.3. Deinstalling packages
|
|
4.1.4. Getting information about installed packages
|
|
4.1.5. Checking for security vulnerabilities in installed packages
|
|
4.1.6. Finding if newer versions of your installed packages are in
|
|
pkgsrc
|
|
4.1.7. Other administrative functions
|
|
4.1.8. A word of warning
|
|
|
|
4.2. Building packages from source
|
|
|
|
4.2.1. Requirements
|
|
4.2.2. Fetching distfiles
|
|
4.2.3. How to build and install
|
|
|
|
5. Configuring pkgsrc
|
|
|
|
5.1. General configuration
|
|
5.2. Variables affecting the build process
|
|
5.3. Variables affecting the installation process
|
|
5.4. Selecting and configuring the compiler
|
|
|
|
5.4.1. Selecting the compiler
|
|
5.4.2. Additional flags to the compiler (CFLAGS)
|
|
5.4.3. Additional flags to the linker (LDFLAGS)
|
|
|
|
5.5. Developer/advanced settings
|
|
5.6. Selecting Build Options
|
|
|
|
6. Creating binary packages
|
|
|
|
6.1. Building a single binary package
|
|
6.2. Settings for creation of binary packages
|
|
|
|
7. Creating binary packages for everything in pkgsrc (bulk builds)
|
|
|
|
7.1. Think first, build later
|
|
7.2. Requirements of a bulk build
|
|
7.3. Running an old-style bulk build
|
|
|
|
7.3.1. Configuration
|
|
7.3.2. Other environmental considerations
|
|
7.3.3. Operation
|
|
7.3.4. What it does
|
|
7.3.5. Disk space requirements
|
|
7.3.6. Setting up a sandbox for chrooted builds
|
|
7.3.7. Building a partial set of packages
|
|
7.3.8. Uploading results of a bulk build
|
|
|
|
7.4. Running a pbulk-style bulk build
|
|
|
|
7.4.1. Configuration
|
|
|
|
7.5. Creating a multiple CD-ROM packages collection
|
|
|
|
7.5.1. Example of cdpack
|
|
|
|
8. Directory layout of the installed files
|
|
|
|
8.1. File system layout in ${LOCALBASE}
|
|
8.2. File system layout in ${VARBASE}
|
|
|
|
9. Frequently Asked Questions
|
|
|
|
9.1. Are there any mailing lists for pkg-related discussion?
|
|
9.2. Where's the pkgviews documentation?
|
|
9.3. Utilities for package management (pkgtools)
|
|
9.4. How to use pkgsrc as non-root
|
|
9.5. How to resume transfers when fetching distfiles?
|
|
9.6. How can I install/use modular X.org from pkgsrc?
|
|
9.7. How to fetch files from behind a firewall
|
|
9.8. How do I tell make fetch to do passive FTP?
|
|
9.9. How to fetch all distfiles at once
|
|
9.10. What does "Don't know how to make /usr/share/tmac/tmac.andoc"
|
|
mean?
|
|
9.11. What does "Could not find bsd.own.mk" mean?
|
|
9.12. Using 'sudo' with pkgsrc
|
|
9.13. How do I change the location of configuration files?
|
|
9.14. Automated security checks
|
|
9.15. Why do some packages ignore my CFLAGS?
|
|
9.16. A package does not build. What shall I do?
|
|
9.17. What does "Makefile appears to contain unresolved cvs/rcs/???
|
|
merge conflicts" mean?
|
|
|
|
II. The pkgsrc developer's guide
|
|
|
|
10. Creating a new pkgsrc package from scratch
|
|
|
|
10.1. Common types of packages
|
|
|
|
10.1.1. Perl modules
|
|
10.1.2. KDE applications
|
|
|
|
10.2. Examples
|
|
|
|
10.2.1. How the www/nvu package came into pkgsrc
|
|
|
|
11. Package components - files, directories and contents
|
|
|
|
11.1. Makefile
|
|
11.2. distinfo
|
|
11.3. patches/*
|
|
|
|
11.3.1. Structure of a single patch file
|
|
11.3.2. Creating patch files
|
|
11.3.3. Sources where the patch files come from
|
|
11.3.4. Patching guidelines
|
|
11.3.5. Feedback to the author
|
|
|
|
11.4. Other mandatory files
|
|
11.5. Optional files
|
|
|
|
11.5.1. Files affecting the binary package
|
|
11.5.2. Files affecting the build process
|
|
11.5.3. Files affecting nothing at all
|
|
|
|
11.6. work*
|
|
11.7. files/*
|
|
|
|
12. Programming in Makefiles
|
|
|
|
12.1. Caveats
|
|
12.2. Makefile variables
|
|
|
|
12.2.1. Naming conventions
|
|
|
|
12.3. Code snippets
|
|
|
|
12.3.1. Adding things to a list
|
|
12.3.2. Converting an internal list into an external list
|
|
12.3.3. Passing variables to a shell command
|
|
12.3.4. Quoting guideline
|
|
12.3.5. Workaround for a bug in BSD Make
|
|
|
|
13. PLIST issues
|
|
|
|
13.1. RCS ID
|
|
13.2. Semi-automatic PLIST generation
|
|
13.3. Tweaking output of make print-PLIST
|
|
13.4. Variable substitution in PLIST
|
|
13.5. Man page compression
|
|
13.6. Changing PLIST source with PLIST_SRC
|
|
13.7. Platform-specific and differing PLISTs
|
|
13.8. Sharing directories between packages
|
|
|
|
14. Buildlink methodology
|
|
|
|
14.1. Converting packages to use buildlink3
|
|
14.2. Writing buildlink3.mk files
|
|
|
|
14.2.1. Anatomy of a buildlink3.mk file
|
|
14.2.2. Updating BUILDLINK_API_DEPENDS.pkg in buildlink3.mk files
|
|
|
|
14.3. Writing builtin.mk files
|
|
|
|
14.3.1. Anatomy of a builtin.mk file
|
|
14.3.2. Global preferences for native or pkgsrc software
|
|
|
|
15. The pkginstall framework
|
|
|
|
15.1. Files and directories outside the installation prefix
|
|
|
|
15.1.1. Directory manipulation
|
|
15.1.2. File manipulation
|
|
|
|
15.2. Configuration files
|
|
|
|
15.2.1. How PKG_SYSCONFDIR is set
|
|
15.2.2. Telling the software where configuration files are
|
|
15.2.3. Patching installations
|
|
15.2.4. Disabling handling of configuration files
|
|
|
|
15.3. System startup scripts
|
|
|
|
15.3.1. Disabling handling of system startup scripts
|
|
|
|
15.4. System users and groups
|
|
15.5. System shells
|
|
|
|
15.5.1. Disabling shell registration
|
|
|
|
15.6. Fonts
|
|
|
|
15.6.1. Disabling automatic update of the fonts databases
|
|
|
|
16. Options handling
|
|
|
|
16.1. Global default options
|
|
16.2. Converting packages to use bsd.options.mk
|
|
16.3. Option Names
|
|
16.4. Determining the options of dependencies
|
|
|
|
17. The build process
|
|
|
|
17.1. Introduction
|
|
17.2. Program location
|
|
17.3. Directories used during the build process
|
|
17.4. Running a phase
|
|
17.5. The fetch phase
|
|
|
|
17.5.1. What to fetch and where to get it from
|
|
17.5.2. How are the files fetched?
|
|
|
|
17.6. The checksum phase
|
|
17.7. The extract phase
|
|
17.8. The patch phase
|
|
17.9. The tools phase
|
|
17.10. The wrapper phase
|
|
17.11. The configure phase
|
|
17.12. The build phase
|
|
17.13. The test phase
|
|
17.14. The install phase
|
|
17.15. The package phase
|
|
17.16. Cleaning up
|
|
17.17. Other helpful targets
|
|
|
|
18. Tools needed for building or running
|
|
|
|
18.1. Tools for pkgsrc builds
|
|
18.2. Tools needed by packages
|
|
18.3. Tools provided by platforms
|
|
18.4. Questions regarding the tools
|
|
|
|
19. Making your package work
|
|
|
|
19.1. General operation
|
|
|
|
19.1.1. Portability of packages
|
|
19.1.2. How to pull in user-settable variables from mk.conf
|
|
19.1.3. User interaction
|
|
19.1.4. Handling licenses
|
|
19.1.5. Restricted packages
|
|
19.1.6. Handling dependencies
|
|
19.1.7. Handling conflicts with other packages
|
|
19.1.8. Packages that cannot or should not be built
|
|
19.1.9. Packages which should not be deleted, once installed
|
|
19.1.10. Handling packages with security problems
|
|
19.1.11. How to handle incrementing versions when fixing an
|
|
existing package
|
|
19.1.12. Substituting variable text in the package files (the SUBST
|
|
framework)
|
|
|
|
19.2. Fixing problems in the fetch phase
|
|
|
|
19.2.1. Packages whose distfiles aren't available for plain
|
|
downloading
|
|
19.2.2. How to handle modified distfiles with the 'old' name
|
|
|
|
19.3. Fixing problems in the configure phase
|
|
|
|
19.3.1. Shared libraries - libtool
|
|
19.3.2. Using libtool on GNU packages that already support libtool
|
|
19.3.3. GNU Autoconf/Automake
|
|
|
|
19.4. Programming languages
|
|
|
|
19.4.1. C, C++, and Fortran
|
|
19.4.2. Java
|
|
19.4.3. Packages containing perl scripts
|
|
19.4.4. Other programming languages
|
|
|
|
19.5. Fixing problems in the build phase
|
|
|
|
19.5.1. Compiling C and C++ code conditionally
|
|
19.5.2. How to handle compiler bugs
|
|
19.5.3. Undefined reference to "..."
|
|
19.5.4. Running out of memory
|
|
|
|
19.6. Fixing problems in the install phase
|
|
|
|
19.6.1. Creating needed directories
|
|
19.6.2. Where to install documentation
|
|
19.6.3. Installing highscore files
|
|
19.6.4. Adding DESTDIR support to packages
|
|
19.6.5. Packages with hardcoded paths to other interpreters
|
|
19.6.6. Packages installing perl modules
|
|
19.6.7. Packages installing info files
|
|
19.6.8. Packages installing man pages
|
|
19.6.9. Packages installing GConf data files
|
|
19.6.10. Packages installing scrollkeeper data files
|
|
19.6.11. Packages installing X11 fonts
|
|
19.6.12. Packages installing GTK2 modules
|
|
19.6.13. Packages installing SGML or XML data
|
|
19.6.14. Packages installing extensions to the MIME database
|
|
19.6.15. Packages using intltool
|
|
19.6.16. Packages installing startup scripts
|
|
19.6.17. Packages installing TeX modules
|
|
19.6.18. Packages supporting running binaries in emulation
|
|
19.6.19. Packages installing hicolor theme icons
|
|
19.6.20. Packages installing desktop files
|
|
|
|
19.7. Marking packages as having problems
|
|
|
|
20. Debugging
|
|
21. Submitting and Committing
|
|
|
|
21.1. Submitting binary packages
|
|
21.2. Submitting source packages (for non-NetBSD-developers)
|
|
21.3. General notes when adding, updating, or removing packages
|
|
21.4. Committing: Importing a package into CVS
|
|
21.5. Updating a package to a newer version
|
|
21.6. Moving a package in pkgsrc
|
|
|
|
22. Frequently Asked Questions
|
|
23. GNOME packaging and porting
|
|
|
|
23.1. Meta packages
|
|
23.2. Packaging a GNOME application
|
|
23.3. Updating GNOME to a newer version
|
|
23.4. Patching guidelines
|
|
|
|
III. The pkgsrc infrastructure internals
|
|
|
|
24. Design of the pkgsrc infrastructure
|
|
|
|
24.1. The meaning of variable definitions
|
|
24.2. Avoiding problems before they arise
|
|
24.3. Variable evaluation
|
|
|
|
24.3.1. At load time
|
|
24.3.2. At runtime
|
|
|
|
24.4. How can variables be specified?
|
|
24.5. Designing interfaces for Makefile fragments
|
|
|
|
24.5.1. Procedures with parameters
|
|
24.5.2. Actions taken on behalf of parameters
|
|
|
|
24.6. The order in which files are loaded
|
|
|
|
24.6.1. The order in bsd.prefs.mk
|
|
24.6.2. The order in bsd.pkg.mk
|
|
|
|
25. Regression tests
|
|
|
|
25.1. The regression tests framework
|
|
25.2. Running the regression tests
|
|
25.3. Adding a new regression test
|
|
|
|
25.3.1. Overridable functions
|
|
25.3.2. Helper functions
|
|
|
|
26. Porting pkgsrc
|
|
|
|
26.1. Porting pkgsrc to a new operating system
|
|
26.2. Adding support for a new compiler
|
|
|
|
A. A simple example package: bison
|
|
|
|
A.1. files
|
|
|
|
A.1.1. Makefile
|
|
A.1.2. DESCR
|
|
A.1.3. PLIST
|
|
A.1.4. Checking a package with pkglint
|
|
|
|
A.2. Steps for building, installing, packaging
|
|
|
|
B. Build logs
|
|
|
|
B.1. Building figlet
|
|
B.2. Packaging figlet
|
|
|
|
C. Directory layout of the pkgsrc FTP server
|
|
|
|
C.1. bootstrap-pkgsrc: Bootstrap kits
|
|
C.2. distfiles: The distributed source files
|
|
C.3. iso: Currently empty
|
|
C.4. misc: Miscellaneous things
|
|
C.5. packages: Binary packages
|
|
C.6. reports: Bulk build reports
|
|
C.7. current, pkgsrc-200xQy: source packages
|
|
|
|
D. Editing guidelines for the pkgsrc guide
|
|
|
|
D.1. Make targets
|
|
D.2. Procedure
|
|
|
|
List of Tables
|
|
|
|
1.1. Platforms supported by pkgsrc
|
|
11.1. Patching examples
|
|
23.1. PLIST handling for GNOME packages
|
|
|
|
Chapter 1. What is pkgsrc?
|
|
|
|
Table of Contents
|
|
|
|
1.1. Introduction
|
|
|
|
1.1.1. Why pkgsrc?
|
|
1.1.2. Supported platforms
|
|
|
|
1.2. Overview
|
|
1.3. Terminology
|
|
|
|
1.3.1. Roles involved in pkgsrc
|
|
|
|
1.4. Typography
|
|
|
|
1.1. Introduction
|
|
|
|
There is a lot of software freely available for Unix-based systems, which is
|
|
usually available in form of the source code. Before such software can be used,
|
|
it needs to be configured to the local system, compiled and installed, and this
|
|
is exactly what The NetBSD Packages Collection (pkgsrc) does. pkgsrc also has
|
|
some basic commands to handle binary packages, so that not every user has to
|
|
build the packages for himself, which is a time-costly task.
|
|
|
|
pkgsrc currently contains several thousand packages, including:
|
|
|
|
* www/apache - The Apache web server
|
|
|
|
* www/firefox - The Firefox web browser
|
|
|
|
* meta-pkgs/gnome - The GNOME Desktop Environment
|
|
|
|
* meta-pkgs/kde3 - The K Desktop Environment
|
|
|
|
...just to name a few.
|
|
|
|
pkgsrc has built-in support for handling varying dependencies, such as pthreads
|
|
and X11, and extended features such as IPv6 support on a range of platforms.
|
|
|
|
1.1.1. Why pkgsrc?
|
|
|
|
pkgsrc provides the following key features:
|
|
|
|
* Easy building of software from source as well as the creation and
|
|
installation of binary packages. The source and latest patches are
|
|
retrieved from a master or mirror download site, checksum verified, then
|
|
built on your system. Support for binary-only distributions is available
|
|
for both native platforms and NetBSD emulated platforms.
|
|
|
|
* All packages are installed in a consistent directory tree, including
|
|
binaries, libraries, man pages and other documentation.
|
|
|
|
* Package dependencies, including when performing package updates, are
|
|
handled automatically. The configuration files of various packages are
|
|
handled automatically during updates, so local changes are preserved.
|
|
|
|
* Like NetBSD, pkgsrc is designed with portability in mind and consists of
|
|
highly portable code. This allows the greatest speed of development when
|
|
porting to new a platform. This portability also ensures that pkgsrc is
|
|
consistent across all platforms.
|
|
|
|
* The installation prefix, acceptable software licenses, international
|
|
encryption requirements and build-time options for a large number of
|
|
packages are all set in a simple, central configuration file.
|
|
|
|
* The entire source (not including the distribution files) is freely
|
|
available under a BSD license, so you may extend and adapt pkgsrc to your
|
|
needs. Support for local packages and patches is available right out of the
|
|
box, so you can configure it specifically for your environment.
|
|
|
|
The following principles are basic to pkgsrc:
|
|
|
|
* "It should only work if it's right." ? That means, if a package contains
|
|
bugs, it's better to find them and to complain about them rather than to
|
|
just install the package and hope that it works. There are numerous checks
|
|
in pkgsrc that try to find such bugs: Static analysis tools (pkgtools/
|
|
pkglint), build-time checks (portability of shell scripts), and
|
|
post-installation checks (installed files, references to shared libraries,
|
|
script interpreters).
|
|
|
|
* "If it works, it should work everywhere" ? Like NetBSD has been ported to
|
|
many hardware architectures, pkgsrc has been ported to many operating
|
|
systems. Care is taken that packages behave the same on all platforms.
|
|
|
|
1.1.2. Supported platforms
|
|
|
|
pkgsrc consists of both a source distribution and a binary distribution for
|
|
these operating systems. After retrieving the required source or binaries, you
|
|
can be up and running with pkgsrc in just minutes!
|
|
|
|
pkgsrc was derived from FreeBSD's ports system, and initially developed for
|
|
NetBSD only. Since then, pkgsrc has grown a lot, and now supports the following
|
|
platforms:
|
|
|
|
Table 1.1. Platforms supported by pkgsrc
|
|
|
|
+----------------------------------------------------------------+
|
|
| Platform |Date Support Added|
|
|
|---------------------------------------------+------------------|
|
|
|NetBSD | Aug 1997 |
|
|
|---------------------------------------------+------------------|
|
|
|Solaris | Mar 1999 |
|
|
|---------------------------------------------+------------------|
|
|
|Linux | Jun 1999 |
|
|
|---------------------------------------------+------------------|
|
|
|Darwin (Mac OS X) | Oct 2001 |
|
|
|---------------------------------------------+------------------|
|
|
|FreeBSD | Nov 2002 |
|
|
|---------------------------------------------+------------------|
|
|
|OpenBSD | Nov 2002 |
|
|
|---------------------------------------------+------------------|
|
|
|IRIX | Dec 2002 |
|
|
|---------------------------------------------+------------------|
|
|
|BSD/OS | Dec 2003 |
|
|
|---------------------------------------------+------------------|
|
|
|AIX | Dec 2003 |
|
|
|---------------------------------------------+------------------|
|
|
|Interix (Microsoft Windows Services for Unix)| Mar 2004 |
|
|
|---------------------------------------------+------------------|
|
|
|DragonFlyBSD | Oct 2004 |
|
|
|---------------------------------------------+------------------|
|
|
|OSF/1 | Nov 2004 |
|
|
|---------------------------------------------+------------------|
|
|
|HP-UX | Apr 2007 |
|
|
+----------------------------------------------------------------+
|
|
|
|
|
|
1.2. Overview
|
|
|
|
This document is divided into three parts. The first, The pkgsrc user's guide,
|
|
describes how one can use one of the packages in the Package Collection, either
|
|
by installing a precompiled binary package, or by building one's own copy using
|
|
the NetBSD package system. The second part, The pkgsrc developer's guide,
|
|
explains how to prepare a package so it can be easily built by other NetBSD
|
|
users without knowing about the package's building details. The third part, The
|
|
pkgsrc infrastructure internals is intended for those who want to understand
|
|
how pkgsrc is implemented.
|
|
|
|
This document is available in various formats: HTML, PDF, PS, TXT.
|
|
|
|
1.3. Terminology
|
|
|
|
There has been a lot of talk about "ports", "packages", etc. so far. Here is a
|
|
description of all the terminology used within this document.
|
|
|
|
Package
|
|
|
|
A set of files and building instructions that describe what's necessary to
|
|
build a certain piece of software using pkgsrc. Packages are traditionally
|
|
stored under /usr/pkgsrc.
|
|
|
|
The NetBSD package system
|
|
|
|
This is the former name of "pkgsrc". It is part of the NetBSD operating
|
|
system and can be bootstrapped to run on non-NetBSD operating systems as
|
|
well. It handles building (compiling), installing, and removing of
|
|
packages.
|
|
|
|
Distfile
|
|
|
|
This term describes the file or files that are provided by the author of
|
|
the piece of software to distribute his work. All the changes necessary to
|
|
build on NetBSD are reflected in the corresponding package. Usually the
|
|
distfile is in the form of a compressed tar-archive, but other types are
|
|
possible, too. Distfiles are usually stored below /usr/pkgsrc/distfiles.
|
|
|
|
Port
|
|
|
|
This is the term used by FreeBSD and OpenBSD people for what we call a
|
|
package. In NetBSD terminology, "port" refers to a different architecture.
|
|
|
|
Precompiled/binary package
|
|
|
|
A set of binaries built with pkgsrc from a distfile and stuffed together in
|
|
a single .tgz file so it can be installed on machines of the same machine
|
|
architecture without the need to recompile. Packages are usually generated
|
|
in /usr/pkgsrc/packages; there is also an archive on ftp.NetBSD.org.
|
|
|
|
Sometimes, this is referred to by the term "package" too, especially in the
|
|
context of precompiled packages.
|
|
|
|
Program
|
|
|
|
The piece of software to be installed which will be constructed from all
|
|
the files in the distfile by the actions defined in the corresponding
|
|
package.
|
|
|
|
1.3.1. Roles involved in pkgsrc
|
|
|
|
pkgsrc users
|
|
|
|
The pkgsrc users are people who use the packages provided by pkgsrc.
|
|
Typically they are system administrators. The people using the software
|
|
that is inside the packages (maybe called "end users") are not covered by
|
|
the pkgsrc guide.
|
|
|
|
There are two kinds of pkgsrc users: Some only want to install pre-built
|
|
binary packages. Others build the pkgsrc packages from source, either for
|
|
installing them directly or for building binary packages themselves. For
|
|
pkgsrc users Part I, "The pkgsrc user's guide" should provide all necessary
|
|
documentation.
|
|
|
|
package maintainers
|
|
|
|
A package maintainer creates packages as described in Part II, "The pkgsrc
|
|
developer's guide".
|
|
|
|
infrastructure developers
|
|
|
|
These people are involved in all those files that live in the mk/ directory
|
|
and below. Only these people should need to read through Part III, "The
|
|
pkgsrc infrastructure internals", though others might be curious, too.
|
|
|
|
1.4. Typography
|
|
|
|
When giving examples for commands, shell prompts are used to show if the
|
|
command should/can be issued as root, or if "normal" user privileges are
|
|
sufficient. We use a # for root's shell prompt, and a % for users' shell
|
|
prompt, assuming they use the C-shell or tcsh.
|
|
|
|
Part I. The pkgsrc user's guide
|
|
|
|
Table of Contents
|
|
|
|
2. Where to get pkgsrc and how to keep it up-to-date
|
|
|
|
2.1. Getting pkgsrc for the first time
|
|
|
|
2.1.1. As tar file
|
|
2.1.2. Via SUP
|
|
2.1.3. Via anonymous CVS
|
|
|
|
2.2. Keeping pkgsrc up-to-date
|
|
|
|
2.2.1. Via tar files
|
|
2.2.2. Via CVS
|
|
|
|
3. Using pkgsrc on systems other than NetBSD
|
|
|
|
3.1. Binary distribution
|
|
3.2. Bootstrapping pkgsrc
|
|
3.3. Platform-specific notes
|
|
|
|
3.3.1. Darwin (Mac OS X)
|
|
3.3.2. FreeBSD
|
|
3.3.3. Interix
|
|
3.3.4. IRIX
|
|
3.3.5. Linux
|
|
3.3.6. OpenBSD
|
|
3.3.7. Solaris
|
|
|
|
4. Using pkgsrc
|
|
|
|
4.1. Using binary packages
|
|
|
|
4.1.1. Finding binary packages
|
|
4.1.2. Installing binary packages
|
|
4.1.3. Deinstalling packages
|
|
4.1.4. Getting information about installed packages
|
|
4.1.5. Checking for security vulnerabilities in installed packages
|
|
4.1.6. Finding if newer versions of your installed packages are in
|
|
pkgsrc
|
|
4.1.7. Other administrative functions
|
|
4.1.8. A word of warning
|
|
|
|
4.2. Building packages from source
|
|
|
|
4.2.1. Requirements
|
|
4.2.2. Fetching distfiles
|
|
4.2.3. How to build and install
|
|
|
|
5. Configuring pkgsrc
|
|
|
|
5.1. General configuration
|
|
5.2. Variables affecting the build process
|
|
5.3. Variables affecting the installation process
|
|
5.4. Selecting and configuring the compiler
|
|
|
|
5.4.1. Selecting the compiler
|
|
5.4.2. Additional flags to the compiler (CFLAGS)
|
|
5.4.3. Additional flags to the linker (LDFLAGS)
|
|
|
|
5.5. Developer/advanced settings
|
|
5.6. Selecting Build Options
|
|
|
|
6. Creating binary packages
|
|
|
|
6.1. Building a single binary package
|
|
6.2. Settings for creation of binary packages
|
|
|
|
7. Creating binary packages for everything in pkgsrc (bulk builds)
|
|
|
|
7.1. Think first, build later
|
|
7.2. Requirements of a bulk build
|
|
7.3. Running an old-style bulk build
|
|
|
|
7.3.1. Configuration
|
|
7.3.2. Other environmental considerations
|
|
7.3.3. Operation
|
|
7.3.4. What it does
|
|
7.3.5. Disk space requirements
|
|
7.3.6. Setting up a sandbox for chrooted builds
|
|
7.3.7. Building a partial set of packages
|
|
7.3.8. Uploading results of a bulk build
|
|
|
|
7.4. Running a pbulk-style bulk build
|
|
|
|
7.4.1. Configuration
|
|
|
|
7.5. Creating a multiple CD-ROM packages collection
|
|
|
|
7.5.1. Example of cdpack
|
|
|
|
8. Directory layout of the installed files
|
|
|
|
8.1. File system layout in ${LOCALBASE}
|
|
8.2. File system layout in ${VARBASE}
|
|
|
|
9. Frequently Asked Questions
|
|
|
|
9.1. Are there any mailing lists for pkg-related discussion?
|
|
9.2. Where's the pkgviews documentation?
|
|
9.3. Utilities for package management (pkgtools)
|
|
9.4. How to use pkgsrc as non-root
|
|
9.5. How to resume transfers when fetching distfiles?
|
|
9.6. How can I install/use modular X.org from pkgsrc?
|
|
9.7. How to fetch files from behind a firewall
|
|
9.8. How do I tell make fetch to do passive FTP?
|
|
9.9. How to fetch all distfiles at once
|
|
9.10. What does "Don't know how to make /usr/share/tmac/tmac.andoc" mean?
|
|
9.11. What does "Could not find bsd.own.mk" mean?
|
|
9.12. Using 'sudo' with pkgsrc
|
|
9.13. How do I change the location of configuration files?
|
|
9.14. Automated security checks
|
|
9.15. Why do some packages ignore my CFLAGS?
|
|
9.16. A package does not build. What shall I do?
|
|
9.17. What does "Makefile appears to contain unresolved cvs/rcs/??? merge
|
|
conflicts" mean?
|
|
|
|
Chapter 2. Where to get pkgsrc and how to keep it up-to-date
|
|
|
|
Table of Contents
|
|
|
|
2.1. Getting pkgsrc for the first time
|
|
|
|
2.1.1. As tar file
|
|
2.1.2. Via SUP
|
|
2.1.3. Via anonymous CVS
|
|
|
|
2.2. Keeping pkgsrc up-to-date
|
|
|
|
2.2.1. Via tar files
|
|
2.2.2. Via CVS
|
|
|
|
Before you download and extract the files, you need to decide where you want to
|
|
extract them. When using pkgsrc as root user, pkgsrc is usually installed in /
|
|
usr/pkgsrc. You are though free to install the sources and binary packages
|
|
wherever you want in your filesystem, provided that the pathname does not
|
|
contain white-space or other characters that are interpreted specially by the
|
|
shell and some other programs. A safe bet is to use only letters, digits,
|
|
underscores and dashes.
|
|
|
|
2.1. Getting pkgsrc for the first time
|
|
|
|
Before you download any pkgsrc files, you should decide whether you want the
|
|
current branch or the stable branch. The latter is forked on a quarterly basis
|
|
from the current branch and only gets modified for security updates. The names
|
|
of the stable branches are built from the year and the quarter, for example
|
|
2007Q4.
|
|
|
|
The second step is to decide how you want to download pkgsrc. You can get it as
|
|
a tar file, via SUP, or via CVS. All three ways are described here.
|
|
|
|
2.1.1. As tar file
|
|
|
|
The primary download location for all pkgsrc files is ftp://ftp.NetBSD.org/pub/
|
|
pkgsrc/. There are a number of subdirectories for different purposes, which are
|
|
described in detail in Appendix C, Directory layout of the pkgsrc FTP server.
|
|
|
|
The tar file for the current branch is in the directory current and is called
|
|
pkgsrc.tar.gz. It is autogenerated daily.
|
|
|
|
The tar file for the stable branch 2007Q4 is in the directory pkgsrc-2007Q4 and
|
|
is also called pkgsrc-2007Q4.tar.gz.
|
|
|
|
To download a pkgsrc stable tarball, run:
|
|
|
|
$ ftp ftp://ftp.NetBSD.org/pub/pkgsrc/pkgsrc-200xQy/pkgsrc-200xQy.tar.gz
|
|
|
|
Where pkgsrc-200xQy is the stable branch to be downloaded, for example,
|
|
"pkgsrc-2007Q4".
|
|
|
|
Then, extract it with:
|
|
|
|
$ tar -xzf pkgsrc-200xQy.tar.gz -C /usr
|
|
|
|
This will create the directory pkgsrc/ in /usr/ and all the package source will
|
|
be stored under /usr/pkgsrc/.
|
|
|
|
To download pkgsrc-current, run:
|
|
|
|
$ ftp ftp://ftp.NetBSD.org/pub/pkgsrc/current/pkgsrc.tar.gz
|
|
|
|
2.1.2. Via SUP
|
|
|
|
As an alternative to the tar file, you can get pkgsrc via the Software Update
|
|
Protocol, SUP. To do so, make sure your supfile has a line
|
|
|
|
release=pkgsrc
|
|
|
|
in it, see the examples in /usr/share/examples/supfiles, and that the /usr/
|
|
pkgsrc directory exists. Then, simply run:
|
|
|
|
$ sup -v /path/to/your/supfile.
|
|
|
|
2.1.3. Via anonymous CVS
|
|
|
|
To do an initial (full) checkout of pkgsrc, you first have to set some
|
|
environment variables. For the C-Shell, type:
|
|
|
|
% setenv CVSROOT anoncvs@anoncvs.NetBSD.org:/cvsroot
|
|
% setenv CVS_RSH ssh
|
|
|
|
Or, the same for the bourne shell:
|
|
|
|
$ export CVSROOT="anoncvs@anoncvs.NetBSD.org:/cvsroot"
|
|
$ export CVS_RSH="ssh"
|
|
|
|
By default, CVS doesn't do things like most people would expect it to do. But
|
|
there is a way to convince CVS, by creating a file called .cvsrc in your home
|
|
directory and saving the following lines to it. This file will save you lots of
|
|
headache and some bug reports, so we strongly recommend it. You can find an
|
|
explanation of this file in the CVS documentation.
|
|
|
|
# recommended CVS configuration file from the pkgsrc guide
|
|
checkout -P
|
|
update -dP
|
|
release -d
|
|
diff -upN
|
|
cvs -q -z3
|
|
rdiff -u
|
|
|
|
To fetch a specific pkgsrc stable branch from scratch, run:
|
|
|
|
$ cd /usr
|
|
$ cvs checkout -r pkgsrc-200xQy -P pkgsrc
|
|
|
|
Where pkgsrc-200xQy is the stable branch to be checked out, for example,
|
|
"pkgsrc-2007Q4"
|
|
|
|
This will create the directory pkgsrc/ in your /usr/ directory and all the
|
|
package source will be stored under /usr/pkgsrc/.
|
|
|
|
To fetch the pkgsrc current branch, run:
|
|
|
|
$ cd /usr
|
|
$ cvs checkout -P pkgsrc
|
|
|
|
2.2. Keeping pkgsrc up-to-date
|
|
|
|
The preferred way to keep pkgsrc up-to-date is via CVS (which also works if you
|
|
have first installed it via a tar file). It saves bandwidth and hard disk
|
|
activity, compared to downloading the tar file again.
|
|
|
|
2.2.1. Via tar files
|
|
|
|
Warning
|
|
|
|
When updating from a tar file, you first need to completely remove the old
|
|
pkgsrc directory. Otherwise those files that have been removed from pkgsrc in
|
|
the mean time will not be removed on your local disk, resulting in
|
|
inconsistencies. When removing the old files, any changes that you have done to
|
|
the pkgsrc files will be lost after updating. Therefore updating via CVS is
|
|
strongly recommended.
|
|
|
|
Note that by default the distfiles and the binary packages are saved in the
|
|
pkgsrc tree, so don't forget to rescue them before updating. You can also
|
|
configure pkgsrc to use other than the default directories by setting the
|
|
DISTDIR and PACKAGES variables. See Chapter 5, Configuring pkgsrc for the
|
|
details.
|
|
|
|
To update pkgsrc from a tar file, download the tar file as explained above.
|
|
Then, make sure that you have not made any changes to the files in the pkgsrc
|
|
directory. Remove the pkgsrc directory and extract the new tar file. Done.
|
|
|
|
2.2.2. Via CVS
|
|
|
|
To update pkgsrc via CVS, make sure the environment variable CVS_RSH is set as
|
|
above. Then, change to the pkgsrc directory and run cvs:
|
|
|
|
$ cd /usr/pkgsrc
|
|
$ cvs update -dP
|
|
|
|
2.2.2.1. Switching between different pkgsrc branches
|
|
|
|
When updating pkgsrc, the CVS program keeps track of the branch you selected.
|
|
But if you, for whatever reason, want to switch from the stable branch to the
|
|
current one, you can do it by adding the option "-A" after the "update"
|
|
keyword. To switch from the current branch back to the stable branch, add the
|
|
"-rpkgsrc-2007Q4" option.
|
|
|
|
2.2.2.2. What happens to my changes when updating?
|
|
|
|
When you update pkgsrc, the CVS program will only touch those files that are
|
|
registered in the CVS repository. That means that any packages that you created
|
|
on your own will stay unmodified. If you change files that are managed by CVS,
|
|
later updates will try to merge your changes with those that have been done by
|
|
others. See the CVS manual, chapter "update" for details.
|
|
|
|
Chapter 3. Using pkgsrc on systems other than NetBSD
|
|
|
|
Table of Contents
|
|
|
|
3.1. Binary distribution
|
|
3.2. Bootstrapping pkgsrc
|
|
3.3. Platform-specific notes
|
|
|
|
3.3.1. Darwin (Mac OS X)
|
|
3.3.2. FreeBSD
|
|
3.3.3. Interix
|
|
3.3.4. IRIX
|
|
3.3.5. Linux
|
|
3.3.6. OpenBSD
|
|
3.3.7. Solaris
|
|
|
|
3.1. Binary distribution
|
|
|
|
See Section 4.1, "Using binary packages".
|
|
|
|
3.2. Bootstrapping pkgsrc
|
|
|
|
Installing the bootstrap kit from source should be as simple as:
|
|
|
|
# env CVS_RSH=ssh cvs -d anoncvs@anoncvs.NetBSD.org:/cvsroot checkout pkgsrc
|
|
# cd pkgsrc/bootstrap
|
|
# ./bootstrap
|
|
|
|
|
|
See Chapter 2, Where to get pkgsrc and how to keep it up-to-date for other ways
|
|
to get pkgsrc before bootstrapping. The given bootstrap command will use the
|
|
defaults of /usr/pkg for the prefix where programs will be installed in, and /
|
|
var/db/pkg for the package database directory where pkgsrc will do its internal
|
|
bookkeeping. However, these can also be set using command-line arguments.
|
|
|
|
Note
|
|
|
|
The bootstrap installs a bmake tool. Use this bmake when building via pkgsrc.
|
|
For examples in this guide, use bmake instead of "make".
|
|
|
|
3.3. Platform-specific notes
|
|
|
|
Here are some platform-specific notes you should be aware of.
|
|
|
|
3.3.1. Darwin (Mac OS X)
|
|
|
|
Darwin 5.x and up are supported. There are two methods of using pkgsrc on Mac
|
|
OS X, by using a disk image, or a UFS or HFSX partition.
|
|
|
|
Before you start, you will need to download and install the Mac OS X Developer
|
|
Tools from Apple's Developer Connection. See http://developer.apple.com/macosx/
|
|
for details. Also, make sure you install X11 for Mac OS X and the X11 SDK from
|
|
http://www.apple.com/macosx/x11/download/ if you intend to build packages that
|
|
use the X11 Window System.
|
|
|
|
If you already have a UFS or HFSX partition, or have a spare partition that you
|
|
can format as UFS or HFSX, it is recommended to use that instead of the disk
|
|
image. It'll be somewhat faster and will mount automatically at boot time,
|
|
where you must manually mount a disk image.
|
|
|
|
Note
|
|
|
|
You cannot use an ordinary HFS+ file system for pkgsrc, because pkgsrc
|
|
currently requires the file system to be case-sensitive. You can, however, use
|
|
a case-sensitive HFS+ (aka HFSX) file system as found in Darwin 7.0 and newer.
|
|
|
|
3.3.1.1. Using a disk image
|
|
|
|
Create the disk image:
|
|
|
|
# cd pkgsrc/bootstrap
|
|
# ./darwindiskimage create ~/Documents/NetBSD 1024 # megabytes - season to taste
|
|
# ./darwindiskimage mount ~/Documents/NetBSD
|
|
# sudo chown `id -u`:`id -g` /Volumes/NetBSD
|
|
|
|
Note
|
|
|
|
darwindiskimage will mount the filesystem nosuid, which will cause problems for
|
|
packages that depend on setgid. In the case of UFS, it will also mount the
|
|
filesystem asynchronous, which is somewhat dangerous according to the mount(8)
|
|
man page. In the case of HFSX, it will disable journaling.
|
|
|
|
Allow suid:
|
|
|
|
# sudo mount -u -o suid /Volumes/NetBSD
|
|
|
|
Changing the build directory:
|
|
|
|
After bootstrapping you need to change the default package build directory to
|
|
somewhere outside the disk image so it doesn't get filled up in the process of
|
|
building packages. Add something like that to mk.conf.
|
|
|
|
WRKOBJDIR?= /tmp/pkgsrc # build here instead of in pkgsrc
|
|
|
|
|
|
3.3.1.2. Using a UFS or HFSX partition
|
|
|
|
By default, /usr will be on your root file system, normally HFS+. It is
|
|
possible to use the default prefix of /usr/pkg by symlinking /usr/pkg to a
|
|
directory on a UFS or HFSX file system. Obviously, another symlink is required
|
|
if you want to place the package database directory outside the prefix. e.g.
|
|
|
|
# ./bootstrap --pkgdbdir /usr/pkg/pkgdb
|
|
|
|
If you created your partitions at the time of installing Mac OS X and formatted
|
|
the target partition as UFS or HFSX, it should automatically mount on /Volumes/
|
|
<volume name> when the machine boots. If you are (re)formatting a partition as
|
|
UFS or HFSX, you need to ensure that the partition map correctly reflects
|
|
"Apple_UFS" or "Apple_HFSX" and not "Apple_HFS".
|
|
|
|
The problem is that none of the disk tools will let you touch a disk that is
|
|
booted from. You can unmount the partition, but even if you newfs it, the
|
|
partition type will be incorrect and the automounter won't mount it. It can be
|
|
mounted manually, but it won't appear in Finder.
|
|
|
|
You'll need to boot off of the OS X Installation (User) CD. When the
|
|
Installation program starts, go up to the menu and select Disk Utility. Now,
|
|
you will be able to select the partition you want to be UFS or HFSX, and Format
|
|
it Apple UFS or HFSX. Quit the Disk Utility, quit the installer which will
|
|
reboot your machine. The new UFS or HFSX file system will appear in Finder.
|
|
|
|
Be aware that the permissions on the new file system will be writable by root
|
|
only.
|
|
|
|
This note is as of 10.2 (Jaguar) and applies to earlier versions. Hopefully
|
|
Apple will fix Disk Utility in 10.3 (Panther).
|
|
|
|
3.3.2. FreeBSD
|
|
|
|
FreeBSD 4.7 and 5.0 have been tested and are supported, other versions may
|
|
work.
|
|
|
|
Care should be taken so that the tools that this kit installs do not conflict
|
|
with the FreeBSD userland tools. There are several steps:
|
|
|
|
1. FreeBSD stores its ports pkg database in /var/db/pkg. It is therefore
|
|
recommended that you choose a different location (e.g. /usr/pkgdb) by using
|
|
the --pkgdbdir option to the bootstrap script.
|
|
|
|
2. If you do not intend to use the FreeBSD ports tools, it's probably a good
|
|
idea to move them out of the way to avoid confusion, e.g.
|
|
|
|
# cd /usr/sbin
|
|
# mv pkg_add pkg_add.orig
|
|
# mv pkg_create pkg_create.orig
|
|
# mv pkg_delete pkg_delete.orig
|
|
# mv pkg_info pkg_info.orig
|
|
|
|
|
|
3. An example mk.conf file will be placed in /etc/mk.conf.example file when
|
|
you use the bootstrap script.
|
|
|
|
3.3.3. Interix
|
|
|
|
Interix is a POSIX-compatible subsystem for the Windows NT kernel, providing a
|
|
Unix-like environment with a tighter kernel integration than available with
|
|
Cygwin. It is part of the Windows Services for Unix package, available for free
|
|
for any licensed copy of Windows 2000, XP (not including XP Home), or 2003. SFU
|
|
can be downloaded from http://www.microsoft.com/windows/sfu/.
|
|
|
|
Services for Unix 3.5 has been tested. 3.0 or 3.1 may work, but are not
|
|
officially supported. (The main difference in 3.0/3.1 is lack of pthreads, but
|
|
other parts of libc may also be lacking.)
|
|
|
|
Services for Unix Applications (aka SUA) is an integrated component of Windows
|
|
Server 2003 R2 and Windows Vista. As of this writing, SUA's Interix 5.x
|
|
subsystem has not yet been tested with pkgsrc.
|
|
|
|
3.3.3.1. When installing Interix/SFU
|
|
|
|
At an absolute minimum, the following packages must be installed from the
|
|
Windows Services for Unix 3.5 distribution in order to use pkgsrc:
|
|
|
|
* Utilities -> Base Utilities
|
|
|
|
* Interix GNU Components -> (all)
|
|
|
|
* Remote Connectivity
|
|
|
|
* Interix SDK
|
|
|
|
When using pkgsrc on Interix, DO NOT install the Utilities subcomponent "UNIX
|
|
Perl". That is Perl 5.6 without shared module support, installed to /usr/local,
|
|
and will only cause confusion. Instead, install Perl 5.8 from pkgsrc (or from a
|
|
binary package).
|
|
|
|
The Remote Connectivity subcomponent "Windows Remote Shell Service" does not
|
|
need to be installed, but Remote Connectivity itself should be installed in
|
|
order to have a working inetd.
|
|
|
|
During installation you may be asked whether to enable setuid behavior for
|
|
Interix programs, and whether to make pathnames default to case-sensitive.
|
|
Setuid should be enabled, and case-sensitivity MUST be enabled. (Without
|
|
case-sensitivity, a large number of packages including perl will not build.)
|
|
|
|
NOTE: Newer Windows service packs change the way binary execution works (via
|
|
the Data Execution Prevention feature). In order to use pkgsrc and other
|
|
gcc-compiled binaries reliably, a hotfix containing POSIX.EXE, PSXDLL.DLL,
|
|
PSXRUN.EXE, and PSXSS.EXE (899522 or newer) must be installed. Hotfixes are
|
|
available from Microsoft through a support contract; however, Debian Interix
|
|
Port has made most Interix hotfixes available for personal use from http://
|
|
www.debian-interix.net/hotfixes/.
|
|
|
|
In addition to the hotfix noted above, it may be necessary to disable Data
|
|
Execution Prevention entirely to make Interix functional. This may happen only
|
|
with certain types of CPUs; the cause is not fully understood at this time. If
|
|
gcc or other applications still segfault repeatedly after installing one of the
|
|
hotfixes note above, the following option can be added to the appropriate
|
|
"boot.ini" line on the Windows boot drive: /NoExecute=AlwaysOff (WARNING, this
|
|
will disable DEP completely, which may be a security risk if applications are
|
|
often run as a user in the Administrators group!)
|
|
|
|
3.3.3.2. What to do if Interix/SFU is already installed
|
|
|
|
If SFU is already installed and you wish to alter these settings to work with
|
|
pkgsrc, note the following things.
|
|
|
|
* To uninstall UNIX Perl, use Add/Remove Programs, select Microsoft Windows
|
|
Services for UNIX, then click Change. In the installer, choose Add or
|
|
Remove, then uncheck Utilities->UNIX Perl.
|
|
|
|
* To enable case-sensitivity for the file system, run REGEDIT.EXE, and change
|
|
the following registry key:
|
|
|
|
HKEY_LOCAL_MACHINE\SYSTEM\CurrentControlSet\Control\Session Manager\kernel
|
|
|
|
Set the DWORD value "obcaseinsensitive" to 0; then reboot.
|
|
|
|
* To enable setuid binaries (optional), run REGEDIT.EXE, and change the
|
|
following registry key:
|
|
|
|
HKEY_LOCAL_MACHINE\SOFTWARE\Microsoft\Services for UNIX
|
|
|
|
Set the DWORD value "EnableSetuidBinaries" to 1; then reboot.
|
|
|
|
3.3.3.3. Important notes for using pkgsrc
|
|
|
|
The package manager (either the pkgsrc "su" user, or the user running
|
|
"pkg_add") must be a member of the local Administrators group. Such a user must
|
|
also be used to run the bootstrap. This is slightly relaxed from the normal
|
|
pkgsrc requirement of "root".
|
|
|
|
The package manager should use a umask of 002. "make install" will
|
|
automatically complain if this is not the case. This ensures that directories
|
|
written in /var/db/pkg are Administrators-group writeable.
|
|
|
|
The popular Interix binary packages from http://www.interopsystems.com/ use an
|
|
older version of pkgsrc's pkg_* tools. Ideally, these should NOT be used in
|
|
conjunction with pkgsrc. If you choose to use them at the same time as the
|
|
pkgsrc packages, ensure that you use the proper pkg_* tools for each type of
|
|
binary package.
|
|
|
|
The TERM setting used for DOS-type console windows (including those invoked by
|
|
the csh and ksh startup shortcuts) is "interix". Most systems don't have a
|
|
termcap/terminfo entry for it, but the following .termcap entry provides
|
|
adequate emulation in most cases:
|
|
|
|
interix:kP=\E[S:kN=\E[T:kH=\E[U:dc@:DC@:tc=pcansi:
|
|
|
|
|
|
3.3.3.4. Limitations of the Interix platform
|
|
|
|
Though Interix suffices as a familiar and flexible substitute for a full
|
|
Unix-like platform, it has some drawbacks that should be noted for those
|
|
desiring to make the most of Interix.
|
|
|
|
* X11:
|
|
|
|
Interix comes with the standard set of X11R6 client libraries, and can run
|
|
X11 based applications, but it does not come with an X server. Some options
|
|
are StarNet X-Win32, Hummingbird Exceed (available in a trimmed version for
|
|
Interix from Interop Systems as the Interop X Server), and the free X11
|
|
server included with Cygwin.
|
|
|
|
* X11 acceleration:
|
|
|
|
Because Interix runs in a completely different NT subsystem from Win32
|
|
applications, it does not currently support various X11 protocol extensions
|
|
for acceleration (such as MIT-SHM or DGA). Most interactive applications to
|
|
a local X server will run reasonably fast, but full motion video and other
|
|
graphics intensive applications may require a faster-than-expected CPU.
|
|
|
|
* Audio:
|
|
|
|
Interix has no native support for audio output. For audio support, pkgsrc
|
|
uses the esound client/server audio system on Interix. Unlike on most
|
|
platforms, the audio/esound package does not contain the esd server
|
|
component. To output audio via an Interix host, the emulators/cygwin_esound
|
|
package must also be installed.
|
|
|
|
* CD/DVDs, USB, and SCSI:
|
|
|
|
Direct device access is not currently supported in Interix, so it is not
|
|
currently possible to access CD/DVD drives, USB devices, or SCSI devices
|
|
through non-filesystem means. Among other things, this makes it impossible
|
|
to use Interix directly for CD/DVD burning.
|
|
|
|
* Tape drives:
|
|
|
|
Due to the same limitations as for CD-ROMs and SCSI devices, tape drives
|
|
are also not directly accessible in Interix. However, support is in work to
|
|
make tape drive access possible by using Cygwin as a bridge (similarly to
|
|
audio bridged via Cygwin's esound server).
|
|
|
|
3.3.3.5. Known issues for pkgsrc on Interix
|
|
|
|
It is not necessary, in general, to have a "root" user on the Windows system;
|
|
any member of the local Administrators group will suffice. However, some
|
|
packages currently assume that the user named "root" is the privileged user. To
|
|
accommodate these, you may create such a user; make sure it is in the local
|
|
group Administrators (or your language equivalent).
|
|
|
|
pkg_add creates directories of mode 0755, not 0775, in $PKG_DBDIR. For the time
|
|
being, install packages as the local Administrator (or your language
|
|
equivalent), or run the following command after installing a package to work
|
|
around the issue:
|
|
|
|
# chmod -R g+w $PKG_DBDIR
|
|
|
|
|
|
3.3.4. IRIX
|
|
|
|
You will need a working C compiler, either gcc or SGI's MIPS and MIPSpro
|
|
compiler (cc/c89). Please set the CC environment variable according to your
|
|
preference. If you do not have a license for the MIPSpro compiler suite, you
|
|
can download a gcc tardist file from http://freeware.sgi.com/.
|
|
|
|
Please note that you will need IRIX 6.5.17 or higher, as this is the earliest
|
|
version of IRIX providing support for if_indextoname(3), if_nametoindex(3),
|
|
etc.
|
|
|
|
At this point in time, pkgsrc only supports one ABI at a time. That is, you
|
|
cannot switch between the old 32-bit ABI, the new 32-bit ABI and the 64-bit
|
|
ABI. If you start out using "abi=n32", that's what all your packages will be
|
|
built with.
|
|
|
|
Therefore, please make sure that you have no conflicting CFLAGS in your
|
|
environment or the mk.conf. Particularly, make sure that you do not try to link
|
|
n32 object files with lib64 or vice versa. Check your /etc/compiler.defaults!
|
|
|
|
If you have the actual pkgsrc tree mounted via NFS from a different host,
|
|
please make sure to set WRKOBJDIR to a local directory, as it appears that IRIX
|
|
linker occasionally runs into issues when trying to link over a network-mounted
|
|
file system.
|
|
|
|
The bootstrapping process should set all the right options for programs such as
|
|
imake(1), but you may want to set some options depending on your local setup.
|
|
Please see pkgsrc/mk/defaults/mk.conf and, of course, your compiler's man pages
|
|
for details.
|
|
|
|
If you are using SGI's MIPSPro compiler, please set
|
|
|
|
PKGSRC_COMPILER= mipspro
|
|
|
|
|
|
in mk.conf. Otherwise, pkgsrc will assume you are using gcc and may end up
|
|
passing invalid flags to the compiler. Note that bootstrap should create an
|
|
appropriate mk.conf.example by default.
|
|
|
|
If you have both the MIPSPro compiler chain installed as well as gcc, but want
|
|
to make sure that MIPSPro is used, please set your PATH to not include the
|
|
location of gcc (often /usr/freeware/bin), and (important) pass the
|
|
'--preserve-path' flag.
|
|
|
|
3.3.5. Linux
|
|
|
|
Some versions of Linux (for example Debian GNU/Linux) need either libtermcap or
|
|
libcurses (libncurses). Installing the distributions libncurses-dev package (or
|
|
equivalent) should fix the problem.
|
|
|
|
pkgsrc supports both gcc (GNU Compiler Collection) and icc (Intel C++
|
|
Compiler). gcc is the default. icc 8.0 and 8.1 on i386 have been tested.
|
|
|
|
To bootstrap using icc, assuming the default icc installation directory:
|
|
|
|
env CC=/opt/intel_cc_80/bin/icc LDFLAGS=-static-libcxa \
|
|
ac_cv___attribute__=yes ./bootstrap
|
|
|
|
|
|
Note
|
|
|
|
icc 8.1 needs the `-i-static' argument instead of -static-libcxa.
|
|
|
|
icc supports __attribute__, but the GNU configure test uses a nested function,
|
|
which icc does not support. #undef'ing __attribute__ has the unfortunate
|
|
side-effect of breaking many of the Linux header files, which cannot be
|
|
compiled properly without __attribute__. The test must be overridden so that
|
|
__attribute__ is assumed supported by the compiler.
|
|
|
|
After bootstrapping, you should set PKGSRC_COMPILER in mk.conf:
|
|
|
|
PKGSRC_COMPILER= icc
|
|
|
|
|
|
The default installation directory for icc is /opt/intel_cc_80, which is also
|
|
the pkgsrc default. If you have installed it into a different directory, set
|
|
ICCBASE in mk.conf:
|
|
|
|
ICCBASE= /opt/icc
|
|
|
|
|
|
pkgsrc uses the static linking method of the runtime libraries provided by icc,
|
|
so binaries can be run on other systems which do not have the shared libraries
|
|
installed.
|
|
|
|
Libtool, however, extracts a list of libraries from the ld(1) command run when
|
|
linking a C++ shared library and records it, throwing away the -Bstatic and
|
|
-Bdynamic options interspersed between the libraries. This means that
|
|
libtool-linked C++ shared libraries will have a runtime dependency on the icc
|
|
libraries until this is fixed in libtool.
|
|
|
|
3.3.6. OpenBSD
|
|
|
|
OpenBSD 3.0 and 3.2 are tested and supported.
|
|
|
|
Care should be taken so that the tools that this kit installs do not conflict
|
|
with the OpenBSD userland tools. There are several steps:
|
|
|
|
1. OpenBSD stores its ports pkg database in /var/db/pkg. It is therefore
|
|
recommended that you choose a different location (e.g. /usr/pkgdb) by using
|
|
the --pkgdbdir option to the bootstrap script.
|
|
|
|
2. If you do not intend to use the OpenBSD ports tools, it's probably a good
|
|
idea to move them out of the way to avoid confusion, e.g.
|
|
|
|
# cd /usr/sbin
|
|
# mv pkg_add pkg_add.orig
|
|
# mv pkg_create pkg_create.orig
|
|
# mv pkg_delete pkg_delete.orig
|
|
# mv pkg_info pkg_info.orig
|
|
|
|
|
|
3. An example mk.conf file will be placed in /etc/mk.conf.example file when
|
|
you use the bootstrap script. OpenBSD's make program uses mk.conf as well.
|
|
You can work around this by enclosing all the pkgsrc-specific parts of the
|
|
file with:
|
|
|
|
.ifdef BSD_PKG_MK
|
|
# pkgsrc stuff, e.g. insert defaults/mk.conf or similar here
|
|
.else
|
|
# OpenBSD stuff
|
|
.endif
|
|
|
|
|
|
3.3.7. Solaris
|
|
|
|
Solaris 2.6 through 9 are supported on both x86 and sparc. You will need a
|
|
working C compiler. Both gcc 2.95.3 and Sun WorkShop 5 have been tested.
|
|
|
|
The following packages are required on Solaris 8 for the bootstrap process and
|
|
to build packages.
|
|
|
|
* SUNWsprot
|
|
|
|
* SUNWarc
|
|
|
|
* SUNWbtool
|
|
|
|
* SUNWtoo
|
|
|
|
* SUNWlibm
|
|
|
|
Please note that the use of GNU binutils on Solaris is not supported, as of
|
|
June 2006.
|
|
|
|
Whichever compiler you use, please ensure the compiler tools and your $prefix
|
|
are in your PATH. This includes /usr/ccs/{bin,lib} and e.g. /usr/pkg/
|
|
{bin,sbin}.
|
|
|
|
3.3.7.1. If you are using gcc
|
|
|
|
It makes life much simpler if you only use the same gcc consistently for
|
|
building all packages.
|
|
|
|
It is recommended that an external gcc be used only for bootstrapping, then
|
|
either build gcc from lang/gcc or install a binary gcc package, then remove gcc
|
|
used during bootstrapping.
|
|
|
|
Binary packages of gcc can be found through http://www.sunfreeware.com/.
|
|
|
|
3.3.7.2. If you are using Sun WorkShop
|
|
|
|
You will need at least the following packages installed (from WorkShop 5.0)
|
|
|
|
* SPROcc - Sun WorkShop Compiler C 5.0
|
|
|
|
* SPROcpl - Sun WorkShop Compiler C++ 5.0
|
|
|
|
* SPROild - Sun WorkShop Incremental Linker
|
|
|
|
* SPROlang - Sun WorkShop Compilers common components
|
|
|
|
You should set the following variables in your mk.conf file:
|
|
|
|
CC= cc
|
|
CXX= CC
|
|
CPP= cc -E
|
|
CXXCPP= CC -E
|
|
|
|
Note
|
|
|
|
The CPP setting might break some packages that use the C preprocessor for
|
|
processing things other than C source code.
|
|
|
|
3.3.7.3. Building 64-bit binaries with SunPro
|
|
|
|
To build 64-bit packages, you just need to have the following lines in your
|
|
mk.conf file:
|
|
|
|
PKGSRC_COMPILER= sunpro
|
|
ABI= 64
|
|
|
|
Note
|
|
|
|
This setting has been tested for the SPARC architecture. Intel and AMD machines
|
|
need some more work.
|
|
|
|
3.3.7.4. Common problems
|
|
|
|
Sometimes, when using libtool, /bin/ksh crashes with a segmentation fault. The
|
|
workaround is to use another shell for the configure scripts, for example by
|
|
installing shells/bash and adding the following lines to your mk.conf:
|
|
|
|
CONFIG_SHELL= ${LOCALBASE}/bin/bash
|
|
WRAPPER_SHELL= ${LOCALBASE}/bin/bash
|
|
|
|
|
|
Then, rebuild the devel/libtool-base package.
|
|
|
|
Chapter 4. Using pkgsrc
|
|
|
|
Table of Contents
|
|
|
|
4.1. Using binary packages
|
|
|
|
4.1.1. Finding binary packages
|
|
4.1.2. Installing binary packages
|
|
4.1.3. Deinstalling packages
|
|
4.1.4. Getting information about installed packages
|
|
4.1.5. Checking for security vulnerabilities in installed packages
|
|
4.1.6. Finding if newer versions of your installed packages are in pkgsrc
|
|
4.1.7. Other administrative functions
|
|
4.1.8. A word of warning
|
|
|
|
4.2. Building packages from source
|
|
|
|
4.2.1. Requirements
|
|
4.2.2. Fetching distfiles
|
|
4.2.3. How to build and install
|
|
|
|
Basically, there are two ways of using pkgsrc. The first is to only install the
|
|
package tools and to use binary packages that someone else has prepared. This
|
|
is the "pkg" in pkgsrc. The second way is to install the "src" of pkgsrc, too.
|
|
Then you are able to build your own packages, and you can still use binary
|
|
packages from someone else.
|
|
|
|
4.1. Using binary packages
|
|
|
|
On the ftp.NetBSD.org server and its mirrors, there are collections of binary
|
|
packages, ready to be installed. These binary packages have been built using
|
|
the default settings for the directories, that is:
|
|
|
|
* /usr/pkg for LOCALBASE, where most of the files are installed,
|
|
|
|
* /usr/pkg/etc for configuration files,
|
|
|
|
* /var for VARBASE, where those files are installed that may change after
|
|
installation.
|
|
|
|
If you cannot use these directories for whatever reasons (maybe because you're
|
|
not root), you cannot use these binary packages, but have to build the packages
|
|
yourself, which is explained in Section 3.2, "Bootstrapping pkgsrc".
|
|
|
|
4.1.1. Finding binary packages
|
|
|
|
To install binary packages, you first need to know from where to get them. The
|
|
first place where you should look is on the main pkgsrc FTP server in the
|
|
directory /pub/pkgsrc/packages.
|
|
|
|
This directory contains binary packages for multiple platforms. First, select
|
|
your operating system. (Ignore the directories with version numbers attached to
|
|
it, they just exist for legacy reasons.) Then, select your hardware
|
|
architecture, and in the third step, the OS version and the "version" of
|
|
pkgsrc.
|
|
|
|
In this directory, you often find a file called bootstrap.tar.gz which contains
|
|
the package management tools. If the file is missing, it is likely that your
|
|
operating system already provides those tools. Download the file and extract it
|
|
in the / directory. It will create the directories /usr/pkg (containing the
|
|
tools for managing binary packages) and /var/db/pkg (the database of installed
|
|
packages).
|
|
|
|
4.1.2. Installing binary packages
|
|
|
|
In the directory from the last section, there is a subdirectory called All,
|
|
which contains all the binary packages that are available for the platform,
|
|
excluding those that may not be distributed via FTP or CDROM (depending on
|
|
which medium you are using), and the ones that have vulnerabilities and
|
|
therefore are considered insecure to install without thinking before.
|
|
|
|
To install packages directly from an FTP or HTTP server, run the following
|
|
commands in a Bourne-compatible shell (be sure to su to root first):
|
|
|
|
# PATH="/usr/pkg/sbin:$PATH"
|
|
# PKG_PATH="ftp://ftp.NetBSD.org/pub/pkgsrc/packages/OPSYS/ARCH/VERSIONS/All"
|
|
# export PATH PKG_PATH
|
|
|
|
Instead of URLs, you can also use local paths, for example if you are
|
|
installing from a set of CDROMs, DVDs or an NFS-mounted repository. If you want
|
|
to install packages from multiple sources, you can separate them by a semicolon
|
|
in PKG_PATH.
|
|
|
|
After these preparations, installing a package is very easy:
|
|
|
|
# pkg_add openoffice2
|
|
# pkg_add kde-3.5.7
|
|
# pkg_add ap2-php5-*
|
|
|
|
Note that any prerequisite packages needed to run the package in question will
|
|
be installed, too, assuming they are present where you install from.
|
|
|
|
As mentioned above, packages for which vulnerabilities get known are not stored
|
|
in the All subdirectory. They don't get deleted since that could be very
|
|
frustrating if many other packages depend on it. Instead, they are moved to the
|
|
vulnerable subdirectory. So you may need to add this directory to the PKG_PATH
|
|
variable. However, you should run audit-packages regularly, especially after
|
|
installing new packages, and verify that the vulnerabilities are acceptable for
|
|
your configuration.
|
|
|
|
After you've installed packages, be sure to have /usr/pkg/bin and /usr/pkg/sbin
|
|
in your PATH so you can actually start the just installed program.
|
|
|
|
4.1.3. Deinstalling packages
|
|
|
|
To deinstall a package, it does not matter whether it was installed from source
|
|
code or from a binary package. The pkg_delete command does not know it anyway.
|
|
To delete a package, you can just run pkg_delete package-name. The package name
|
|
can be given with or without version number. Wildcards can also be used to
|
|
deinstall a set of packages, for example *emacs*. Be sure to include them in
|
|
quotes, so that the shell does not expand them before pkg_delete sees them.
|
|
|
|
The -r option is very powerful: it removes all the packages that require the
|
|
package in question and then removes the package itself. For example:
|
|
|
|
# pkg_delete -r jpeg
|
|
|
|
|
|
will remove jpeg and all the packages that used it; this allows upgrading the
|
|
jpeg package.
|
|
|
|
4.1.4. Getting information about installed packages
|
|
|
|
The pkg_info shows information about installed packages or binary package
|
|
files.
|
|
|
|
4.1.5. Checking for security vulnerabilities in installed packages
|
|
|
|
The NetBSD Security-Officer and Packages Groups maintain a list of known
|
|
security vulnerabilities to packages which are (or have been) included in
|
|
pkgsrc. The list is available from the NetBSD FTP site at ftp://ftp.NetBSD.org/
|
|
pub/pkgsrc/distfiles/vulnerabilities.
|
|
|
|
Through security/audit-packages, this list can be downloaded automatically, and
|
|
a security audit of all packages installed on a system can take place.
|
|
|
|
There are two components to security/audit-packages. The first component,
|
|
"download-vulnerability-list", is for downloading the list of vulnerabilities
|
|
from the NetBSD FTP site. The second component, "audit-packages", checks to see
|
|
if any of your installed packages are vulnerable. If a package is vulnerable,
|
|
you will see output similar to the following:
|
|
|
|
Package samba-2.0.9 has a local-root-shell vulnerability, see
|
|
http://www.samba.org/samba/whatsnew/macroexploit.html
|
|
|
|
One can set up security/audit-packages to download the vulnerabilities file
|
|
daily, and include a package audit in the daily security script. Details on
|
|
this are located in the MESSAGE file for security/audit-packages.
|
|
|
|
4.1.6. Finding if newer versions of your installed packages are in pkgsrc
|
|
|
|
Install pkgtools/lintpkgsrc and run lintpkgsrc with the "-i" argument to check
|
|
if your packages are up-to-date, e.g.
|
|
|
|
% lintpkgsrc -i
|
|
...
|
|
Version mismatch: 'tcsh' 6.09.00 vs 6.10.00
|
|
|
|
|
|
You can then use make update to update the package on your system and rebuild
|
|
any dependencies.
|
|
|
|
4.1.7. Other administrative functions
|
|
|
|
The pkg_admin executes various administrative functions on the package system.
|
|
|
|
4.1.8. A word of warning
|
|
|
|
Please pay very careful attention to the warnings expressed in the pkg_add(1)
|
|
manual page about the inherent dangers of installing binary packages which you
|
|
did not create yourself, and the security holes that can be introduced onto
|
|
your system by indiscriminate adding of such files.
|
|
|
|
The same warning of course applies to every package you install from source
|
|
when you haven't completely read and understood the source code of the package,
|
|
the compiler that is used to build the package and all the other tools that are
|
|
involved.
|
|
|
|
4.2. Building packages from source
|
|
|
|
After obtaining pkgsrc, the pkgsrc directory now contains a set of packages,
|
|
organized into categories. You can browse the online index of packages, or run
|
|
make readme from the pkgsrc directory to build local README.html files for all
|
|
packages, viewable with any web browser such as www/lynx or www/firefox.
|
|
|
|
The default prefix for installed packages is /usr/pkg. If you wish to change
|
|
this, you should do so by setting LOCALBASE in mk.conf. You should not try to
|
|
use multiple different LOCALBASE definitions on the same system (inside a
|
|
chroot is an exception).
|
|
|
|
The rest of this chapter assumes that the package is already in pkgsrc. If it
|
|
is not, see Part II, "The pkgsrc developer's guide" for instructions how to
|
|
create your own packages.
|
|
|
|
4.2.1. Requirements
|
|
|
|
To build packages from source, you need a working C compiler. On NetBSD, you
|
|
need to install the "comp" and the "text" distribution sets. If you want to
|
|
build X11-related packages, the "xbase" and "xcomp" distribution sets are
|
|
required, too.
|
|
|
|
4.2.2. Fetching distfiles
|
|
|
|
The first step for building a package is downloading the distfiles (i.e. the
|
|
unmodified source). If they have not yet been downloaded, pkgsrc will fetch
|
|
them automatically.
|
|
|
|
If you have all files that you need in the distfiles directory, you don't need
|
|
to connect. If the distfiles are on CD-ROM, you can mount the CD-ROM on /cdrom
|
|
and add:
|
|
|
|
DISTDIR=/cdrom/pkgsrc/distfiles
|
|
|
|
to your mk.conf.
|
|
|
|
By default a list of distribution sites will be randomly intermixed to prevent
|
|
huge load on servers which holding popular packages (for example,
|
|
SourceForge.net mirrors). Thus, every time when you need to fetch yet another
|
|
distfile all the mirrors will be tried in new (random) order. You can turn this
|
|
feature off by setting MASTER_SORT_RANDOM=NO (for PKG_DEVELOPERs it's already
|
|
disabled).
|
|
|
|
You can overwrite some of the major distribution sites to fit to sites that are
|
|
close to your own. By setting one or two variables you can modify the order in
|
|
which the master sites are accessed. MASTER_SORT contains a whitespace
|
|
delimited list of domain suffixes. MASTER_SORT_REGEX is even more flexible, it
|
|
contains a whitespace delimited list of regular expressions. It has higher
|
|
priority than MASTER_SORT. Have a look at pkgsrc/mk/defaults/mk.conf to find
|
|
some examples. This may save some of your bandwidth and time.
|
|
|
|
You can change these settings either in your shell's environment, or, if you
|
|
want to keep the settings, by editing the mk.conf file, and adding the
|
|
definitions there.
|
|
|
|
If a package depends on many other packages (such as meta-pkgs/kde3), the build
|
|
process may alternate between periods of downloading source, and compiling. To
|
|
ensure you have all the source downloaded initially you can run the command:
|
|
|
|
% make fetch-list | sh
|
|
|
|
which will output and run a set of shell commands to fetch the necessary files
|
|
into the distfiles directory. You can also choose to download the files
|
|
manually.
|
|
|
|
4.2.3. How to build and install
|
|
|
|
Once the software has downloaded, any patches will be applied, then it will be
|
|
compiled for you. This may take some time depending on your computer, and how
|
|
many other packages the software depends on and their compile time.
|
|
|
|
Note
|
|
|
|
If using bootstrap or pkgsrc on a non-NetBSD system, use the pkgsrc bmake
|
|
command instead of "make" in the examples in this guide.
|
|
|
|
For example, type
|
|
|
|
% cd misc/figlet
|
|
% make
|
|
|
|
|
|
at the shell prompt to build the various components of the package.
|
|
|
|
The next stage is to actually install the newly compiled program onto your
|
|
system. Do this by entering:
|
|
|
|
% make install
|
|
|
|
|
|
while you are still in the directory for whatever package you are installing.
|
|
|
|
Installing the package on your system may require you to be root. However,
|
|
pkgsrc has a just-in-time-su feature, which allows you to only become root for
|
|
the actual installation step.
|
|
|
|
That's it, the software should now be installed and setup for use. You can now
|
|
enter:
|
|
|
|
% make clean
|
|
|
|
|
|
to remove the compiled files in the work directory, as you shouldn't need them
|
|
any more. If other packages were also added to your system (dependencies) to
|
|
allow your program to compile, you can tidy these up also with the command:
|
|
|
|
% make clean-depends
|
|
|
|
|
|
Taking the figlet utility as an example, we can install it on our system by
|
|
building as shown in Appendix B, Build logs.
|
|
|
|
The program is installed under the default root of the packages tree - /usr/
|
|
pkg. Should this not conform to your tastes, set the LOCALBASE variable in your
|
|
environment, and it will use that value as the root of your packages tree. So,
|
|
to use /usr/local, set LOCALBASE=/usr/local in your environment. Please note
|
|
that you should use a directory which is dedicated to packages and not shared
|
|
with other programs (i.e., do not try and use LOCALBASE=/usr). Also, you should
|
|
not try to add any of your own files or directories (such as src/, obj/, or
|
|
pkgsrc/) below the LOCALBASE tree. This is to prevent possible conflicts
|
|
between programs and other files installed by the package system and whatever
|
|
else may have been installed there.
|
|
|
|
Some packages look in mk.conf to alter some configuration options at build
|
|
time. Have a look at pkgsrc/mk/defaults/mk.conf to get an overview of what will
|
|
be set there by default. Environment variables such as LOCALBASE can be set in
|
|
mk.conf to save having to remember to set them each time you want to use
|
|
pkgsrc.
|
|
|
|
Occasionally, people want to "look under the covers" to see what is going on
|
|
when a package is building or being installed. This may be for debugging
|
|
purposes, or out of simple curiosity. A number of utility values have been
|
|
added to help with this.
|
|
|
|
1. If you invoke the make(1) command with PKG_DEBUG_LEVEL=2, then a huge
|
|
amount of information will be displayed. For example,
|
|
|
|
make patch PKG_DEBUG_LEVEL=2
|
|
|
|
will show all the commands that are invoked, up to and including the
|
|
"patch" stage.
|
|
|
|
2. If you want to know the value of a certain make(1) definition, then the
|
|
VARNAME definition should be used, in conjunction with the show-var target.
|
|
e.g. to show the expansion of the make(1) variable LOCALBASE:
|
|
|
|
% make show-var VARNAME=LOCALBASE
|
|
/usr/pkg
|
|
%
|
|
|
|
|
|
If you want to install a binary package that you've either created yourself
|
|
(see next section), that you put into pkgsrc/packages manually or that is
|
|
located on a remote FTP server, you can use the "bin-install" target. This
|
|
target will install a binary package - if available - via pkg_add(1), else do a
|
|
make package. The list of remote FTP sites searched is kept in the variable
|
|
BINPKG_SITES, which defaults to ftp.NetBSD.org. Any flags that should be added
|
|
to pkg_add(1) can be put into BIN_INSTALL_FLAGS. See pkgsrc/mk/defaults/mk.conf
|
|
for more details.
|
|
|
|
A final word of warning: If you set up a system that has a non-standard setting
|
|
for LOCALBASE, be sure to set that before any packages are installed, as you
|
|
cannot use several directories for the same purpose. Doing so will result in
|
|
pkgsrc not being able to properly detect your installed packages, and fail
|
|
miserably. Note also that precompiled binary packages are usually built with
|
|
the default LOCALBASE of /usr/pkg, and that you should not install any if you
|
|
use a non-standard LOCALBASE.
|
|
|
|
Chapter 5. Configuring pkgsrc
|
|
|
|
Table of Contents
|
|
|
|
5.1. General configuration
|
|
5.2. Variables affecting the build process
|
|
5.3. Variables affecting the installation process
|
|
5.4. Selecting and configuring the compiler
|
|
|
|
5.4.1. Selecting the compiler
|
|
5.4.2. Additional flags to the compiler (CFLAGS)
|
|
5.4.3. Additional flags to the linker (LDFLAGS)
|
|
|
|
5.5. Developer/advanced settings
|
|
5.6. Selecting Build Options
|
|
|
|
The whole pkgsrc system is configured in a single file, usually called mk.conf.
|
|
In which directory pkgsrc looks for that file depends on the installation. On
|
|
NetBSD, when you use make(1) from the base system, it is in the directory /etc
|
|
/. In all other cases the default location is ${PREFIX}/etc/, depending on
|
|
where you told the bootstrap program to install the binary packages.
|
|
|
|
During the bootstrap, an example configuration file is created. To use that,
|
|
you have to create the directory ${PREFIX}/etc and copy the example file there.
|
|
|
|
The format of the configuration file is that of the usual BSD-style Makefiles.
|
|
The whole pkgsrc configuration is done by setting variables in this file. Note
|
|
that you can define all kinds of variables, and no special error checking (for
|
|
example for spelling mistakes) takes place, so you have to try it out to see if
|
|
it works.
|
|
|
|
5.1. General configuration
|
|
|
|
In this section, you can find some variables that apply to all pkgsrc packages.
|
|
A complete list of the variables that can be configured by the user is
|
|
available in mk/defaults/mk.conf, together with some comments that describe
|
|
each variable's intent.
|
|
|
|
* LOCALBASE: Where packages will be installed. The default is /usr/pkg. Do
|
|
not mix binary packages with different LOCALBASEs!
|
|
|
|
* CROSSBASE: Where "cross" category packages will be installed. The default
|
|
is ${LOCALBASE}/cross.
|
|
|
|
* X11BASE: Where X11 is installed on the system. The default is /usr/X11R6.
|
|
|
|
* DISTDIR: Where to store the downloaded copies of the original source
|
|
distributions used for building pkgsrc packages. The default is $
|
|
{PKGSRCDIR}/distfiles.
|
|
|
|
* PKG_DBDIR: Where the database about installed packages is stored. The
|
|
default is /var/db/pkg.
|
|
|
|
* MASTER_SITE_OVERRIDE: If set, override the packages' MASTER_SITES with this
|
|
value.
|
|
|
|
* MASTER_SITE_BACKUP: Backup location(s) for distribution files and patch
|
|
files if not found locally or in ${MASTER_SITES} or ${PATCH_SITES}
|
|
respectively. The defaults are ftp://ftp.NetBSD.org/pub/NetBSD/packages/
|
|
distfiles/${DIST_SUBDIR}/ and ftp://ftp.freebsd.org/pub/FreeBSD/distfiles/$
|
|
{DIST_SUBDIR}/.
|
|
|
|
* BINPKG_SITES: List of sites carrying binary pkgs. rel and arch are replaced
|
|
with OS release ("2.0", etc.) and architecture ("mipsel", etc.).
|
|
|
|
* ACCEPTABLE_LICENSES: List of acceptable licenses. Whenever you try to build
|
|
a package whose license is not in this list, you will get an error message
|
|
that includes instructions on how to change this variable.
|
|
|
|
5.2. Variables affecting the build process
|
|
|
|
XXX
|
|
|
|
* PACKAGES: The top level directory for the binary packages. The default is $
|
|
{PKGSRCDIR}/packages.
|
|
|
|
* WRKOBJDIR: The top level directory where, if defined, the separate working
|
|
directories will get created, and symbolically linked to from ${WRKDIR}
|
|
(see below). This is useful for building packages on several architectures,
|
|
then ${PKGSRCDIR} can be NFS-mounted while ${WRKOBJDIR} is local to every
|
|
architecture. (It should be noted that PKGSRCDIR should not be set by the
|
|
user ? it is an internal definition which refers to the root of the pkgsrc
|
|
tree. It is possible to have many pkgsrc tree instances.)
|
|
|
|
* LOCALPATCHES: Directory for local patches that aren't part of pkgsrc. See
|
|
Section 11.3, "patches/*" for more information.
|
|
|
|
* PKGMAKECONF: Location of the mk.conf file used by a package's BSD-style
|
|
Makefile. If this is not set, MAKECONF is set to /dev/null to avoid picking
|
|
up settings used by builds in /usr/src.
|
|
|
|
* DEPENDS_TARGET: By default, dependencies are only installed, and no binary
|
|
package is created for them. You can set this variable to package to
|
|
automatically create binary packages after installing dependencies.
|
|
|
|
5.3. Variables affecting the installation process
|
|
|
|
A growing number of packages support installation into a subdirectory of
|
|
WRKDIR. This allows a package to be built, before the actual filesystem is
|
|
touched. DESTDIR support exists in two variations:
|
|
|
|
* Basic DESTDIR support means that the package installation and packaging is
|
|
still run as root.
|
|
|
|
* Full DESTDIR support can run the complete build, installation and packaging
|
|
as normal user. Root privileges are only needed to add packages.
|
|
|
|
To use the DESTDIR support, set either USE_DESTDIR=yes to use the basic support
|
|
for packages that offer it or USE_DESTDIR=full to get the full support with
|
|
fallback to basic support. USE_DESTDIR=full needs pkgtools/pkg_install version
|
|
20070802 (or newer). It might become the default DESTDIR support later.
|
|
|
|
DESTDIR support changes the behaviour of various targets slightly. To install a
|
|
package after building it, use package-install. package and install don't do
|
|
that any longer. package-install can be used as DEPENDS_TARGET. bin-install
|
|
will ask for the root password to install the package and fail, package-install
|
|
will ask again.
|
|
|
|
With basic DESTDIR support, make clean needs to be run as root.
|
|
|
|
5.4. Selecting and configuring the compiler
|
|
|
|
5.4.1. Selecting the compiler
|
|
|
|
By default, pkgsrc will use GCC to build packages. This may be overridden by
|
|
setting the following variables in /etc/mk.conf:
|
|
|
|
PKGSRC_COMPILER:
|
|
|
|
This is a list of values specifying the chain of compilers to invoke when
|
|
building packages. Valid values are:
|
|
|
|
* distcc: distributed C/C++ (chainable)
|
|
|
|
* ccache: compiler cache (chainable)
|
|
|
|
* gcc: GNU C/C++ Compiler
|
|
|
|
* mipspro: Silicon Graphics, Inc. MIPSpro (n32/n64)
|
|
|
|
* mipspro: Silicon Graphics, Inc. MIPSpro (o32)
|
|
|
|
* sunpro: Sun Microsystems, Inc. WorkShip/Forte/Sun ONE Studio
|
|
|
|
The default is "gcc". You can use ccache and/or distcc with an appropriate
|
|
PKGSRC_COMPILER setting, e.g. "ccache gcc". This variable should always be
|
|
terminated with a value for a real compiler. Note that only one real
|
|
compiler should be listed (e.g. "sunpro gcc" is not allowed).
|
|
|
|
GCC_REQD:
|
|
|
|
This specifies the minimum version of GCC to use when building packages. If
|
|
the system GCC doesn't satisfy this requirement, then pkgsrc will build and
|
|
install one of the GCC packages to use instead.
|
|
|
|
5.4.2. Additional flags to the compiler (CFLAGS)
|
|
|
|
If you wish to set the CFLAGS variable, please make sure to use the += operator
|
|
instead of the = operator:
|
|
|
|
CFLAGS+= -your -flags
|
|
|
|
Using CFLAGS= (i.e. without the "+") may lead to problems with packages that
|
|
need to add their own flags. Also, you may want to take a look at the devel/
|
|
cpuflags package if you're interested in optimization for the current CPU.
|
|
|
|
5.4.3. Additional flags to the linker (LDFLAGS)
|
|
|
|
If you want to pass flags to the linker, both in the configure step and the
|
|
build step, you can do this in two ways. Either set LDFLAGS or LIBS. The
|
|
difference between the two is that LIBS will be appended to the command line,
|
|
while LDFLAGS come earlier. LDFLAGS is pre-loaded with rpath settings for ELF
|
|
machines depending on the setting of USE_IMAKE or the inclusion of mk/
|
|
x11.buildlink3.mk. As with CFLAGS, if you do not wish to override these
|
|
settings, use the += operator:
|
|
|
|
LDFLAGS+= -your -linkerflags
|
|
|
|
5.5. Developer/advanced settings
|
|
|
|
XXX
|
|
|
|
* PKG_DEVELOPER: Run some sanity checks that package developers want:
|
|
|
|
o make sure patches apply with zero fuzz
|
|
|
|
o run check-shlibs to see that all binaries will find their shared libs.
|
|
|
|
* PKG_DEBUG_LEVEL: The level of debugging output which is displayed whilst
|
|
making and installing the package. The default value for this is 0, which
|
|
will not display the commands as they are executed (normal, default, quiet
|
|
operation); the value 1 will display all shell commands before their
|
|
invocation, and the value 2 will display both the shell commands before
|
|
their invocation, and their actual execution progress with set -x will be
|
|
displayed.
|
|
|
|
5.6. Selecting Build Options
|
|
|
|
Some packages have build time options, usually to select between different
|
|
dependencies, enable optional support for big dependencies or enable
|
|
experimental features.
|
|
|
|
To see which options, if any, a package supports, and which options are
|
|
mutually exclusive, run make show-options, for example:
|
|
|
|
The following options are supported by this package:
|
|
ssl Enable SSL support.
|
|
Exactly one of the following gecko options is required:
|
|
firefox Use firefox as gecko rendering engine.
|
|
mozilla Use mozilla as gecko rendering engine.
|
|
At most one of the following database options may be selected:
|
|
mysql Enable support for MySQL database.
|
|
pgsql Enable support for PostgreSQL database.
|
|
|
|
These options are enabled by default: firefox
|
|
These options are currently enabled: mozilla ssl
|
|
|
|
The following variables can be defined in mk.conf to select which options to
|
|
enable for a package: PKG_DEFAULT_OPTIONS, which can be used to select or
|
|
disable options for all packages that support them, and PKG_OPTIONS.pkgbase,
|
|
which can be used to select or disable options specifically for package pkgbase
|
|
. Options listed in these variables are selected, options preceded by "-" are
|
|
disabled. A few examples:
|
|
|
|
$ grep "PKG.*OPTION" mk.conf
|
|
PKG_DEFAULT_OPTIONS= -arts -dvdread -esound
|
|
PKG_OPTIONS.kdebase= debug -sasl
|
|
PKG_OPTIONS.apache= suexec
|
|
|
|
It is important to note that options that were specifically suggested by the
|
|
package maintainer must be explicitely removed if you do not wish to include
|
|
the option. If you are unsure you can view the current state with make
|
|
show-options.
|
|
|
|
The following settings are consulted in the order given, and the last setting
|
|
that selects or disables an option is used:
|
|
|
|
1. the default options as suggested by the package maintainer
|
|
|
|
2. the options implied by the settings of legacy variables (see below)
|
|
|
|
3. PKG_DEFAULT_OPTIONS
|
|
|
|
4. PKG_OPTIONS.pkgbase
|
|
|
|
For groups of mutually exclusive options, the last option selected is used, all
|
|
others are automatically disabled. If an option of the group is explicitly
|
|
disabled, the previously selected option, if any, is used. It is an error if no
|
|
option from a required group of options is selected, and building the package
|
|
will fail.
|
|
|
|
Before the options framework was introduced, build options were selected by
|
|
setting a variable (often named USE_FOO) in mk.conf for each option. To ease
|
|
transition to the options framework for the user, these legacy variables are
|
|
converted to the appropriate options setting (PKG_OPTIONS.pkgbase)
|
|
automatically. A warning is issued to prompt the user to update mk.conf to use
|
|
the options framework directly. Support for the legacy variables will be
|
|
removed eventually.
|
|
|
|
Chapter 6. Creating binary packages
|
|
|
|
Table of Contents
|
|
|
|
6.1. Building a single binary package
|
|
6.2. Settings for creation of binary packages
|
|
|
|
6.1. Building a single binary package
|
|
|
|
Once you have built and installed a package, you can create a binary package
|
|
which can be installed on another system with pkg_add(1). This saves having to
|
|
build the same package on a group of hosts and wasting CPU time. It also
|
|
provides a simple means for others to install your package, should you
|
|
distribute it.
|
|
|
|
To create a binary package, change into the appropriate directory in pkgsrc,
|
|
and run make package:
|
|
|
|
# cd misc/figlet
|
|
# make package
|
|
|
|
|
|
This will build and install your package (if not already done), and then build
|
|
a binary package from what was installed. You can then use the pkg_* tools to
|
|
manipulate it. Binary packages are created by default in /usr/pkgsrc/packages,
|
|
in the form of a gzipped tar file. See Section B.2, "Packaging figlet" for a
|
|
continuation of the above misc/figlet example.
|
|
|
|
See Chapter 21, Submitting and Committing for information on how to submit such
|
|
a binary package.
|
|
|
|
6.2. Settings for creation of binary packages
|
|
|
|
See Section 17.17, "Other helpful targets".
|
|
|
|
Chapter 7. Creating binary packages for everything in pkgsrc (bulk builds)
|
|
|
|
Table of Contents
|
|
|
|
7.1. Think first, build later
|
|
7.2. Requirements of a bulk build
|
|
7.3. Running an old-style bulk build
|
|
|
|
7.3.1. Configuration
|
|
7.3.2. Other environmental considerations
|
|
7.3.3. Operation
|
|
7.3.4. What it does
|
|
7.3.5. Disk space requirements
|
|
7.3.6. Setting up a sandbox for chrooted builds
|
|
7.3.7. Building a partial set of packages
|
|
7.3.8. Uploading results of a bulk build
|
|
|
|
7.4. Running a pbulk-style bulk build
|
|
|
|
7.4.1. Configuration
|
|
|
|
7.5. Creating a multiple CD-ROM packages collection
|
|
|
|
7.5.1. Example of cdpack
|
|
|
|
When you have multiple machines that should run the same packages, it is wasted
|
|
time if they all build their packages themselves from source. There are two
|
|
ways of getting a set of binary packages: The old bulk build system, or the new
|
|
(as of 2007) parallel bulk build (pbulk) system. This chapter describes how to
|
|
set them up so that the packages are most likely to be usable later.
|
|
|
|
7.1. Think first, build later
|
|
|
|
Since a bulk build takes several days or even weeks to finish, you should think
|
|
about the setup before you start everything. Pay attention to at least the
|
|
following points:
|
|
|
|
* If you want to upload the binary packages to ftp.NetBSD.org, make sure the
|
|
setup complies to the requirements for binary packages:
|
|
|
|
o To end up on ftp.NetBSD.org, the packages must be built by a NetBSD
|
|
developer on a trusted machine (that is, where you and only you have
|
|
root access).
|
|
|
|
o Packages on ftp.NetBSD.org should only be created from the stable
|
|
branches (like 2007Q1), so that users browsing the available
|
|
collections can see at a glance how old the packages are.
|
|
|
|
o The packages must be built as root, since some packages require set-uid
|
|
binaries at runtime, and creating those packages as unprivileged user
|
|
doesn't work well at the moment.
|
|
|
|
* Make sure that the bulk build cannot break anything in your system. Most
|
|
bulk builds run as root, so they should be run at least in a chroot
|
|
environment or something even more restrictive, depending on what the
|
|
operating system provides. There have been numerous cases where certain
|
|
packages tried to install files outside the LOCALBASE or wanted to edit
|
|
some files in /etc. Furthermore, the bulk builds install and deinstall
|
|
packages in /usr/pkg (or whatever LOCALBASE is) during their operation, so
|
|
be sure that you don't need any package during the build.
|
|
|
|
7.2. Requirements of a bulk build
|
|
|
|
A complete bulk build requires lots of disk space. Some of the disk space can
|
|
be read-only, some other must be writable. Some can be on remote filesystems
|
|
(such as NFS) and some should be local. Some can be temporary filesystems,
|
|
others must survive a sudden reboot.
|
|
|
|
* 10 GB for the distfiles (read-write, remote, temporary)
|
|
|
|
* 10 GB for the binary packages (read-write, remote, permanent)
|
|
|
|
* 400 MB for the pkgsrc tree (read-only, remote, permanent)
|
|
|
|
* 5 GB for LOCALBASE (read-write, local, temporary for pbulk, permanent for
|
|
old-bulk)
|
|
|
|
* 5 GB for the log files (read-write, remote, permanent)
|
|
|
|
* 5 GB for temporary files (read-write, local, temporary)
|
|
|
|
7.3. Running an old-style bulk build
|
|
|
|
Warning
|
|
|
|
The rest of this section is rather old. Don't rely on it too much.
|
|
|
|
7.3.1. Configuration
|
|
|
|
7.3.1.1. build.conf
|
|
|
|
The build.conf file is the main configuration file for bulk builds. You can
|
|
configure how your copy of pkgsrc is kept up to date, how the distfiles are
|
|
downloaded, how the packages are built and how the report is generated. You can
|
|
find an annotated example file in pkgsrc/mk/bulk/build.conf-example. To use it,
|
|
copy build.conf-example to build.conf and edit it, following the comments in
|
|
that file.
|
|
|
|
7.3.1.2. mk.conf
|
|
|
|
You may want to set variables in mk.conf. Look at pkgsrc/mk/defaults/mk.conf
|
|
for details of the default settings. You will want to ensure that
|
|
ACCEPTABLE_LICENSES meet your local policy. As used in this example,
|
|
_ACCEPTABLE=yes completely bypasses the license check.
|
|
|
|
PACKAGES?= ${_PKGSRCDIR}/packages/${MACHINE_ARCH}
|
|
WRKOBJDIR?= /usr/tmp/pkgsrc # build here instead of in pkgsrc
|
|
BSDSRCDIR= /usr/src
|
|
BSDXSRCDIR= /usr/xsrc # for x11/xservers
|
|
OBJHOSTNAME?= yes # use work.`hostname`
|
|
FAILOVER_FETCH= yes # insist on the correct checksum
|
|
PKG_DEVELOPER?= yes
|
|
_ACCEPTABLE= yes
|
|
|
|
Some options that are especially useful for bulk builds can be found at the top
|
|
lines of the file mk/bulk/bsd.bulk-pkg.mk. The most useful options of these are
|
|
briefly described here.
|
|
|
|
* If you are on a slow machine, you may want to set USE_BULK_BROKEN_CHECK to
|
|
"no".
|
|
|
|
* If you are doing bulk builds from a read-only copy of pkgsrc, you have to
|
|
set BULKFILESDIR to the directory where all log files are created.
|
|
Otherwise the log files are created in the pkgsrc directory.
|
|
|
|
* Another important variable is BULK_PREREQ, which is a list of packages that
|
|
should be always available while building other packages.
|
|
|
|
Some other options are scattered in the pkgsrc infrastructure:
|
|
|
|
* ALLOW_VULNERABLE_PACKAGES should be set to yes. The purpose of the bulk
|
|
builds is creating binary packages, no matter if they are vulnerable or
|
|
not. When uploading the packages to a public server, the vulnerable
|
|
packages will be put into a directory of their own. Leaving this variable
|
|
unset would prevent the bulk build system from even trying to build them,
|
|
so possible building errors would not show up.
|
|
|
|
* CHECK_FILES (pkgsrc/mk/check/check-files.mk) can be set to "yes" to check
|
|
that the installed set of files matches the PLIST.
|
|
|
|
* CHECK_INTERPRETER (pkgsrc/mk/check/check-interpreter.mk) can be set to
|
|
"yes" to check that the installed "#!"-scripts will find their interpreter.
|
|
|
|
* PKGSRC_RUN_TEST can be set to "yes" to run each package's self-test before
|
|
installing it. Note that some packages make heavy use of "good" random
|
|
numbers, so you need to assure that the machine on which you are doing the
|
|
bulk builds is not completely idle. Otherwise some test programs will seem
|
|
to hang, while they are just waiting for new random data to be available.
|
|
|
|
7.3.1.3. pre-build.local
|
|
|
|
It is possible to configure the bulk build to perform certain site-specific
|
|
tasks at the end of the pre-build stage. If the file pre-build.local exists in
|
|
/usr/pkgsrc/mk/bulk, it will be executed (as a sh(1) script) at the end of the
|
|
usual pre-build stage. An example use of pre-build.local is to have the line:
|
|
|
|
echo "I do not have enough disk space to build this pig." \
|
|
> misc/openoffice/$BROKENF
|
|
|
|
to prevent the system from trying to build a particular package which requires
|
|
nearly 3 GB of disk space.
|
|
|
|
7.3.2. Other environmental considerations
|
|
|
|
As /usr/pkg will be completely deleted at the start of bulk builds, make sure
|
|
your login shell is placed somewhere else. Either drop it into /usr/local/bin
|
|
(and adjust your login shell in the passwd file), or (re-)install it via
|
|
pkg_add(1) from /etc/rc.local, so you can login after a reboot (remember that
|
|
your current process won't die if the package is removed, you just can't start
|
|
any new instances of the shell any more). Also, if you use NetBSD earlier than
|
|
1.5, or you still want to use the pkgsrc version of ssh for some reason, be
|
|
sure to install ssh before starting it from rc.local:
|
|
|
|
(cd /usr/pkgsrc/security/ssh && make bulk-install)
|
|
if [ -f /usr/pkg/etc/rc.d/sshd ]; then
|
|
/usr/pkg/etc/rc.d/sshd
|
|
fi
|
|
|
|
Not doing so will result in you being not able to log in via ssh after the bulk
|
|
build is finished or if the machine gets rebooted or crashes. You have been
|
|
warned! :)
|
|
|
|
7.3.3. Operation
|
|
|
|
Make sure you don't need any of the packages still installed.
|
|
|
|
Warning
|
|
|
|
During the bulk build, all packages, their configuration files and some more
|
|
files from /var, /home and possibly other locations will be removed! So don't
|
|
run a bulk build with privileges that might harm your system.
|
|
|
|
Be sure to remove all other things that might interfere with builds, like some
|
|
libs installed in /usr/local, etc. then become root and type:
|
|
|
|
# cd /usr/pkgsrc
|
|
# sh mk/bulk/build
|
|
|
|
|
|
If for some reason your last build didn't complete (power failure, system
|
|
panic, ...), you can continue it by running:
|
|
|
|
# sh mk/bulk/build restart
|
|
|
|
At the end of the bulk build, you will get a summary via mail, and find build
|
|
logs in the directory specified by FTP in the build.conf file.
|
|
|
|
7.3.4. What it does
|
|
|
|
The bulk builds consist of three steps:
|
|
|
|
1. pre-build
|
|
|
|
The script updates your pkgsrc tree via (anon)cvs, then cleans out any
|
|
broken distfiles, and removes all packages installed.
|
|
|
|
2. the bulk build
|
|
|
|
This is basically "make bulk-package" with an optimised order in which
|
|
packages will be built. Packages that don't require other packages will be
|
|
built first, and packages with many dependencies will be built later.
|
|
|
|
3. post-build
|
|
|
|
Generates a report that's placed in the directory specified in the
|
|
build.conf file named broken.html, a short version of that report will also
|
|
be mailed to the build's admin.
|
|
|
|
During the build, a list of broken packages will be compiled in /usr/pkgsrc
|
|
/.broken (or .../.broken.${MACHINE} if OBJMACHINE is set), individual build
|
|
logs of broken builds can be found in the package's directory. These files are
|
|
used by the bulk-targets to mark broken builds to not waste time trying to
|
|
rebuild them, and they can be used to debug these broken package builds later.
|
|
|
|
7.3.5. Disk space requirements
|
|
|
|
Currently, roughly the following requirements are valid for NetBSD 2.0/i386:
|
|
|
|
* 10 GB - distfiles (NFS ok)
|
|
|
|
* 8 GB - full set of all binaries (NFS ok)
|
|
|
|
* 5 GB - temp space for compiling (local disk recommended)
|
|
|
|
Note that all pkgs will be de-installed as soon as they are turned into a
|
|
binary package, and that sources are removed, so there is no excessively huge
|
|
demand to disk space. Afterwards, if the package is needed again, it will be
|
|
installed via pkg_add(1) instead of building again, so there are no cycles
|
|
wasted by recompiling.
|
|
|
|
7.3.6. Setting up a sandbox for chrooted builds
|
|
|
|
If you don't want all the packages nuked from a machine (rendering it useless
|
|
for anything but pkg compiling), there is the possibility of doing the package
|
|
bulk build inside a chroot environment.
|
|
|
|
The first step is to set up a chroot sandbox, e.g. /usr/sandbox. This can be
|
|
done by using null mounts, or manually.
|
|
|
|
There is a shell script called pkgsrc/mk/bulk/mksandbox which will set up the
|
|
sandbox environment using null mounts. It will also create a script called
|
|
sandbox in the root of the sandbox environment, which will allow the null
|
|
mounts to be activated using the sandbox mount command and deactivated using
|
|
the sandbox umount command.
|
|
|
|
To set up a sandbox environment by hand, after extracting all the sets from a
|
|
NetBSD installation or doing a make distribution DESTDIR=/usr/sandbox in /usr/
|
|
src/etc, be sure the following items are present and properly configured:
|
|
|
|
1. Kernel
|
|
|
|
# cp /netbsd /usr/sandbox
|
|
|
|
2. /dev/*
|
|
|
|
# cd /usr/sandbox/dev ; sh MAKEDEV all
|
|
|
|
3. /etc/resolv.conf (for security/smtpd and mail):
|
|
|
|
# cp /etc/resolv.conf /usr/sandbox/etc
|
|
|
|
4. Working(!) mail config (hostname, sendmail.cf):
|
|
|
|
# cp /etc/mail/sendmail.cf /usr/sandbox/etc/mail
|
|
|
|
5. /etc/localtime (for security/smtpd):
|
|
|
|
# ln -sf /usr/share/zoneinfo/UTC /usr/sandbox/etc/localtime
|
|
|
|
6. /usr/src (system sources, e. g. for sysutils/aperture):
|
|
|
|
# ln -s ../disk1/cvs .
|
|
# ln -s cvs/src-2.0 src
|
|
|
|
7. Create /var/db/pkg (not part of default install):
|
|
|
|
# mkdir /usr/sandbox/var/db/pkg
|
|
|
|
8. Create /usr/pkg (not part of default install):
|
|
|
|
# mkdir /usr/sandbox/usr/pkg
|
|
|
|
9. Checkout pkgsrc via cvs into /usr/sandbox/usr/pkgsrc:
|
|
|
|
# cd /usr/sandbox/usr
|
|
# cvs -d anoncvs@anoncvs.NetBSD.org:/cvsroot checkout -d -P pkgsrc
|
|
|
|
|
|
Do not mount/link this to the copy of your pkgsrc tree you do development
|
|
in, as this will likely cause problems!
|
|
|
|
10. Make /usr/sandbox/usr/pkgsrc/packages and .../distfiles point somewhere
|
|
appropriate. NFS- and/or nullfs-mounts may come in handy!
|
|
|
|
11. Edit mk.conf, see Section 7.3.1.2, "mk.conf".
|
|
|
|
12. Adjust mk/bulk/build.conf to suit your needs.
|
|
|
|
When the chroot sandbox is set up, you can start the build with the following
|
|
steps:
|
|
|
|
# cd /usr/sandbox/usr/pkgsrc
|
|
# sh mk/bulk/do-sandbox-build
|
|
|
|
|
|
This will just jump inside the sandbox and start building. At the end of the
|
|
build, mail will be sent with the results of the build. Created binary pkgs
|
|
will be in /usr/sandbox/usr/pkgsrc/packages (wherever that points/mounts to/
|
|
from).
|
|
|
|
7.3.7. Building a partial set of packages
|
|
|
|
In addition to building a complete set of all packages in pkgsrc, the pkgsrc/mk
|
|
/bulk/build script may be used to build a subset of the packages contained in
|
|
pkgsrc. By setting SPECIFIC_PKGS in mk.conf, the variables
|
|
|
|
* SITE_SPECIFIC_PKGS
|
|
|
|
* HOST_SPECIFIC_PKGS
|
|
|
|
* GROUP_SPECIFIC_PKGS
|
|
|
|
* USER_SPECIFIC_PKGS
|
|
|
|
will define the set of packages which should be built. The bulk build code will
|
|
also include any packages which are needed as dependencies for the explicitly
|
|
listed packages.
|
|
|
|
One use of this is to do a bulk build with SPECIFIC_PKGS in a chroot sandbox
|
|
periodically to have a complete set of the binary packages needed for your site
|
|
available without the overhead of building extra packages that are not needed.
|
|
|
|
7.3.8. Uploading results of a bulk build
|
|
|
|
This section describes how pkgsrc developers can upload binary pkgs built by
|
|
bulk builds to ftp.NetBSD.org.
|
|
|
|
If you would like to automatically create checksum files for the binary
|
|
packages you intend to upload, remember to set MKSUMS=yes in your mk/bulk/
|
|
build.conf.
|
|
|
|
If you would like to PGP sign the checksum files (highly recommended!),
|
|
remember to set SIGN_AS=username@NetBSD.org in your mk/bulk/build.conf. This
|
|
will prompt you for your GPG password to sign the files before uploading
|
|
everything.
|
|
|
|
Then, make sure that you have RSYNC_DST set properly in your mk/bulk/build.conf
|
|
file, i.e. adjust it to something like one of the following:
|
|
|
|
RSYNC_DST=ftp.NetBSD.org:/pub/NetBSD/packages/packages-200xQy/NetBSD-a.b.c/arch/upload
|
|
|
|
Please use appropriate values for "packages-200xQy", "NetBSD-a.b.c" and "arch"
|
|
here. If your login on ftp.NetBSD.org is different from your local login, write
|
|
your login directly into the variable, e.g. my local account is "feyrer", but
|
|
for my login "hubertf", I use:
|
|
|
|
RSYNC_DST=hubertf@ftp.NetBSD.org:/pub/NetBSD/packages/packages-200xQy/NetBSD-a.b.c/arch/upload
|
|
|
|
A separate upload directory is used here to allow "closing" the directory
|
|
during upload. To do so, run the following command on ftp.NetBSD.org next:
|
|
|
|
nbftp% mkdir -p -m 750 /pub/NetBSD/packages/packages-200xQy/NetBSD-a.b.c/arch/upload
|
|
|
|
Please note that /pub/NetBSD/packages is only appropriate for packages for the
|
|
NetBSD operating system. Binary packages for other operating systems should go
|
|
into /pub/pkgsrc.
|
|
|
|
Before uploading the binary pkgs, ssh authentication needs to be set up. This
|
|
example shows how to set up temporary keys for the root account inside the
|
|
sandbox (assuming that no keys should be present there usually):
|
|
|
|
# chroot /usr/sandbox
|
|
chroot-# rm $HOME/.ssh/id-dsa*
|
|
chroot-# ssh-keygen -t dsa
|
|
chroot-# cat $HOME/.ssh/id-dsa.pub
|
|
|
|
|
|
Now take the output of id-dsa.pub and append it to your ~/.ssh/authorized_keys
|
|
file on ftp.NetBSD.org. You can remove the key after the upload is done!
|
|
|
|
Next, test if your ssh connection really works:
|
|
|
|
chroot-# ssh ftp.NetBSD.org date
|
|
|
|
Use "-l yourNetBSDlogin" here as appropriate!
|
|
|
|
Now after all this works, you can exit the sandbox and start the upload:
|
|
|
|
chroot-# exit
|
|
# cd /usr/sandbox/usr/pkgsrc
|
|
# sh mk/bulk/do-sandbox-upload
|
|
|
|
|
|
The upload process may take quite some time. Use ls(1) or du(1) on the FTP
|
|
server to monitor progress of the upload. The upload script will take care of
|
|
not uploading restricted packages and putting vulnerable packages into the
|
|
vulnerable subdirectory.
|
|
|
|
After the upload has ended, first thing is to revoke ssh access:
|
|
|
|
nbftp% vi ~/.ssh/authorized_keys
|
|
Gdd:x!
|
|
|
|
Use whatever is needed to remove the key you've entered before! Last, move the
|
|
uploaded packages out of the upload directory to have them accessible to
|
|
everyone:
|
|
|
|
nbftp% cd /pub/NetBSD/packages/packages-200xQy/NetBSD-a.b.c/arch
|
|
nbftp% mv upload/* .
|
|
nbftp% rmdir upload
|
|
nbftp% chmod 755 .
|
|
|
|
|
|
7.4. Running a pbulk-style bulk build
|
|
|
|
7.4.1. Configuration
|
|
|
|
TODO; see pkgsrc/doc/HOWTO-pbulk for more information.
|
|
|
|
7.5. Creating a multiple CD-ROM packages collection
|
|
|
|
After your pkgsrc bulk-build has completed, you may wish to create a CD-ROM set
|
|
of the resulting binary packages to assist in installing packages on other
|
|
machines. The pkgtools/cdpack package provides a simple tool for creating the
|
|
ISO 9660 images. cdpack arranges the packages on the CD-ROMs in a way that
|
|
keeps all the dependencies for a given package on the same CD as that package.
|
|
|
|
7.5.1. Example of cdpack
|
|
|
|
Complete documentation for cdpack is found in the cdpack(1) man page. The
|
|
following short example assumes that the binary packages are left in /usr/
|
|
pkgsrc/packages/All and that sufficient disk space exists in /u2 to hold the
|
|
ISO 9660 images.
|
|
|
|
# mkdir /u2/images
|
|
# pkg_add /usr/pkgsrc/packages/All/cdpack
|
|
# cdpack /usr/pkgsrc/packages/All /u2/images
|
|
|
|
|
|
If you wish to include a common set of files (COPYRIGHT, README, etc.) on each
|
|
CD in the collection, then you need to create a directory which contains these
|
|
files. e.g.
|
|
|
|
# mkdir /tmp/common
|
|
# echo "This is a README" > /tmp/common/README
|
|
# echo "Another file" > /tmp/common/COPYING
|
|
# mkdir /tmp/common/bin
|
|
# echo "#!/bin/sh" > /tmp/common/bin/myscript
|
|
# echo "echo Hello world" >> /tmp/common/bin/myscript
|
|
# chmod 755 /tmp/common/bin/myscript
|
|
|
|
|
|
Now create the images:
|
|
|
|
# cdpack -x /tmp/common /usr/pkgsrc/packages/All /u2/images
|
|
|
|
Each image will contain README, COPYING, and bin/myscript in their root
|
|
directories.
|
|
|
|
Chapter 8. Directory layout of the installed files
|
|
|
|
Table of Contents
|
|
|
|
8.1. File system layout in ${LOCALBASE}
|
|
8.2. File system layout in ${VARBASE}
|
|
|
|
The files that are installed by pkgsrc are organized in a way that is similar
|
|
to what you find in the /usr directory of the base system. But some details are
|
|
different. This is because pkgsrc initially came from FreeBSD and had adopted
|
|
its file system hierarchy. Later it was largely influenced by NetBSD. But no
|
|
matter which operating system you are using pkgsrc with, you can expect the
|
|
same layout for pkgsrc.
|
|
|
|
There are mainly four root directories for pkgsrc, which are all configurable
|
|
in the bootstrap/bootstrap script. When pkgsrc has been installed as root, the
|
|
default locations are:
|
|
|
|
LOCALBASE= /usr/pkg
|
|
PKG_SYSCONFBASE= /usr/pkg/etc
|
|
VARBASE= /var
|
|
PKG_DBDIR= /var/db/pkg
|
|
|
|
In unprivileged mode (when pkgsrc has been installed as any other user), the
|
|
default locations are:
|
|
|
|
LOCALBASE= ${HOME}/pkg
|
|
PKG_SYSCONFBASE= ${HOME}/pkg/etc
|
|
VARBASE= ${HOME}/pkg/var
|
|
PKG_DBDIR= ${HOME}/pkg/var/db/pkg
|
|
|
|
What these four directories are for, and what they look like is explained
|
|
below.
|
|
|
|
* LOCALBASE corresponds to the /usr directory in the base system. It is the
|
|
"main" directory where the files are installed and contains the well-known
|
|
subdirectories like bin, include, lib, share and sbin.
|
|
|
|
* VARBASE corresponds to /var in the base system. Some programs (especially
|
|
games, network daemons) need write access to it during normal operation.
|
|
|
|
* PKG_SYSCONFDIR corresponds to /etc in the base system. It contains
|
|
configuration files of the packages, as well as pkgsrc's mk.conf itself.
|
|
|
|
8.1. File system layout in ${LOCALBASE}
|
|
|
|
The following directories exist in a typical pkgsrc installation in $
|
|
{LOCALBASE}.
|
|
|
|
bin
|
|
|
|
Contains executable programs that are intended to be directly used by the
|
|
end user.
|
|
|
|
emul
|
|
|
|
Contains files for the emulation layers of various other operating systems,
|
|
especially for NetBSD.
|
|
|
|
etc (the usual location of ${PKG_SYSCONFDIR})
|
|
|
|
Contains the configuration files.
|
|
|
|
include
|
|
|
|
Contains headers for the C and C++ programming languages.
|
|
|
|
info
|
|
|
|
Contains GNU info files of various packages.
|
|
|
|
lib
|
|
|
|
Contains shared and static libraries.
|
|
|
|
libdata
|
|
|
|
Contains data files that don't change after installation. Other data files
|
|
belong into ${VARBASE}.
|
|
|
|
libexec
|
|
|
|
Contains programs that are not intended to be used by end users, such as
|
|
helper programs or network daemons.
|
|
|
|
libexec/cgi-bin
|
|
|
|
Contains programs that are intended to be executed as CGI scripts by a web
|
|
server.
|
|
|
|
man (the usual value of ${PKGMANDIR})
|
|
|
|
Contains brief documentation in form of manual pages.
|
|
|
|
sbin
|
|
|
|
Contains programs that are intended to be used only by the super-user.
|
|
|
|
share
|
|
|
|
Contains platform-independent data files that don't change after
|
|
installation.
|
|
|
|
share/doc
|
|
|
|
Contains documentation files provided by the packages.
|
|
|
|
share/examples
|
|
|
|
Contains example files provided by the packages. Among others, the original
|
|
configuration files are saved here and copied to ${PKG_SYSCONFDIR} during
|
|
installation.
|
|
|
|
share/examples/rc.d
|
|
|
|
Contains the original files for rc.d scripts.
|
|
|
|
var (the usual location of ${VARBASE})
|
|
|
|
Contains files that may be modified after installation.
|
|
|
|
8.2. File system layout in ${VARBASE}
|
|
|
|
db/pkg (the usual location of ${PKG_DBDIR})
|
|
|
|
Contains information about the currently installed packages.
|
|
|
|
games
|
|
|
|
Contains highscore files.
|
|
|
|
log
|
|
|
|
Contains log files.
|
|
|
|
run
|
|
|
|
Contains informational files about daemons that are currently running.
|
|
|
|
Chapter 9. Frequently Asked Questions
|
|
|
|
Table of Contents
|
|
|
|
9.1. Are there any mailing lists for pkg-related discussion?
|
|
9.2. Where's the pkgviews documentation?
|
|
9.3. Utilities for package management (pkgtools)
|
|
9.4. How to use pkgsrc as non-root
|
|
9.5. How to resume transfers when fetching distfiles?
|
|
9.6. How can I install/use modular X.org from pkgsrc?
|
|
9.7. How to fetch files from behind a firewall
|
|
9.8. How do I tell make fetch to do passive FTP?
|
|
9.9. How to fetch all distfiles at once
|
|
9.10. What does "Don't know how to make /usr/share/tmac/tmac.andoc" mean?
|
|
9.11. What does "Could not find bsd.own.mk" mean?
|
|
9.12. Using 'sudo' with pkgsrc
|
|
9.13. How do I change the location of configuration files?
|
|
9.14. Automated security checks
|
|
9.15. Why do some packages ignore my CFLAGS?
|
|
9.16. A package does not build. What shall I do?
|
|
9.17. What does "Makefile appears to contain unresolved cvs/rcs/??? merge
|
|
conflicts" mean?
|
|
|
|
This section contains hints, tips & tricks on special things in pkgsrc that we
|
|
didn't find a better place for in the previous chapters, and it contains items
|
|
for both pkgsrc users and developers.
|
|
|
|
9.1. Are there any mailing lists for pkg-related discussion?
|
|
|
|
The following mailing lists may be of interest to pkgsrc users:
|
|
|
|
* pkgsrc-users: This is a general purpose list for most issues regarding
|
|
pkgsrc, regardless of platform, e.g. soliciting user help for pkgsrc
|
|
configuration, unexpected build failures, using particular packages,
|
|
upgrading pkgsrc installations, questions regarding the pkgsrc release
|
|
branches, etc. General announcements or proposals for changes that impact
|
|
the pkgsrc user community, e.g. major infrastructure changes, new features,
|
|
package removals, etc., may also be posted.
|
|
|
|
* pkgsrc-bulk: A list where the results of pkgsrc bulk builds are sent and
|
|
discussed.
|
|
|
|
* pkgsrc-changes: This list is for those who are interested in getting a
|
|
commit message for every change committed to pkgsrc. It is also available
|
|
in digest form, meaning one daily message containing all commit messages
|
|
for changes to the package source tree in that 24 hour period.
|
|
|
|
To subscribe, do:
|
|
|
|
% echo subscribe listname | mail majordomo@NetBSD.org
|
|
|
|
Archives for all these mailing lists are available from http://
|
|
mail-index.NetBSD.org/.
|
|
|
|
9.2. Where's the pkgviews documentation?
|
|
|
|
Pkgviews is tightly integrated with buildlink. You can find a pkgviews User's
|
|
guide in pkgsrc/mk/buildlink3/PKGVIEWS_UG.
|
|
|
|
9.3. Utilities for package management (pkgtools)
|
|
|
|
The directory pkgsrc/pkgtools contains a number of useful utilities for both
|
|
users and developers of pkgsrc. This section attempts only to make the reader
|
|
aware of the utilities and when they might be useful, and not to duplicate the
|
|
documentation that comes with each package.
|
|
|
|
Utilities used by pkgsrc (automatically installed when needed):
|
|
|
|
* pkgtools/x11-links: Symlinks for use by buildlink.
|
|
|
|
OS tool augmentation (automatically installed when needed):
|
|
|
|
* pkgtools/digest: Calculates various kinds of checksums (including SHA1).
|
|
|
|
* pkgtools/libnbcompat: Compatibility library for pkgsrc tools.
|
|
|
|
* pkgtools/mtree: Installed on non-BSD systems due to lack of native mtree.
|
|
|
|
* pkgtools/pkg_install: Up-to-date replacement for /usr/sbin/pkg_install, or
|
|
for use on operating systems where pkg_install is not present.
|
|
|
|
Utilities used by pkgsrc (not automatically installed):
|
|
|
|
* pkgtools/pkg_tarup: Create a binary package from an already-installed
|
|
package. Used by make replace to save the old package.
|
|
|
|
* pkgtools/dfdisk: Adds extra functionality to pkgsrc, allowing it to fetch
|
|
distfiles from multiple locations. It currently supports the following
|
|
methods: multiple CD-ROMs and network FTP/HTTP connections.
|
|
|
|
* pkgtools/xpkgwedge: Put X11 packages someplace else (enabled by default).
|
|
|
|
* devel/cpuflags: Determine the best compiler flags to optimise code for your
|
|
current CPU and compiler.
|
|
|
|
Utilities for keeping track of installed packages, being up to date, etc:
|
|
|
|
* pkgtools/pkg_chk: Reports on packages whose installed versions do not match
|
|
the latest pkgsrc entries.
|
|
|
|
* pkgtools/pkgdep: Makes dependency graphs of packages, to aid in choosing a
|
|
strategy for updating.
|
|
|
|
* pkgtools/pkgdepgraph: Makes graphs from the output of pkgtools/pkgdep (uses
|
|
graphviz).
|
|
|
|
* pkgtools/pkglint: The pkglint(1) program checks a pkgsrc entry for errors.
|
|
|
|
* pkgtools/lintpkgsrc: The lintpkgsrc(1) program does various checks on the
|
|
complete pkgsrc system.
|
|
|
|
* pkgtools/pkgsurvey: Report what packages you have installed.
|
|
|
|
Utilities for people maintaining or creating individual packages:
|
|
|
|
* pkgtools/pkgdiff: Automate making and maintaining patches for a package
|
|
(includes pkgdiff, pkgvi, mkpatches, etc.).
|
|
|
|
* pkgtools/rpm2pkg, pkgtools/url2pkg: Aids in converting to pkgsrc.
|
|
|
|
* pkgtools/gensolpkg: Convert pkgsrc to a Solaris package.
|
|
|
|
Utilities for people maintaining pkgsrc (or: more obscure pkg utilities)
|
|
|
|
* pkgtools/pkg_comp: Build packages in a chrooted area.
|
|
|
|
* pkgtools/libkver: Spoof kernel version for chrooted cross builds.
|
|
|
|
9.4. How to use pkgsrc as non-root
|
|
|
|
If you want to use pkgsrc as non-root user, you can set some variables to make
|
|
pkgsrc work under these conditions. At the very least, you need to set
|
|
UNPRIVILEGED to "yes"; this will turn on unprivileged mode and set multiple
|
|
related variables to allow installation of packages as non-root.
|
|
|
|
In case the defaults are not enough, you may want to tune some other variables
|
|
used. For example, if the automatic user/group detection leads to incorrect
|
|
values (or not the ones you would like to use), you can change them by setting
|
|
UNPRIVILEGED_USER and UNPRIVILEGED_GROUP respectively.
|
|
|
|
As regards bootstrapping, please note that the bootstrap script will ease
|
|
non-root configuration when given the "--ignore-user-check" flag, as it will
|
|
choose and use multiple default directories under ~/pkg as the installation
|
|
targets. These directories can be overridden by the "--prefix" flag provided by
|
|
the script, as well as some others that allow finer tuning of the tree layout.
|
|
|
|
9.5. How to resume transfers when fetching distfiles?
|
|
|
|
By default, resuming transfers in pkgsrc is disabled, but you can enable this
|
|
feature by adding the option PKG_RESUME_TRANSFERS=YES into mk.conf. If, during
|
|
a fetch step, an incomplete distfile is found, pkgsrc will try to resume it.
|
|
|
|
You can also use a different program than the default ftp(1) by changing the
|
|
FETCH_CMD variable. Don't forget to set FETCH_RESUME_ARGS and FETCH_OUTPUT_ARGS
|
|
if you are not using default values.
|
|
|
|
For example, if you want to use wget to resume downloads, you'll have to use
|
|
something like:
|
|
|
|
FETCH_CMD= wget
|
|
FETCH_BEFORE_ARGS= --passive-ftp
|
|
FETCH_RESUME_ARGS= -c
|
|
FETCH_OUTPUT_ARGS= -O -nc
|
|
|
|
9.6. How can I install/use modular X.org from pkgsrc?
|
|
|
|
If you want to use modular X.org from pkgsrc instead of your system's own X11
|
|
(/usr/X11R6, /usr/openwin, ...) you will have to add the following line into
|
|
mk.conf:
|
|
|
|
X11_TYPE=modular
|
|
|
|
Note
|
|
|
|
The DragonFly operating system defaults to using modular X.org from pkgsrc.
|
|
|
|
9.7. How to fetch files from behind a firewall
|
|
|
|
If you are sitting behind a firewall which does not allow direct connections to
|
|
Internet hosts (i.e. non-NAT), you may specify the relevant proxy hosts. This
|
|
is done using an environment variable in the form of a URL, e.g. in Amdahl, the
|
|
machine "orpheus.amdahl.com" is one of the firewalls, and it uses port 80 as
|
|
the proxy port number. So the proxy environment variables are:
|
|
|
|
ftp_proxy=ftp://orpheus.amdahl.com:80/
|
|
http_proxy=http://orpheus.amdahl.com:80/
|
|
|
|
9.8. How do I tell make fetch to do passive FTP?
|
|
|
|
This depends on which utility is used to retrieve distfiles. From bsd.pkg.mk,
|
|
FETCH_CMD is assigned the first available command from the following list:
|
|
|
|
* ${LOCALBASE}/bin/ftp
|
|
|
|
* /usr/bin/ftp
|
|
|
|
On a default NetBSD installation, this will be /usr/bin/ftp, which
|
|
automatically tries passive connections first, and falls back to active
|
|
connections if the server refuses to do passive. For the other tools, add the
|
|
following to your mk.conf file: PASSIVE_FETCH=1.
|
|
|
|
Having that option present will prevent /usr/bin/ftp from falling back to
|
|
active transfers.
|
|
|
|
9.9. How to fetch all distfiles at once
|
|
|
|
You would like to download all the distfiles in a single batch from work or
|
|
university, where you can't run a make fetch. There is an archive of distfiles
|
|
on ftp.NetBSD.org, but downloading the entire directory may not be appropriate.
|
|
|
|
The answer here is to do a make fetch-list in /usr/pkgsrc or one of its
|
|
subdirectories, carry the resulting list to your machine at work/school and use
|
|
it there. If you don't have a NetBSD-compatible ftp(1) (like tnftp) at work,
|
|
don't forget to set FETCH_CMD to something that fetches a URL:
|
|
|
|
At home:
|
|
|
|
% cd /usr/pkgsrc
|
|
% make fetch-list FETCH_CMD=wget DISTDIR=/tmp/distfiles >/tmp/fetch.sh
|
|
% scp /tmp/fetch.sh work:/tmp
|
|
|
|
At work:
|
|
|
|
% sh /tmp/fetch.sh
|
|
|
|
then tar up /tmp/distfiles and take it home.
|
|
|
|
If you have a machine running NetBSD, and you want to get all distfiles (even
|
|
ones that aren't for your machine architecture), you can do so by using the
|
|
above-mentioned make fetch-list approach, or fetch the distfiles directly by
|
|
running:
|
|
|
|
% make mirror-distfiles
|
|
|
|
If you even decide to ignore NO_{SRC,BIN}_ON_{FTP,CDROM}, then you can get
|
|
everything by running:
|
|
|
|
% make fetch NO_SKIP=yes
|
|
|
|
9.10. What does "Don't know how to make /usr/share/tmac/tmac.andoc" mean?
|
|
|
|
When compiling the pkgtools/pkg_install package, you get the error from make
|
|
that it doesn't know how to make /usr/share/tmac/tmac.andoc? This indicates
|
|
that you don't have installed the "text" set (nroff, ...) from the NetBSD base
|
|
distribution on your machine. It is recommended to do that to format man pages.
|
|
|
|
In the case of the pkgtools/pkg_install package, you can get away with setting
|
|
NOMAN=YES either in the environment or in mk.conf.
|
|
|
|
9.11. What does "Could not find bsd.own.mk" mean?
|
|
|
|
You didn't install the compiler set, comp.tgz, when you installed your NetBSD
|
|
machine. Please get and install it, by extracting it in /:
|
|
|
|
# cd /
|
|
# tar --unlink -zxvpf .../comp.tgz
|
|
|
|
comp.tgz is part of every NetBSD release. Get the one that corresponds to your
|
|
release (determine via uname -r).
|
|
|
|
9.12. Using 'sudo' with pkgsrc
|
|
|
|
When installing packages as non-root user and using the just-in-time su(1)
|
|
feature of pkgsrc, it can become annoying to type in the root password for each
|
|
required package installed. To avoid this, the sudo package can be used, which
|
|
does password caching over a limited time. To use it, install sudo (either as
|
|
binary package or from security/sudo) and then put the following into your
|
|
mk.conf, somewhere after the definition of the LOCALBASE variable:
|
|
|
|
.if exists(${LOCALBASE}/bin/sudo)
|
|
SU_CMD= ${LOCALBASE}/bin/sudo /bin/sh -c
|
|
.endif
|
|
|
|
9.13. How do I change the location of configuration files?
|
|
|
|
As the system administrator, you can choose where configuration files are
|
|
installed. The default settings make all these files go into ${PREFIX}/etc or
|
|
some of its subdirectories; this may be suboptimal depending on your
|
|
expectations (e.g., a read-only, NFS-exported PREFIX with a need of per-machine
|
|
configuration of the provided packages).
|
|
|
|
In order to change the defaults, you can modify the PKG_SYSCONFBASE variable
|
|
(in mk.conf) to point to your preferred configuration directory; some common
|
|
examples include /etc or /etc/pkg.
|
|
|
|
Furthermore, you can change this value on a per-package basis by setting the
|
|
PKG_SYSCONFDIR.${PKG_SYSCONFVAR} variable. PKG_SYSCONFVAR's value usually
|
|
matches the name of the package you would like to modify, that is, the contents
|
|
of PKGBASE.
|
|
|
|
Note that after changing these settings, you must rebuild and reinstall any
|
|
affected packages.
|
|
|
|
9.14. Automated security checks
|
|
|
|
Please be aware that there can often be bugs in third-party software, and some
|
|
of these bugs can leave a machine vulnerable to exploitation by attackers. In
|
|
an effort to lessen the exposure, the NetBSD packages team maintains a database
|
|
of known-exploits to packages which have at one time been included in pkgsrc.
|
|
The database can be downloaded automatically, and a security audit of all
|
|
packages installed on a system can take place. To do this, refer to the
|
|
following two tools (installed as part of the pkgtools/pkg_install package):
|
|
|
|
1. download-vulnerability-list, an easy way to download a list of the security
|
|
vulnerabilities information. This list is kept up to date by the NetBSD
|
|
security officer and the NetBSD packages team, and is distributed from the
|
|
NetBSD ftp server:
|
|
|
|
ftp://ftp.NetBSD.org/pub/NetBSD/packages/distfiles/pkg-vulnerabilities
|
|
|
|
2. audit-packages, an easy way to audit the current machine, checking each
|
|
vulnerability which is known. If a vulnerable package is installed, it will
|
|
be shown by output to stdout, including a description of the type of
|
|
vulnerability, and a URL containing more information.
|
|
|
|
Use of these tools is strongly recommended! After "pkg_install" is installed,
|
|
please read the package's message, which you can get by running pkg_info -D
|
|
pkg_install.
|
|
|
|
If this package is installed, pkgsrc builds will use it to perform a security
|
|
check before building any package. See Section 5.2, "Variables affecting the
|
|
build process" for ways to control this check.
|
|
|
|
9.15. Why do some packages ignore my CFLAGS?
|
|
|
|
When you add your own preferences to the CFLAGS variable in your mk.conf, these
|
|
flags are passed in environment variables to the ./configure scripts and to
|
|
make(1). Some package authors ignore the CFLAGS from the environment variable
|
|
by overriding them in the Makefiles of their package.
|
|
|
|
Currently there is no solution to this problem. If you really need the package
|
|
to use your CFLAGS you should run make patch in the package directory and then
|
|
inspect any Makefile and Makefile.in for whether they define CFLAGS explicitly.
|
|
Usually you can remove these lines. But be aware that some "smart" programmers
|
|
write so bad code that it only works for the specific combination of CFLAGS
|
|
they have chosen.
|
|
|
|
9.16. A package does not build. What shall I do?
|
|
|
|
1. Make sure that your copy of pkgsrc is consistent. A case that occurs often
|
|
is that people only update pkgsrc in parts, because of performance reasons.
|
|
Since pkgsrc is one large system, not a collection of many small systems,
|
|
there are sometimes changes that only work when the whole pkgsrc tree is
|
|
updated.
|
|
|
|
2. Make sure that you don't have any CVS conflicts. Search for "<<<<<<" or
|
|
">>>>>>" in all your pkgsrc files.
|
|
|
|
3. Make sure that you don't have old copies of the packages extracted. Run
|
|
make clean clean-depends to verify this.
|
|
|
|
4. If the problem still exists, write a mail to the pkgsrc-users mailing list.
|
|
|
|
9.17. What does "Makefile appears to contain unresolved cvs/rcs/??? merge
|
|
conflicts" mean?
|
|
|
|
You have modified a file from pkgsrc, and someone else has modified that same
|
|
file afterwards in the CVS repository. Both changes are in the same region of
|
|
the file, so when you updated pkgsrc, the cvs command marked the conflicting
|
|
changes in the file. Because of these markers, the file is no longer a valid
|
|
Makefile.
|
|
|
|
Have a look at that file, and if you don't need your local changes anymore, you
|
|
can remove that file and run cvs -q update -dP in that directory to download
|
|
the current version.
|
|
|
|
Part II. The pkgsrc developer's guide
|
|
|
|
This part of the book deals with creating and modifying packages. It starts
|
|
with a "HOWTO"-like guide on creating a new package. The remaining chapters are
|
|
more like a reference manual for pkgsrc.
|
|
|
|
Table of Contents
|
|
|
|
10. Creating a new pkgsrc package from scratch
|
|
|
|
10.1. Common types of packages
|
|
|
|
10.1.1. Perl modules
|
|
10.1.2. KDE applications
|
|
|
|
10.2. Examples
|
|
|
|
10.2.1. How the www/nvu package came into pkgsrc
|
|
|
|
11. Package components - files, directories and contents
|
|
|
|
11.1. Makefile
|
|
11.2. distinfo
|
|
11.3. patches/*
|
|
|
|
11.3.1. Structure of a single patch file
|
|
11.3.2. Creating patch files
|
|
11.3.3. Sources where the patch files come from
|
|
11.3.4. Patching guidelines
|
|
11.3.5. Feedback to the author
|
|
|
|
11.4. Other mandatory files
|
|
11.5. Optional files
|
|
|
|
11.5.1. Files affecting the binary package
|
|
11.5.2. Files affecting the build process
|
|
11.5.3. Files affecting nothing at all
|
|
|
|
11.6. work*
|
|
11.7. files/*
|
|
|
|
12. Programming in Makefiles
|
|
|
|
12.1. Caveats
|
|
12.2. Makefile variables
|
|
|
|
12.2.1. Naming conventions
|
|
|
|
12.3. Code snippets
|
|
|
|
12.3.1. Adding things to a list
|
|
12.3.2. Converting an internal list into an external list
|
|
12.3.3. Passing variables to a shell command
|
|
12.3.4. Quoting guideline
|
|
12.3.5. Workaround for a bug in BSD Make
|
|
|
|
13. PLIST issues
|
|
|
|
13.1. RCS ID
|
|
13.2. Semi-automatic PLIST generation
|
|
13.3. Tweaking output of make print-PLIST
|
|
13.4. Variable substitution in PLIST
|
|
13.5. Man page compression
|
|
13.6. Changing PLIST source with PLIST_SRC
|
|
13.7. Platform-specific and differing PLISTs
|
|
13.8. Sharing directories between packages
|
|
|
|
14. Buildlink methodology
|
|
|
|
14.1. Converting packages to use buildlink3
|
|
14.2. Writing buildlink3.mk files
|
|
|
|
14.2.1. Anatomy of a buildlink3.mk file
|
|
14.2.2. Updating BUILDLINK_API_DEPENDS.pkg in buildlink3.mk files
|
|
|
|
14.3. Writing builtin.mk files
|
|
|
|
14.3.1. Anatomy of a builtin.mk file
|
|
14.3.2. Global preferences for native or pkgsrc software
|
|
|
|
15. The pkginstall framework
|
|
|
|
15.1. Files and directories outside the installation prefix
|
|
|
|
15.1.1. Directory manipulation
|
|
15.1.2. File manipulation
|
|
|
|
15.2. Configuration files
|
|
|
|
15.2.1. How PKG_SYSCONFDIR is set
|
|
15.2.2. Telling the software where configuration files are
|
|
15.2.3. Patching installations
|
|
15.2.4. Disabling handling of configuration files
|
|
|
|
15.3. System startup scripts
|
|
|
|
15.3.1. Disabling handling of system startup scripts
|
|
|
|
15.4. System users and groups
|
|
15.5. System shells
|
|
|
|
15.5.1. Disabling shell registration
|
|
|
|
15.6. Fonts
|
|
|
|
15.6.1. Disabling automatic update of the fonts databases
|
|
|
|
16. Options handling
|
|
|
|
16.1. Global default options
|
|
16.2. Converting packages to use bsd.options.mk
|
|
16.3. Option Names
|
|
16.4. Determining the options of dependencies
|
|
|
|
17. The build process
|
|
|
|
17.1. Introduction
|
|
17.2. Program location
|
|
17.3. Directories used during the build process
|
|
17.4. Running a phase
|
|
17.5. The fetch phase
|
|
|
|
17.5.1. What to fetch and where to get it from
|
|
17.5.2. How are the files fetched?
|
|
|
|
17.6. The checksum phase
|
|
17.7. The extract phase
|
|
17.8. The patch phase
|
|
17.9. The tools phase
|
|
17.10. The wrapper phase
|
|
17.11. The configure phase
|
|
17.12. The build phase
|
|
17.13. The test phase
|
|
17.14. The install phase
|
|
17.15. The package phase
|
|
17.16. Cleaning up
|
|
17.17. Other helpful targets
|
|
|
|
18. Tools needed for building or running
|
|
|
|
18.1. Tools for pkgsrc builds
|
|
18.2. Tools needed by packages
|
|
18.3. Tools provided by platforms
|
|
18.4. Questions regarding the tools
|
|
|
|
19. Making your package work
|
|
|
|
19.1. General operation
|
|
|
|
19.1.1. Portability of packages
|
|
19.1.2. How to pull in user-settable variables from mk.conf
|
|
19.1.3. User interaction
|
|
19.1.4. Handling licenses
|
|
19.1.5. Restricted packages
|
|
19.1.6. Handling dependencies
|
|
19.1.7. Handling conflicts with other packages
|
|
19.1.8. Packages that cannot or should not be built
|
|
19.1.9. Packages which should not be deleted, once installed
|
|
19.1.10. Handling packages with security problems
|
|
19.1.11. How to handle incrementing versions when fixing an existing
|
|
package
|
|
19.1.12. Substituting variable text in the package files (the SUBST
|
|
framework)
|
|
|
|
19.2. Fixing problems in the fetch phase
|
|
|
|
19.2.1. Packages whose distfiles aren't available for plain downloading
|
|
19.2.2. How to handle modified distfiles with the 'old' name
|
|
|
|
19.3. Fixing problems in the configure phase
|
|
|
|
19.3.1. Shared libraries - libtool
|
|
19.3.2. Using libtool on GNU packages that already support libtool
|
|
19.3.3. GNU Autoconf/Automake
|
|
|
|
19.4. Programming languages
|
|
|
|
19.4.1. C, C++, and Fortran
|
|
19.4.2. Java
|
|
19.4.3. Packages containing perl scripts
|
|
19.4.4. Other programming languages
|
|
|
|
19.5. Fixing problems in the build phase
|
|
|
|
19.5.1. Compiling C and C++ code conditionally
|
|
19.5.2. How to handle compiler bugs
|
|
19.5.3. Undefined reference to "..."
|
|
19.5.4. Running out of memory
|
|
|
|
19.6. Fixing problems in the install phase
|
|
|
|
19.6.1. Creating needed directories
|
|
19.6.2. Where to install documentation
|
|
19.6.3. Installing highscore files
|
|
19.6.4. Adding DESTDIR support to packages
|
|
19.6.5. Packages with hardcoded paths to other interpreters
|
|
19.6.6. Packages installing perl modules
|
|
19.6.7. Packages installing info files
|
|
19.6.8. Packages installing man pages
|
|
19.6.9. Packages installing GConf data files
|
|
19.6.10. Packages installing scrollkeeper data files
|
|
19.6.11. Packages installing X11 fonts
|
|
19.6.12. Packages installing GTK2 modules
|
|
19.6.13. Packages installing SGML or XML data
|
|
19.6.14. Packages installing extensions to the MIME database
|
|
19.6.15. Packages using intltool
|
|
19.6.16. Packages installing startup scripts
|
|
19.6.17. Packages installing TeX modules
|
|
19.6.18. Packages supporting running binaries in emulation
|
|
19.6.19. Packages installing hicolor theme icons
|
|
19.6.20. Packages installing desktop files
|
|
|
|
19.7. Marking packages as having problems
|
|
|
|
20. Debugging
|
|
21. Submitting and Committing
|
|
|
|
21.1. Submitting binary packages
|
|
21.2. Submitting source packages (for non-NetBSD-developers)
|
|
21.3. General notes when adding, updating, or removing packages
|
|
21.4. Committing: Importing a package into CVS
|
|
21.5. Updating a package to a newer version
|
|
21.6. Moving a package in pkgsrc
|
|
|
|
22. Frequently Asked Questions
|
|
23. GNOME packaging and porting
|
|
|
|
23.1. Meta packages
|
|
23.2. Packaging a GNOME application
|
|
23.3. Updating GNOME to a newer version
|
|
23.4. Patching guidelines
|
|
|
|
Chapter 10. Creating a new pkgsrc package from scratch
|
|
|
|
Table of Contents
|
|
|
|
10.1. Common types of packages
|
|
|
|
10.1.1. Perl modules
|
|
10.1.2. KDE applications
|
|
|
|
10.2. Examples
|
|
|
|
10.2.1. How the www/nvu package came into pkgsrc
|
|
|
|
When you find a package that is not yet in pkgsrc, you most likely have a URL
|
|
from where you can download the source code. Starting with this URL, creating a
|
|
package involves only a few steps.
|
|
|
|
1. First, install the packages pkgtools/url2pkg and pkgtools/pkglint.
|
|
|
|
2. Then, choose one of the top-level directories as the category in which you
|
|
want to place your package. You can also create a directory of your own
|
|
(maybe called local). In that category directory, create another directory
|
|
for your package and change into it.
|
|
|
|
3. Run the program url2pkg, which will ask you for a URL. Enter the URL of the
|
|
distribution file (in most cases a .tar.gz file) and watch how the basic
|
|
ingredients of your package are created automatically. The distribution
|
|
file is extracted automatically to fill in some details in the Makefile
|
|
that would otherwise have to be done manually.
|
|
|
|
4. Examine the extracted files to determine the dependencies of your package.
|
|
Ideally, this is mentioned in some README file, but things may differ. For
|
|
each of these dependencies, look where it exists in pkgsrc, and if there is
|
|
a file called buildlink3.mk in that directory, add a line to your package
|
|
Makefile which includes that file just before the last line. If the
|
|
buildlink3.mk file does not exist, add a DEPENDS line to the Makefile,
|
|
which specifies the version of the dependency and where it can be found in
|
|
pkgsrc. This line should be placed in the third paragraph. If the
|
|
dependency is only needed for building the package, but not when using it,
|
|
use BUILD_DEPENDS instead of DEPENDS. Your package may then look like this:
|
|
|
|
[...]
|
|
|
|
BUILD_DEPENDS+= lua>=5.0:../../lang/lua
|
|
DEPENDS+= screen-[0-9]*:../../misc/screen
|
|
DEPENDS+= screen>=4.0:../../misc/screen
|
|
|
|
[...]
|
|
|
|
.include "../../category/package/buildlink3.mk"
|
|
.include "../../devel/glib2/buildlink3.mk"
|
|
.include "../../mk/bsd.pkg.mk"
|
|
|
|
5. Run pkglint to see what things still need to be done to make your package a
|
|
"good" one. If you don't know what pkglint's warnings want to tell you, try
|
|
pkglint --explain or pkglint -e, which outputs additional explanations.
|
|
|
|
6. In many cases the package is not yet ready to build. You can find
|
|
instructions for the most common cases in the next section, Section 10.1,
|
|
"Common types of packages". After you have followed the instructions over
|
|
there, you can hopefully continue here.
|
|
|
|
7. Run bmake clean to clean the working directory from the extracted files.
|
|
Besides these files, a lot of cache files and other system information has
|
|
been saved in the working directory, which may become wrong after you
|
|
edited the Makefile.
|
|
|
|
8. Now, run bmake to build the package. For the various things that can go
|
|
wrong in this phase, consult Chapter 19, Making your package work.
|
|
|
|
9. When the package builds fine, the next step is to install the package. Run
|
|
bmake install and hope that everything works.
|
|
|
|
10. Up to now, the file PLIST, which contains a list of the files that are
|
|
installed by the package, is nearly empty. Run bmake print-PLIST >PLIST to
|
|
generate a probably correct list. Check the file using your preferred text
|
|
editor to see if the list of files looks plausible.
|
|
|
|
11. Run pkglint again to see if the generated PLIST contains garbage or not.
|
|
|
|
12. When you ran bmake install, the package has been registered in the database
|
|
of installed files, but with an empty list of files. To fix this, run bmake
|
|
deinstall and bmake install again. Now the package is registered with the
|
|
list of files from PLIST.
|
|
|
|
13. Run bmake package to create a binary package from the set of installed
|
|
files.
|
|
|
|
10.1. Common types of packages
|
|
|
|
10.1.1. Perl modules
|
|
|
|
Simple Perl modules are handled automatically by url2pkg, including
|
|
dependencies.
|
|
|
|
10.1.2. KDE applications
|
|
|
|
KDE applications should always include meta-pkgs/kde3/kde3.mk, which contains
|
|
numerous settings that are typical of KDE packages.
|
|
|
|
10.2. Examples
|
|
|
|
10.2.1. How the www/nvu package came into pkgsrc
|
|
|
|
10.2.1.1. The initial package
|
|
|
|
Looking at the file pkgsrc/doc/TODO, I saw that the "nvu" package has not yet
|
|
been imported into pkgsrc. As the description says it has to do with the web,
|
|
the obvious choice for the category is "www".
|
|
|
|
$ mkdir www/nvu
|
|
$ cd www/nvu
|
|
|
|
The web site says that the sources are available as a tar file, so I fed that
|
|
URL to the url2pkg program:
|
|
|
|
$ url2pkg http://cvs.nvu.com/download/nvu-1.0-sources.tar.bz2
|
|
|
|
My editor popped up, and I added a PKGNAME line below the DISTNAME line, as the
|
|
package name should not have the word "sources" in it. I also filled in the
|
|
MAINTAINER, HOMEPAGE and COMMENT fields. Then the package Makefile looked like
|
|
that:
|
|
|
|
# $NetBSD$
|
|
#
|
|
|
|
DISTNAME= nvu-1.0-sources
|
|
PKGNAME= nvu-1.0
|
|
CATEGORIES= www
|
|
MASTER_SITES= http://cvs.nvu.com/download/
|
|
EXTRACT_SUFX= .tar.bz2
|
|
|
|
MAINTAINER= rillig@NetBSD.org
|
|
HOMEPAGE= http://cvs.nvu.com/
|
|
COMMENT= Web Authoring System
|
|
|
|
# url2pkg-marker (please do not remove this line.)
|
|
.include "../../mk/bsd.pkg.mk"
|
|
|
|
Then, I quit the editor and watched pkgsrc downloading a large source archive:
|
|
|
|
url2pkg> Running "make makesum" ...
|
|
=> Required installed package digest>=20010302: digest-20060826 found
|
|
=> Fetching nvu-1.0-sources.tar.bz2
|
|
Requesting http://cvs.nvu.com/download/nvu-1.0-sources.tar.bz2
|
|
100% |*************************************| 28992 KB 150.77 KB/s00:00 ETA
|
|
29687976 bytes retrieved in 03:12 (150.77 KB/s)
|
|
url2pkg> Running "make extract" ...
|
|
=> Required installed package digest>=20010302: digest-20060826 found
|
|
=> Checksum SHA1 OK for nvu-1.0-sources.tar.bz2
|
|
=> Checksum RMD160 OK for nvu-1.0-sources.tar.bz2
|
|
work.bacc -> /tmp/roland/pkgsrc/www/nvu/work.bacc
|
|
===> Installing dependencies for nvu-1.0
|
|
===> Overriding tools for nvu-1.0
|
|
===> Extracting for nvu-1.0
|
|
url2pkg> Adjusting the Makefile.
|
|
|
|
Remember to correct CATEGORIES, HOMEPAGE, COMMENT, and DESCR when you're done!
|
|
|
|
Good luck! (See pkgsrc/doc/pkgsrc.txt for some more help :-)
|
|
|
|
10.2.1.2. Fixing all kinds of problems to make the package work
|
|
|
|
Now that the package has been extracted, let's see what's inside it. The
|
|
package has a README.txt, but that only says something about mozilla, so it's
|
|
probably useless for seeing what dependencies this package has. But since there
|
|
is a GNU configure script in the package, let's hope that it will complain
|
|
about everything it needs.
|
|
|
|
$ bmake
|
|
=> Required installed package digest>=20010302: digest-20060826 found
|
|
=> Checksum SHA1 OK for nvu-1.0-sources.tar.bz2
|
|
=> Checksum RMD160 OK for nvu-1.0-sources.tar.bz2
|
|
===> Patching for nvu-1.0
|
|
===> Creating toolchain wrappers for nvu-1.0
|
|
===> Configuring for nvu-1.0
|
|
[...]
|
|
configure: error: Perl 5.004 or higher is required.
|
|
[...]
|
|
WARNING: Please add USE_TOOLS+=perl to the package Makefile.
|
|
[...]
|
|
|
|
That worked quite well. So I opened the package Makefile in my editor, and
|
|
since it already has a USE_TOOLS line, I just appended "perl" to it. Since the
|
|
dependencies of the package have changed now, and since a perl wrapper is
|
|
automatically installed in the "tools" phase, I need to build the package from
|
|
scratch.
|
|
|
|
$ bmake clean
|
|
===> Cleaning for nvu-1.0
|
|
$ bmake
|
|
[...]
|
|
*** /tmp/roland/pkgsrc/www/nvu/work.bacc/.tools/bin/make is not \
|
|
GNU Make. You will not be able to build Mozilla without GNU Make.
|
|
[...]
|
|
|
|
So I added "gmake" to the USE_TOOLS line and tried again (from scratch).
|
|
|
|
[...]
|
|
checking for GTK - version >= 1.2.0... no
|
|
*** Could not run GTK test program, checking why...
|
|
[...]
|
|
|
|
Now to the other dependencies. The first question is: Where is the GTK package
|
|
hidden in pkgsrc?
|
|
|
|
$ echo ../../*/gtk*
|
|
[many packages ...]
|
|
$ echo ../../*/gtk
|
|
../../x11/gtk
|
|
$ echo ../../*/gtk2
|
|
../../x11/gtk2
|
|
$ echo ../../*/gtk2/bui*
|
|
../../x11/gtk2/buildlink3.mk
|
|
|
|
The first try was definitely too broad. The second one had exactly one result,
|
|
which is very good. But there is one pitfall with GNOME packages. Before GNOME
|
|
2 had been released, there were already many GNOME 1 packages in pkgsrc. To be
|
|
able to continue to use these packages, the GNOME 2 packages were imported as
|
|
separate packages, and their names usually have a "2" appended. So I checked
|
|
whether this was the case here, and indeed it was.
|
|
|
|
Since the GTK2 package has a buildlink3.mk file, adding the dependency is very
|
|
easy. I just inserted an .include line before the last line of the package
|
|
Makefile, so that it now looks like this:
|
|
|
|
[...]
|
|
.include "../../x11/gtk2/buildlink3.mk"
|
|
.include "../../mk/bsd.pkg.mk
|
|
|
|
After another bmake clean && bmake, the answer was:
|
|
|
|
[...]
|
|
checking for gtk-config... /home/roland/pkg/bin/gtk-config
|
|
checking for GTK - version >= 1.2.0... no
|
|
*** Could not run GTK test program, checking why...
|
|
*** The test program failed to compile or link. See the file config.log for the
|
|
*** exact error that occured. This usually means GTK was incorrectly installed
|
|
*** or that you have moved GTK since it was installed. In the latter case, you
|
|
*** may want to edit the gtk-config script: /home/roland/pkg/bin/gtk-config
|
|
configure: error: Test for GTK failed.
|
|
[...]
|
|
|
|
In this particular case, the assumption that "every package prefers GNOME 2"
|
|
had been wrong. The first of the lines above told me that this package really
|
|
wanted to have the GNOME 1 version of GTK. If the package had looked for GTK2,
|
|
it would have looked for pkg-config instead of gtk-config. So I changed the x11
|
|
/gtk2 to x11/gtk in the package Makefile, and tried again.
|
|
|
|
[...]
|
|
cc -o xpidl.o -c -DOSTYPE=\"NetBSD3\" -DOSARCH=\"NetBSD\" -I../../../dist/include/xpcom -I../../../dist/include -I/tmp/roland/pkgsrc/www/nvu/work.bacc/mozilla/dist/include/nspr -I/usr/X11R6/include -fPIC -DPIC -I/home/roland/pkg/include -I/usr/include -I/usr/X11R6/include -Wall -W -Wno-unused -Wpointer-arith -Wcast-align -Wno-long-long -pedantic -O2 -I/home/roland/pkg/include -I/usr/include -Dunix -pthread -pipe -DDEBUG -D_DEBUG -DDEBUG_roland -DTRACING -g -I/home/roland/pkg/include/glib/glib-1.2 -I/home/roland/pkg/lib/glib/include -I/usr/pkg/include/orbit-1.0 -I/home/roland/pkg/include -I/usr/include -I/usr/X11R6/include -include ../../../mozilla-config.h -DMOZILLA_CLIENT -Wp,-MD,.deps/xpidl.pp xpidl.c
|
|
In file included from xpidl.c:42:
|
|
xpidl.h:53:24: libIDL/IDL.h: No such file or directory
|
|
In file included from xpidl.c:42:
|
|
xpidl.h:132: error: parse error before "IDL_ns"
|
|
[...]
|
|
|
|
The package still does not find all of its dependencies. Now the question is:
|
|
Which package provides the libIDL/IDL.h header file?
|
|
|
|
$ echo ../../*/*idl*
|
|
../../devel/py-idle ../../wip/idled ../../x11/acidlaunch
|
|
$ echo ../../*/*IDL*
|
|
../../net/libIDL
|
|
|
|
Let's take the one from the second try. So I included the ../../net/libIDL/
|
|
buildlink3.mk file and tried again. But the error didn't change. After digging
|
|
through some of the code, I concluded that the build process of the package was
|
|
broken and couldn't have ever worked, but since the Mozilla source tree is
|
|
quite large, I didn't want to fix it. So I added the following to the package
|
|
Makefile and tried again:
|
|
|
|
CPPFLAGS+= -I${BUILDLINK_PREFIX.libIDL}/include/libIDL-2.0
|
|
BUILDLINK_TRANSFORM+= -l:IDL:IDL-2
|
|
|
|
The latter line is needed because the package expects the library libIDL.so,
|
|
but only libIDL-2.so is available. So I told the compiler wrapper to rewrite
|
|
that on the fly.
|
|
|
|
The next problem was related to a recent change of the FreeType interface. I
|
|
looked up in www/seamonkey which patch files were relevant for this issue and
|
|
copied them to the patches directory. Then I retried, fixed the patches so that
|
|
they applied cleanly and retried again. This time, everything worked.
|
|
|
|
10.2.1.3. Installing the package
|
|
|
|
$ bmake CHECK_FILES=no install
|
|
[...]
|
|
$ bmake print-PLIST >PLIST
|
|
$ bmake deinstall
|
|
$ bmake install
|
|
|
|
Chapter 11. Package components - files, directories and contents
|
|
|
|
Table of Contents
|
|
|
|
11.1. Makefile
|
|
11.2. distinfo
|
|
11.3. patches/*
|
|
|
|
11.3.1. Structure of a single patch file
|
|
11.3.2. Creating patch files
|
|
11.3.3. Sources where the patch files come from
|
|
11.3.4. Patching guidelines
|
|
11.3.5. Feedback to the author
|
|
|
|
11.4. Other mandatory files
|
|
11.5. Optional files
|
|
|
|
11.5.1. Files affecting the binary package
|
|
11.5.2. Files affecting the build process
|
|
11.5.3. Files affecting nothing at all
|
|
|
|
11.6. work*
|
|
11.7. files/*
|
|
|
|
Whenever you're preparing a package, there are a number of files involved which
|
|
are described in the following sections.
|
|
|
|
11.1. Makefile
|
|
|
|
Building, installation and creation of a binary package are all controlled by
|
|
the package's Makefile. The Makefile describes various things about a package,
|
|
for example from where to get it, how to configure, build, and install it.
|
|
|
|
A package Makefile contains several sections that describe the package.
|
|
|
|
In the first section there are the following variables, which should appear
|
|
exactly in the order given here. The order and grouping of the variables is
|
|
mostly historical and has no further meaning.
|
|
|
|
* DISTNAME is the basename of the distribution file to be downloaded from the
|
|
package's website.
|
|
|
|
* PKGNAME is the name of the package, as used by pkgsrc. You only need to
|
|
provide it if DISTNAME (which is the default) is not a good name for the
|
|
package in pkgsrc. Usually it is the pkgsrc directory name together with
|
|
the version number. It must match the regular expression ^[A-Za-z0-9]
|
|
[A-Za-z0-9-_.+]*$, that is, it starts with a letter or digit, and contains
|
|
only letters, digits, dashes, underscores, dots and plus signs.
|
|
|
|
* SVR4_PKGNAME is the name of the package file to create if the PKGNAME isn't
|
|
unique on a SVR4 system. The default is PKGNAME, which may be shortened
|
|
when you use pkgtools/gensolpkg. Only add SVR4_PKGNAME if PKGNAME does not
|
|
produce an unique package name on a SVR4 system. The length of SVR4_PKGNAME
|
|
is limited to 5 characters.
|
|
|
|
* CATEGORIES is a list of categories which the package fits in. You can
|
|
choose any of the top-level directories of pkgsrc for it.
|
|
|
|
Currently the following values are available for CATEGORIES. If more than
|
|
one is used, they need to be separated by spaces:
|
|
|
|
archivers cross geography meta-pkgs security
|
|
audio databases graphics misc shells
|
|
benchmarks devel ham multimedia sysutils
|
|
biology editors inputmethod net textproc
|
|
cad emulators lang news time
|
|
chat finance mail parallel wm
|
|
comms fonts math pkgtools www
|
|
converters games mbone print x11
|
|
|
|
* MASTER_SITES, DYNAMIC_MASTER_SITES, DIST_SUBDIR, EXTRACT_SUFX and DISTFILES
|
|
are discussed in detail in Section 17.5, "The fetch phase".
|
|
|
|
The second section contains information about separately downloaded patches, if
|
|
any.
|
|
|
|
* PATCHFILES: Name(s) of additional files that contain distribution patches.
|
|
There is no default. pkgsrc will look for them at PATCH_SITES. They will
|
|
automatically be uncompressed before patching if the names end with .gz or
|
|
.Z.
|
|
|
|
* PATCH_SITES: Primary location(s) for distribution patch files (see
|
|
PATCHFILES below) if not found locally.
|
|
|
|
The third section contains the following variables.
|
|
|
|
* MAINTAINER is the email address of the person who feels responsible for
|
|
this package, and who is most likely to look at problems or questions
|
|
regarding this package which have been reported with send-pr(1). Other
|
|
developers may contact the MAINTAINER before making changes to the package,
|
|
but are not required to do so. When packaging a new program, set MAINTAINER
|
|
to yourself. If you really can't maintain the package for future updates,
|
|
set it to <pkgsrc-users@NetBSD.org>.
|
|
|
|
* OWNER should be used instead of MAINTAINER when you do not want other
|
|
developers to update or change the package without contacting you first. A
|
|
package Makefile should contain one of MAINTAINER or OWNER, but not both.
|
|
|
|
* HOMEPAGE is a URL where users can find more information about the package.
|
|
|
|
* COMMENT is a one-line description of the package (should not include the
|
|
package name).
|
|
|
|
Other variables that affect the build:
|
|
|
|
* WRKSRC: The directory where the interesting distribution files of the
|
|
package are found. The default is ${WRKDIR}/${DISTNAME}, which works for
|
|
most packages.
|
|
|
|
If a package doesn't create a subdirectory for itself (most GNU software
|
|
does, for instance), but extracts itself in the current directory, you
|
|
should set WRKSRC=${WRKDIR}.
|
|
|
|
If a package doesn't create a subdirectory with the name of DISTNAME but
|
|
some different name, set WRKSRC to point to the proper name in ${WRKDIR},
|
|
for example WRKSRC=${WRKDIR}/${DISTNAME}/unix. See lang/tcl and x11/tk for
|
|
other examples.
|
|
|
|
The name of the working directory created by pkgsrc is taken from the
|
|
WRKDIR_BASENAME variable. By default, its value is work. If you want to use
|
|
the same pkgsrc tree for building different kinds of binary packages, you
|
|
can change the variable according to your needs. Two other variables handle
|
|
common cases of setting WRKDIR_BASENAME individually. If OBJHOSTNAME is
|
|
defined in mk.conf, the first component of the host's name is attached to
|
|
the directory name. If OBJMACHINE is defined, the platform name is
|
|
attached, which might look like work.i386 or work.sparc.
|
|
|
|
Please pay attention to the following gotchas:
|
|
|
|
* Add MANCOMPRESSED if man pages are installed in compressed form by the
|
|
package. For packages using BSD-style makefiles which honor MANZ, there is
|
|
MANCOMPRESSED_IF_MANZ.
|
|
|
|
* Replace /usr/local with "${PREFIX}" in all files (see patches, below).
|
|
|
|
* If the package installs any info files, see Section 19.6.7, "Packages
|
|
installing info files".
|
|
|
|
11.2. distinfo
|
|
|
|
The distinfo file contains the message digest, or checksum, of each distfile
|
|
needed for the package. This ensures that the distfiles retrieved from the
|
|
Internet have not been corrupted during transfer or altered by a malign force
|
|
to introduce a security hole. Due to recent rumor about weaknesses of digest
|
|
algorithms, all distfiles are protected using both SHA1 and RMD160 message
|
|
digests, as well as the file size.
|
|
|
|
The distinfo file also contains the checksums for all the patches found in the
|
|
patches directory (see Section 11.3, "patches/*").
|
|
|
|
To regenerate the distinfo file, use the make makedistinfo or make mdi command.
|
|
|
|
Some packages have different sets of distfiles depending on the platform, for
|
|
example www/navigator). These are kept in the same distinfo file and care
|
|
should be taken when upgrading such a package to ensure distfile information is
|
|
not lost.
|
|
|
|
11.3. patches/*
|
|
|
|
Many packages still don't work out-of-the box on the various platforms that are
|
|
supported by pkgsrc. Therefore, a number of custom patch files are needed to
|
|
make the package work. These patch files are found in the patches/ directory.
|
|
|
|
In the patch phase, these patches are applied to the files in WRKSRC directory
|
|
after extracting them, in alphabetic order, so patch-aa is applied before
|
|
patch-ab, etc.
|
|
|
|
11.3.1. Structure of a single patch file
|
|
|
|
The patch-* files should be in diff -bu format, and apply without a fuzz to
|
|
avoid problems. (To force patches to apply with fuzz you can set
|
|
PATCH_FUZZ_FACTOR=-F2). Furthermore, each patch should contain only changes for
|
|
a single file, and no file should be patched by more than one patch file. This
|
|
helps to keep future modifications simple.
|
|
|
|
Each patch file is structured as follows: In the first line, there is the RCS
|
|
Id of the patch itself. The second line should be empty for aesthetic reasons.
|
|
After that, there should be a comment for each change that the patch does.
|
|
There are a number of standard cases:
|
|
|
|
* Patches that replace the == operator for test(1) with = in shell scripts
|
|
are so common that they don't need a comment at all.
|
|
|
|
* Patches for commonly known vulnerabilities should mention the vulnerability
|
|
ID (CAN, CVE).
|
|
|
|
* Patches that change source code should mention the platform and other
|
|
environment (for example, the compiler) that the patch is needed for.
|
|
|
|
In all other cases, the patch should be commented so that any developer who
|
|
knows the code of the application can make some use of the patch. Special care
|
|
should be taken for the upstream developers, since we generally want that they
|
|
accept our patches, so we have less work in the future.
|
|
|
|
11.3.2. Creating patch files
|
|
|
|
One important thing to mention is to pay attention that no RCS IDs get stored
|
|
in the patch files, as these will cause problems when later checked into the
|
|
NetBSD CVS tree. Use the pkgdiff command from the pkgtools/pkgdiff package to
|
|
avoid these problems.
|
|
|
|
For even more automation, we recommend using mkpatches from the same package to
|
|
make a whole set of patches. You just have to backup files before you edit them
|
|
to filename.orig, e.g. with cp -p filename filename.orig or, easier, by using
|
|
pkgvi again from the same package. If you upgrade a package this way, you can
|
|
easily compare the new set of patches with the previously existing one with
|
|
patchdiff. Copy the patches you want to use or update from the work/.newpatches
|
|
directory to patches/.
|
|
|
|
When you have finished a package, remember to generate the checksums for the
|
|
patch files by using the make makepatchsum command, see Section 11.2,
|
|
"distinfo".
|
|
|
|
When adding a patch that corrects a problem in the distfile (rather than e.g.
|
|
enforcing pkgsrc's view of where man pages should go), send the patch as a bug
|
|
report to the maintainer. This benefits non-pkgsrc users of the package, and
|
|
usually makes it possible to remove the patch in future version.
|
|
|
|
The file names of the patch files are usually of the form patch-[a-z][a-z].
|
|
|
|
11.3.3. Sources where the patch files come from
|
|
|
|
If you want to share patches between multiple packages in pkgsrc, e.g. because
|
|
they use the same distfiles, set PATCHDIR to the path where the patch files can
|
|
be found, e.g.:
|
|
|
|
PATCHDIR= ${.CURDIR}/../xemacs/patches
|
|
|
|
Patch files that are distributed by the author or other maintainers can be
|
|
listed in PATCHFILES.
|
|
|
|
If it is desired to store any patches that should not be committed into pkgsrc,
|
|
they can be kept outside the pkgsrc tree in the $LOCALPATCHES directory. The
|
|
directory tree there is expected to have the same "category/package" structure
|
|
as pkgsrc, and patches are expected to be stored inside these dirs (also known
|
|
as $LOCALPATCHES/$PKGPATH). For example, if you want to keep a private patch
|
|
for pkgsrc/graphics/png, keep it in $LOCALPATCHES/graphics/png/mypatch. All
|
|
files in the named directory are expected to be patch files, and they are
|
|
applied after pkgsrc patches are applied.
|
|
|
|
11.3.4. Patching guidelines
|
|
|
|
When fixing a portability issue in the code do not use preprocessor magic to
|
|
check for the current operating system nor platform. Doing so hurts portability
|
|
to other platforms because the OS-specific details are not abstracted
|
|
appropriately.
|
|
|
|
The general rule to follow is: instead of checking for the operating system the
|
|
application is being built on, check for the specific features you need. For
|
|
example, instead of assuming that kqueue is available under NetBSD and using
|
|
the __NetBSD__ macro to conditionalize kqueue support, add a check that detects
|
|
kqueue itself ? yes, this generally involves patching the configure script.
|
|
There is absolutely nothing that prevents some OSes from adopting interfaces
|
|
from other OSes (e.g. Linux implementing kqueue), something that the above
|
|
checks cannot take into account.
|
|
|
|
Of course, checking for features generally involves more work on the
|
|
developer's side, but the resulting changes are cleaner and there are chances
|
|
they will work on many other platforms. Not to mention that there are higher
|
|
chances of being later integrated into the mainstream sources. Remember: It
|
|
doesn't work unless it is right!
|
|
|
|
Some typical examples:
|
|
|
|
Table 11.1. Patching examples
|
|
|
|
+-------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------+
|
|
| Where | Incorrect | Correct |
|
|
|---------+--------------------------+------------------------------------------------------|
|
|
| |case ${target_os} in | |
|
|
|configure|netbsd*) have_kvm=yes ;; |AC_CHECK_LIB(kvm, kvm_open, have_kvm=yes, have_kvm=no)|
|
|
|script |*) have_kvm=no ;; | |
|
|
| |esac | |
|
|
|---------+--------------------------+------------------------------------------------------|
|
|
|C source |#if defined(__NetBSD__) |#if defined(HAVE_SYS_EVENT_H) |
|
|
|file |# include <sys/event.h> |# include <sys/event.h> |
|
|
| |#endif |#endif |
|
|
|---------+--------------------------+------------------------------------------------------|
|
|
| |int |int |
|
|
| |monitor_file(...) |monitor_file(...) |
|
|
| |{ |{ |
|
|
| |#if defined(__NetBSD__) |#if defined(HAVE_KQUEUE) |
|
|
|C source | int fd = kqueue();| int fd = kqueue(); |
|
|
|file | ... | ... |
|
|
| |#else |#else |
|
|
| | ... | ... |
|
|
| |#endif |#endif |
|
|
| |} |} |
|
|
+-------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------+
|
|
|
|
|
|
For more information, please read the Making packager-friendly software article
|
|
(part 1, part 2). It summarizes multiple details on how to make software easier
|
|
to package; all the suggestions in it were collected from our experience in
|
|
pkgsrc work, so they are possibly helpful when creating patches too.
|
|
|
|
11.3.5. Feedback to the author
|
|
|
|
Always, always, always feed back any portability fixes or improvements you do
|
|
to a package to the mainstream developers. This is the only way to get their
|
|
attention on portability issues and to ensure that future versions can be built
|
|
out-of-the box on NetBSD. Furthermore, any user that gets newer distfiles will
|
|
get the fixes straight from the packaged code.
|
|
|
|
This generally involves cleaning up the patches (because sometimes the patches
|
|
that are added to pkgsrc are quick hacks), filling bug reports in the
|
|
appropriate trackers for the projects and working with the mainstream authors
|
|
to accept your changes. It is extremely important that you do it so that the
|
|
packages in pkgsrc are kept simple and thus further changes can be done without
|
|
much hassle.
|
|
|
|
Support the idea of free software!
|
|
|
|
11.4. Other mandatory files
|
|
|
|
DESCR
|
|
|
|
A multi-line description of the piece of software. This should include any
|
|
credits where they are due. Please bear in mind that others do not share
|
|
your sense of humour (or spelling idiosyncrasies), and that others will
|
|
read everything that you write here.
|
|
|
|
PLIST
|
|
|
|
This file governs the files that are installed on your system: all the
|
|
binaries, manual pages, etc. There are other directives which may be
|
|
entered in this file, to control the creation and deletion of directories,
|
|
and the location of inserted files. See Chapter 13, PLIST issues for more
|
|
information.
|
|
|
|
11.5. Optional files
|
|
|
|
11.5.1. Files affecting the binary package
|
|
|
|
INSTALL
|
|
|
|
This shell script is invoked twice by pkg_add(1). First time after package
|
|
extraction and before files are moved in place, the second time after the
|
|
files to install are moved in place. This can be used to do any custom
|
|
procedures not possible with @exec commands in PLIST. See pkg_add(1) and
|
|
pkg_create(1) for more information. See also Section 15.1, "Files and
|
|
directories outside the installation prefix".
|
|
|
|
DEINSTALL
|
|
|
|
This script is executed before and after any files are removed. It is this
|
|
script's responsibility to clean up any additional messy details around the
|
|
package's installation, since all pkg_delete knows is how to delete the
|
|
files created in the original distribution. See pkg_delete(1) and
|
|
pkg_create(1) for more information.
|
|
|
|
MESSAGE
|
|
|
|
This file is displayed after installation of the package. Useful for things
|
|
like legal notices on almost-free software and hints for updating config
|
|
files after installing modules for apache, PHP etc. Please note that you
|
|
can modify variables in it easily by using MESSAGE_SUBST in the package's
|
|
Makefile:
|
|
|
|
MESSAGE_SUBST+= SOMEVAR="somevalue"
|
|
|
|
replaces "${SOMEVAR}" with "somevalue" in MESSAGE. By default, substitution
|
|
is performed for PKGNAME, PKGBASE, PREFIX, LOCALBASE, X11PREFIX, X11BASE,
|
|
PKG_SYSCONFDIR, ROOT_GROUP, and ROOT_GROUP.
|
|
|
|
You can display a different or additional files by setting the MESSAGE_SRC
|
|
variable. Its default is MESSAGE, if the file exists.
|
|
|
|
ALTERNATIVES
|
|
|
|
FIXME: There is no documentation on the alternatives framework.
|
|
|
|
11.5.2. Files affecting the build process
|
|
|
|
Makefile.common
|
|
|
|
This file contains arbitrary things that could also go into a Makefile, but
|
|
its purpose is to be used by more than one package. This file should only
|
|
be used when the packages that will use the file are known in advance. For
|
|
other purposes it is often better to write a *.mk file and give it a good
|
|
name that describes what it does.
|
|
|
|
buildlink3.mk
|
|
|
|
This file contains the dependency information for the buildlink3 framework
|
|
(see Chapter 14, Buildlink methodology).
|
|
|
|
hacks.mk
|
|
|
|
This file contains workarounds for compiler bugs and similar things. It is
|
|
included automatically by the pkgsrc infrastructure, so you don't need an
|
|
extra .include line for it.
|
|
|
|
options.mk
|
|
|
|
This file contains the code for the package-specific options (see
|
|
Chapter 16, Options handling) that can be selected by the user. If a
|
|
package has only one or two options, it is equally acceptable to put the
|
|
code directly into the Makefile.
|
|
|
|
11.5.3. Files affecting nothing at all
|
|
|
|
README*
|
|
|
|
These files do not take place in the creation of a package and thus are
|
|
purely informative to the package developer.
|
|
|
|
TODO
|
|
|
|
This file contains things that need to be done to make the package even
|
|
better.
|
|
|
|
11.6. work*
|
|
|
|
When you type make, the distribution files are unpacked into the directory
|
|
denoted by WRKDIR. It can be removed by running make clean. Besides the
|
|
sources, this directory is also used to keep various timestamp files. The
|
|
directory gets removed completely on clean. The default is ${.CURDIR}/work or $
|
|
{.CURDIR}/work.${MACHINE_ARCH} if OBJMACHINE is set.
|
|
|
|
11.7. files/*
|
|
|
|
If you have any files that you wish to be placed in the package prior to
|
|
configuration or building, you could place these files here and use a ${CP}
|
|
command in the "pre-configure" target to achieve this. Alternatively, you could
|
|
simply diff the file against /dev/null and use the patch mechanism to manage
|
|
the creation of this file.
|
|
|
|
If you want to share files in this way with other packages, set the FILESDIR
|
|
variable to point to the other package's files directory, e.g.:
|
|
|
|
FILESDIR=${.CURDIR}/../xemacs/files
|
|
|
|
Chapter 12. Programming in Makefiles
|
|
|
|
Table of Contents
|
|
|
|
12.1. Caveats
|
|
12.2. Makefile variables
|
|
|
|
12.2.1. Naming conventions
|
|
|
|
12.3. Code snippets
|
|
|
|
12.3.1. Adding things to a list
|
|
12.3.2. Converting an internal list into an external list
|
|
12.3.3. Passing variables to a shell command
|
|
12.3.4. Quoting guideline
|
|
12.3.5. Workaround for a bug in BSD Make
|
|
|
|
Pkgsrc consists of many Makefile fragments, each of which forms a well-defined
|
|
part of the pkgsrc system. Using the make(1) system as a programming language
|
|
for a big system like pkgsrc requires some discipline to keep the code correct
|
|
and understandable.
|
|
|
|
The basic ingredients for Makefile programming are variables (which are
|
|
actually macros) and shell commands. Among these shell commands may even be
|
|
more complex ones like awk(1) programs. To make sure that every shell command
|
|
runs as intended it is necessary to quote all variables correctly when they are
|
|
used.
|
|
|
|
This chapter describes some patterns, that appear quite often in Makefiles,
|
|
including the pitfalls that come along with them.
|
|
|
|
12.1. Caveats
|
|
|
|
* When you are creating a file as a target of a rule, always write the data
|
|
to a temporary file first and finally rename that file. Otherwise there
|
|
might occur an error in the middle of generating the file, and when the
|
|
user runs make(1) for the second time, the file exists and will not be
|
|
regenerated properly. Example:
|
|
|
|
wrong:
|
|
@echo "line 1" > ${.TARGET}
|
|
@echo "line 2" >> ${.TARGET}
|
|
@false
|
|
|
|
correct:
|
|
@echo "line 1" > ${.TARGET}.tmp
|
|
@echo "line 2" >> ${.TARGET}.tmp
|
|
@false
|
|
@mv ${.TARGET}.tmp ${.TARGET}
|
|
|
|
When you run make wrong twice, the file wrong will exist, although there
|
|
was an error message in the first run. On the other hand, running make
|
|
correct gives an error message twice, as expected.
|
|
|
|
You might remember that make(1) sometimes removes ${.TARGET} in case of
|
|
error, but this only happens when it is interrupted, for example by
|
|
pressing ^C. This does not happen when one of the commands fails (like
|
|
false(1) above).
|
|
|
|
12.2. Makefile variables
|
|
|
|
Makefile variables contain strings that can be processed using the five
|
|
operators ``='', ``+='', ``?='', ``:='', and ``!='', which are described in the
|
|
make(1) man page.
|
|
|
|
When a variable's value is parsed from a Makefile, the hash character ``#'' and
|
|
the backslash character ``\'' are handled specially. If a backslash is followed
|
|
by a newline, any whitespace immediately in front of the backslash, the
|
|
backslash, the newline, and any whitespace immediately behind the newline are
|
|
replaced with a single space. A backslash character and an immediately
|
|
following hash character are replaced with a single hash character. Otherwise,
|
|
the backslash is passed as is. In a variable assignment, any hash character
|
|
that is not preceded by a backslash starts a comment that continues upto the
|
|
end of the logical line.
|
|
|
|
Note: Because of this parsing algorithm the only way to create a variable
|
|
consisting of a single backslash is using the ``!='' operator, for example:
|
|
BACKSLASH!=echo "\\".
|
|
|
|
So far for defining variables. The other thing you can do with variables is
|
|
evaluating them. A variable is evaluated when it is part of the right side of
|
|
the ``:='' or the ``!='' operator, or directly before executing a shell command
|
|
which the variable is part of. In all other cases, make(1) performs lazy
|
|
evaluation, that is, variables are not evaluated until there's no other way.
|
|
The ``modifiers'' mentioned in the man page also evaluate the variable.
|
|
|
|
Some of the modifiers split the string into words and then operate on the
|
|
words, others operate on the string as a whole. When a string is split into
|
|
words, it is split as you would expect it from sh(1).
|
|
|
|
No rule without exception?the .for loop does not follow the shell quoting rules
|
|
but splits at sequences of whitespace.
|
|
|
|
There are several types of variables that should be handled differently.
|
|
Strings and two types of lists.
|
|
|
|
* Strings can contain arbitrary characters. Nevertheless, you should restrict
|
|
yourself to only using printable characters. Examples are PREFIX and
|
|
COMMENT.
|
|
|
|
* Internal lists are lists that are never exported to any shell command.
|
|
Their elements are separated by whitespace. Therefore, the elements
|
|
themselves cannot have embedded whitespace. Any other characters are
|
|
allowed. Internal lists can be used in .for loops. Examples are DEPENDS and
|
|
BUILD_DEPENDS.
|
|
|
|
* External lists are lists that may be exported to a shell command. Their
|
|
elements can contain any characters, including whitespace. That's why they
|
|
cannot be used in .for loops. Examples are DISTFILES and MASTER_SITES.
|
|
|
|
12.2.1. Naming conventions
|
|
|
|
* All variable names starting with an underscore are reserved for use by the
|
|
pkgsrc infrastructure. They shall not be used by package Makefiles.
|
|
|
|
* In .for loops you should use lowercase variable names for the iteration
|
|
variables.
|
|
|
|
* All list variables should have a ``plural'' name, e.g. PKG_OPTIONS or
|
|
DISTFILES.
|
|
|
|
12.3. Code snippets
|
|
|
|
This section presents you with some code snippets you should use in your own
|
|
code. If you don't find anything appropriate here, you should test your code
|
|
and add it here.
|
|
|
|
12.3.1. Adding things to a list
|
|
|
|
STRING= foo * bar `date`
|
|
INT_LIST= # empty
|
|
ANOTHER_INT_LIST= apache-[0-9]*:../../www/apache
|
|
EXT_LIST= # empty
|
|
ANOTHER_EXT_LIST= a=b c=d
|
|
|
|
INT_LIST+= ${STRING} # 1
|
|
INT_LIST+= ${ANOTHER_INT_LIST} # 2
|
|
EXT_LIST+= ${STRING:Q} # 3
|
|
EXT_LIST+= ${ANOTHER_EXT_LIST} # 4
|
|
|
|
When you add a string to an external list (example 3), it must be quoted. In
|
|
all other cases, you must not add a quoting level. You must not merge internal
|
|
and external lists, unless you are sure that all entries are correctly
|
|
interpreted in both lists.
|
|
|
|
12.3.2. Converting an internal list into an external list
|
|
|
|
EXT_LIST= # empty
|
|
.for i in ${INT_LIST}
|
|
EXT_LIST+= ${i:Q}""
|
|
.endfor
|
|
|
|
This code converts the internal list INT_LIST into the external list EXT_LIST.
|
|
As the elements of an internal list are unquoted they must be quoted here. The
|
|
reason for appending "" is explained below.
|
|
|
|
12.3.3. Passing variables to a shell command
|
|
|
|
Sometimes you may want to print an arbitrary string. There are many ways to get
|
|
it wrong and only few that can handle every nastiness.
|
|
|
|
STRING= foo bar < > * `date` $$HOME ' "
|
|
EXT_LIST= string=${STRING:Q} x=second\ item
|
|
|
|
all:
|
|
echo ${STRING} # 1
|
|
echo "${STRING}" # 2
|
|
echo "${STRING:Q}" # 3
|
|
echo ${STRING:Q} # 4
|
|
echo x${STRING:Q} | sed 1s,.,, # 5
|
|
printf "%s\\n" ${STRING:Q}"" # 6
|
|
env ${EXT_LIST} /bin/sh -c 'echo "$$string"; echo "$$x"'
|
|
|
|
Example 1 leads to a syntax error in the shell, as the characters are just
|
|
copied.
|
|
|
|
Example 2 leads to a syntax error too, and if you leave out the last "
|
|
character from ${STRING}, date(1) will be executed. The $HOME shell variable
|
|
would be evaluated, too.
|
|
|
|
Example 3 outputs each space character preceded by a backslash (or not),
|
|
depending on the implementation of the echo(1) command.
|
|
|
|
Example 4 handles correctly every string that does not start with a dash. In
|
|
that case, the result depends on the implementation of the echo(1) command. As
|
|
long as you can guarantee that your input does not start with a dash, this form
|
|
is appropriate.
|
|
|
|
Example 5 handles even the case of a leading dash correctly.
|
|
|
|
Example 6 also works with every string and is the light-weight solution, since
|
|
it does not involve a pipe, which has its own problems.
|
|
|
|
The EXT_LIST does not need to be quoted because the quoting has already been
|
|
done when adding elements to the list.
|
|
|
|
As internal lists shall not be passed to the shell, there is no example for it.
|
|
|
|
12.3.4. Quoting guideline
|
|
|
|
There are many possible sources of wrongly quoted variables. This section lists
|
|
some of the commonly known ones.
|
|
|
|
* Whenever you use the value of a list, think about what happens to leading
|
|
or trailing whitespace. If the list is a well-formed shell expression, you
|
|
can apply the :M* modifier to strip leading and trailing whitespace from
|
|
each word. The :M operator first splits its argument according to the rules
|
|
of the shell, and then creates a new list consisting of all words that
|
|
match the shell glob expression *, that is: all. One class of situations
|
|
where this is needed is when adding a variable like CPPFLAGS to
|
|
CONFIGURE_ARGS. If the configure script invokes other configure scripts, it
|
|
strips the leading and trailing whitespace from the variable and then
|
|
passes it to the other configure scripts. But these configure scripts
|
|
expect the (child) CPPFLAGS variable to be the same as the parent CPPFLAGS.
|
|
That's why we better pass the CPPFLAGS value properly trimmed. And here is
|
|
how we do it:
|
|
|
|
CPPFLAGS= # empty
|
|
CPPFLAGS+= -Wundef -DPREFIX=\"${PREFIX:Q}\"
|
|
CPPFLAGS+= ${MY_CPPFLAGS}
|
|
|
|
CONFIGURE_ARGS+= CPPFLAGS=${CPPFLAGS:M*:Q}
|
|
|
|
all:
|
|
echo x${CPPFLAGS:Q}x # leading and trailing whitespace
|
|
echo x${CONFIGURE_ARGS}x # properly trimmed
|
|
|
|
* The example above contains one bug: The ${PREFIX} is a properly quoted
|
|
shell expression, but there is the C compiler after it, which also expects
|
|
a properly quoted string (this time in C syntax). The version above is
|
|
therefore only correct if ${PREFIX} does not have embedded backslashes or
|
|
double quotes. If you want to allow these, you have to add another layer of
|
|
quoting to each variable that is used as a C string literal. You cannot use
|
|
the :Q operator for it, as this operator only works for the shell.
|
|
|
|
* Whenever a variable can be empty, the :Q operator can have surprising
|
|
results. Here are two completely different cases which can be solved with
|
|
the same trick.
|
|
|
|
EMPTY= # empty
|
|
empty_test:
|
|
for i in a ${EMPTY:Q} c; do \
|
|
echo "$$i"; \
|
|
done
|
|
|
|
for_test:
|
|
.for i in a:\ a:\test.txt
|
|
echo ${i:Q}
|
|
echo "foo"
|
|
.endfor
|
|
|
|
The first example will only print two of the three lines we might have
|
|
expected. This is because ${EMPTY:Q} expands to the empty string, which the
|
|
shell cannot see. The workaround is to write ${EMPTY:Q}"". This pattern can
|
|
be often found as ${TEST} -z ${VAR:Q} or as ${TEST} -f ${FNAME:Q} (both of
|
|
these are wrong).
|
|
|
|
The second example will only print three lines instead of four. The first
|
|
line looks like a:\ echo foo. This is because the backslash of the value a:
|
|
\ is interpreted as a line-continuation by make(1), which makes the second
|
|
line the arguments of the echo(1) command from the first line. To avoid
|
|
this, write ${i:Q}"".
|
|
|
|
12.3.5. Workaround for a bug in BSD Make
|
|
|
|
The pkgsrc bmake program does not handle the following assignment correctly. In
|
|
case _othervar_ contains a ``-'' character, one of the closing braces is
|
|
included in ${VAR} after this code executes.
|
|
|
|
VAR:= ${VAR:N${_othervar_:C/-//}}
|
|
|
|
For a more complex code snippet and a workaround, see the package regress/
|
|
make-quoting, testcase bug1.
|
|
|
|
Chapter 13. PLIST issues
|
|
|
|
Table of Contents
|
|
|
|
13.1. RCS ID
|
|
13.2. Semi-automatic PLIST generation
|
|
13.3. Tweaking output of make print-PLIST
|
|
13.4. Variable substitution in PLIST
|
|
13.5. Man page compression
|
|
13.6. Changing PLIST source with PLIST_SRC
|
|
13.7. Platform-specific and differing PLISTs
|
|
13.8. Sharing directories between packages
|
|
|
|
The PLIST file contains a package's "packing list", i.e. a list of files that
|
|
belong to the package (relative to the ${PREFIX} directory it's been installed
|
|
in) plus some additional statements - see the pkg_create(1) man page for a full
|
|
list. This chapter addresses some issues that need attention when dealing with
|
|
the PLIST file (or files, see below!).
|
|
|
|
13.1. RCS ID
|
|
|
|
Be sure to add a RCS ID line as the first thing in any PLIST file you write:
|
|
|
|
@comment $NetBSD$
|
|
|
|
|
|
13.2. Semi-automatic PLIST generation
|
|
|
|
You can use the make print-PLIST command to output a PLIST that matches any new
|
|
files since the package was extracted. See Section 17.17, "Other helpful
|
|
targets" for more information on this target.
|
|
|
|
13.3. Tweaking output of make print-PLIST
|
|
|
|
If you have used any of the *-dirs packages, as explained in Section 13.8,
|
|
"Sharing directories between packages", you may have noticed that make
|
|
print-PLIST outputs a set of @comments instead of real @dirrm lines. You can
|
|
also do this for specific directories and files, so that the results of that
|
|
command are very close to reality. This helps a lot during the update of
|
|
packages.
|
|
|
|
The PRINT_PLIST_AWK variable takes a set of AWK patterns and actions that are
|
|
used to filter the output of print-PLIST. You can append any chunk of AWK
|
|
scripting you like to it, but be careful with quoting.
|
|
|
|
For example, to get all files inside the libdata/foo directory removed from the
|
|
resulting PLIST:
|
|
|
|
PRINT_PLIST_AWK+= /^libdata\/foo/ { next; }
|
|
|
|
|
|
And to get all the @dirrm lines referring to a specific (shared) directory
|
|
converted to @comments:
|
|
|
|
PRINT_PLIST_AWK+= /^@dirrm share\/specific/ { print "@comment " $$0; next; }
|
|
|
|
|
|
13.4. Variable substitution in PLIST
|
|
|
|
A number of variables are substituted automatically in PLISTs when a package is
|
|
installed on a system. This includes the following variables:
|
|
|
|
${MACHINE_ARCH}, ${MACHINE_GNU_ARCH}
|
|
|
|
Some packages like emacs and perl embed information about which
|
|
architecture they were built on into the pathnames where they install their
|
|
files. To handle this case, PLIST will be preprocessed before actually
|
|
used, and the symbol "${MACHINE_ARCH}" will be replaced by what uname -p
|
|
gives. The same is done if the string ${MACHINE_GNU_ARCH} is embedded in
|
|
PLIST somewhere - use this on packages that have GNU autoconf-created
|
|
configure scripts.
|
|
|
|
Legacy note
|
|
|
|
There used to be a symbol "$ARCH" that was replaced by the output of uname
|
|
-m, but that's no longer supported and has been removed.
|
|
|
|
${OPSYS}, ${LOWER_OPSYS}, ${OS_VERSION}
|
|
|
|
Some packages want to embed the OS name and version into some paths. To do
|
|
this, use these variables in the PLIST:
|
|
|
|
* ${OPSYS} - output of "uname -s"
|
|
|
|
* ${LOWER_OPSYS} - lowercase common name (eg. "solaris")
|
|
|
|
* ${OS_VERSION} - "uname -r"
|
|
|
|
For a complete list of values which are replaced by default, please look in
|
|
bsd.pkg.mk (and search for PLIST_SUBST).
|
|
|
|
If you want to change other variables not listed above, you can add variables
|
|
and their expansions to this variable in the following way, similar to
|
|
MESSAGE_SUBST (see Section 11.5, "Optional files"):
|
|
|
|
PLIST_SUBST+= SOMEVAR="somevalue"
|
|
|
|
|
|
This replaces all occurrences of "${SOMEVAR}" in the PLIST with "somevalue".
|
|
|
|
13.5. Man page compression
|
|
|
|
Man pages should be installed in compressed form if MANZ is set (in
|
|
bsd.own.mk), and uncompressed otherwise. To handle this in the PLIST file, the
|
|
suffix ".gz" is appended/removed automatically for man pages according to MANZ
|
|
and MANCOMPRESSED being set or not, see above for details. This modification of
|
|
the PLIST file is done on a copy of it, not PLIST itself.
|
|
|
|
13.6. Changing PLIST source with PLIST_SRC
|
|
|
|
To use one or more files as source for the PLIST used in generating the binary
|
|
package, set the variable PLIST_SRC to the names of that file(s). The files are
|
|
later concatenated using cat(1), and the order of things is important. The
|
|
default for PLIST_SRC is ${PKGDIR}/PLIST.
|
|
|
|
13.7. Platform-specific and differing PLISTs
|
|
|
|
Some packages decide to install a different set of files based on the operating
|
|
system being used. These differences can be automatically handled by using the
|
|
following files:
|
|
|
|
* PLIST.common
|
|
|
|
* PLIST.${OPSYS}
|
|
|
|
* PLIST.${MACHINE_ARCH}
|
|
|
|
* PLIST.${OPSYS}-${MACHINE_ARCH}
|
|
|
|
* PLIST.common_end
|
|
|
|
13.8. Sharing directories between packages
|
|
|
|
A "shared directory" is a directory where multiple (and unrelated) packages
|
|
install files. These directories are problematic because you have to add
|
|
special tricks in the PLIST to conditionally remove them, or have some
|
|
centralized package handle them.
|
|
|
|
Within pkgsrc, you'll find both approaches. If a directory is shared by a few
|
|
unrelated packages, it's often not worth to add an extra package to remove it.
|
|
Therefore, one simply does:
|
|
|
|
@unexec ${RMDIR} %D/path/to/shared/directory 2>/dev/null || ${TRUE}
|
|
|
|
|
|
in the PLISTs of all affected packages, instead of the regular "@dirrm" line.
|
|
|
|
However, if the directory is shared across many packages, two different
|
|
solutions are available:
|
|
|
|
1. If the packages have a common dependency, the directory can be removed in
|
|
that. For example, see textproc/scrollkeeper, which removes the shared
|
|
directory share/omf.
|
|
|
|
2. If the packages using the directory are not related at all (they have no
|
|
common dependencies), a *-dirs package is used.
|
|
|
|
From now on, we'll discuss the second solution. To get an idea of the *-dirs
|
|
packages available, issue:
|
|
|
|
% cd .../pkgsrc
|
|
% ls -d */*-dirs
|
|
|
|
|
|
Their use from other packages is very simple. The USE_DIRS variable takes a
|
|
list of package names (without the "-dirs" part) together with the required
|
|
version number (always pick the latest one when writing new packages).
|
|
|
|
For example, if a package installs files under share/applications, it should
|
|
have the following line in it:
|
|
|
|
USE_DIRS+= xdg-1.1
|
|
|
|
|
|
After regenerating the PLIST using make print-PLIST, you should get the right
|
|
(commented out) lines.
|
|
|
|
Note that even if your package is using $X11BASE, it must not depend on the
|
|
*-x11-dirs packages. Just specify the name without that part and pkgsrc (in
|
|
particular, mk/dirs.mk) will take care of it.
|
|
|
|
Chapter 14. Buildlink methodology
|
|
|
|
Table of Contents
|
|
|
|
14.1. Converting packages to use buildlink3
|
|
14.2. Writing buildlink3.mk files
|
|
|
|
14.2.1. Anatomy of a buildlink3.mk file
|
|
14.2.2. Updating BUILDLINK_API_DEPENDS.pkg in buildlink3.mk files
|
|
|
|
14.3. Writing builtin.mk files
|
|
|
|
14.3.1. Anatomy of a builtin.mk file
|
|
14.3.2. Global preferences for native or pkgsrc software
|
|
|
|
Buildlink is a framework in pkgsrc that controls what headers and libraries are
|
|
seen by a package's configure and build processes. This is implemented in a two
|
|
step process:
|
|
|
|
1. Symlink headers and libraries for dependencies into BUILDLINK_DIR, which by
|
|
default is a subdirectory of WRKDIR.
|
|
|
|
2. Create wrapper scripts that are used in place of the normal compiler tools
|
|
that translate -I${LOCALBASE}/include and -L${LOCALBASE}/lib into
|
|
references to BUILDLINK_DIR. The wrapper scripts also make native compiler
|
|
on some operating systems look like GCC, so that packages that expect GCC
|
|
won't require modifications to build with those native compilers.
|
|
|
|
This normalizes the environment in which a package is built so that the package
|
|
may be built consistently despite what other software may be installed. Please
|
|
note that the normal system header and library paths, e.g. /usr/include, /usr/
|
|
lib, etc., are always searched -- buildlink3 is designed to insulate the
|
|
package build from non-system-supplied software.
|
|
|
|
14.1. Converting packages to use buildlink3
|
|
|
|
The process of converting packages to use the buildlink3 framework
|
|
("bl3ifying") is fairly straightforward. The things to keep in mind are:
|
|
|
|
1. Ensure that the build always calls the wrapper scripts instead of the
|
|
actual toolchain. Some packages are tricky, and the only way to know for
|
|
sure is the check ${WRKDIR}/.work.log to see if the wrappers are being
|
|
invoked.
|
|
|
|
2. Don't override PREFIX from within the package Makefile, e.g. Java VMs,
|
|
standalone shells, etc., because the code to symlink files into $
|
|
{BUILDLINK_DIR} looks for files relative to "pkg_info -qp pkgname".
|
|
|
|
3. Remember that only the buildlink3.mk files that you list in a package's
|
|
Makefile are added as dependencies for that package.
|
|
|
|
If a dependency on a particular package is required for its libraries and
|
|
headers, then we replace:
|
|
|
|
DEPENDS+= foo>=1.1.0:../../category/foo
|
|
|
|
with
|
|
|
|
.include "../../category/foo/buildlink3.mk"
|
|
|
|
The buildlink3.mk files usually define the required dependencies. If you need a
|
|
newer version of the dependency when using buildlink3.mk files, then you can
|
|
define it in your Makefile; for example:
|
|
|
|
BUILDLINK_API_DEPENDS.foo+= foo>=1.1.0
|
|
.include "../../category/foo/buildlink3.mk"
|
|
|
|
There are several buildlink3.mk files in pkgsrc/mk that handle special package
|
|
issues:
|
|
|
|
* bdb.buildlink3.mk chooses either the native or a pkgsrc Berkeley DB
|
|
implementation based on the values of BDB_ACCEPTED and BDB_DEFAULT.
|
|
|
|
* curses.buildlink3.mk: If the system comes with neither Curses nor NCurses,
|
|
this will take care to install the devel/ncurses package.
|
|
|
|
* krb5.buildlink3.mk uses the value of KRB5_ACCEPTED to choose between adding
|
|
a dependency on Heimdal or MIT-krb5 for packages that require a Kerberos 5
|
|
implementation.
|
|
|
|
* motif.buildlink3.mk checks for a system-provided Motif installation or adds
|
|
a dependency on x11/lesstif or x11/openmotif. The user can set MOTIF_TYPE
|
|
to "dt", "lesstif", or "openmotif" to choose which Motif version will be
|
|
used.
|
|
|
|
* oss.buildlink3.mk defines several variables that may be used by packages
|
|
that use the Open Sound System (OSS) API.
|
|
|
|
* pgsql.buildlink3.mk will accept either Postgres 8.0, 8.1, or 8.2, whichever
|
|
is found installed. See the file for more information.
|
|
|
|
* pthread.buildlink3.mk uses the value of PTHREAD_OPTS and checks for native
|
|
pthreads or adds a dependency on devel/pth as needed.
|
|
|
|
* xaw.buildlink3.mk uses the value of XAW_TYPE to choose a particular Athena
|
|
widgets library.
|
|
|
|
The comments in those buildlink3.mk files provide a more complete description
|
|
of how to use them properly.
|
|
|
|
14.2. Writing buildlink3.mk files
|
|
|
|
A package's buildlink3.mk file is included by Makefiles to indicate the need to
|
|
compile and link against header files and libraries provided by the package. A
|
|
buildlink3.mk file should always provide enough information to add the correct
|
|
type of dependency relationship and include any other buildlink3.mk files that
|
|
it needs to find headers and libraries that it needs in turn.
|
|
|
|
To generate an initial buildlink3.mk file for further editing, Rene Hexel's
|
|
pkgtools/createbuildlink package is highly recommended. For most packages, the
|
|
following command will generate a good starting point for buildlink3.mk files:
|
|
|
|
% cd pkgsrc/category/pkgdir
|
|
% createbuildlink >buildlink3.mk
|
|
|
|
|
|
14.2.1. Anatomy of a buildlink3.mk file
|
|
|
|
The following real-life example buildlink3.mk is taken from pkgsrc/graphics/
|
|
tiff:
|
|
|
|
# $NetBSD: buildlink3.mk,v 1.7 2004/03/18 09:12:12 jlam Exp $
|
|
|
|
BUILDLINK_DEPTH:= ${BUILDLINK_DEPTH}+
|
|
TIFF_BUILDLINK3_MK:= ${TIFF_BUILDLINK3_MK}+
|
|
|
|
.if ${BUILDLINK_DEPTH} == "+"
|
|
BUILDLINK_DEPENDS+= tiff
|
|
.endif
|
|
|
|
BUILDLINK_PACKAGES:= ${BUILDLINK_PACKAGES:Ntiff}
|
|
BUILDLINK_PACKAGES+= tiff
|
|
|
|
.if ${TIFF_BUILDLINK3_MK} == "+"
|
|
BUILDLINK_API_DEPENDS.tiff+= tiff>=3.6.1
|
|
BUILDLINK_PKGSRCDIR.tiff?= ../../graphics/tiff
|
|
.endif # TIFF_BUILDLINK3_MK
|
|
|
|
.include "../../devel/zlib/buildlink3.mk"
|
|
.include "../../graphics/jpeg/buildlink3.mk"
|
|
|
|
BUILDLINK_DEPTH:= ${BUILDLINK_DEPTH:S/+$//}
|
|
|
|
The header and footer manipulate BUILDLINK_DEPTH, which is common across all
|
|
buildlink3.mk files and is used to track at what depth we are including
|
|
buildlink3.mk files.
|
|
|
|
The first section controls if the dependency on pkg is added. BUILDLINK_DEPENDS
|
|
is the global list of packages for which dependencies are added by buildlink3.
|
|
|
|
The second section advises pkgsrc that the buildlink3.mk file for pkg has been
|
|
included at some point. BUILDLINK_PACKAGES is the global list of packages for
|
|
which buildlink3.mk files have been included. It must always be appended to
|
|
within a buildlink3.mk file.
|
|
|
|
The third section is protected from multiple inclusion and controls how the
|
|
dependency on pkg is added. Several important variables are set in the section:
|
|
|
|
* BUILDLINK_API_DEPENDS.pkg is the actual dependency recorded in the
|
|
installed package; this should always be set using += to ensure that we're
|
|
appending to any pre-existing list of values. This variable should be set
|
|
to the first version of the package that had an API change.
|
|
|
|
* BUILDLINK_PKGSRCDIR.pkg is the location of the pkg pkgsrc directory.
|
|
|
|
* BUILDLINK_DEPMETHOD.pkg (not shown above) controls whether we use
|
|
BUILD_DEPENDS or DEPENDS to add the dependency on pkg. The build dependency
|
|
is selected by setting BUILDLINK_DEPMETHOD.pkg to "build". By default, the
|
|
full dependency is used.
|
|
|
|
* BUILDLINK_INCDIRS.pkg and BUILDLINK_LIBDIRS.pkg (not shown above) are lists
|
|
of subdirectories of ${BUILDLINK_PREFIX.pkg} to add to the header and
|
|
library search paths. These default to "include" and "lib" respectively.
|
|
|
|
* BUILDLINK_CPPFLAGS.pkg (not shown above) is the list of preprocessor flags
|
|
to add to CPPFLAGS, which are passed on to the configure and build phases.
|
|
The "-I" option should be avoided and instead be handled using
|
|
BUILDLINK_INCDIRS.pkg as above.
|
|
|
|
The following variables are all optionally defined within this second section
|
|
(protected against multiple inclusion) and control which package files are
|
|
symlinked into ${BUILDLINK_DIR} and how their names are transformed during the
|
|
symlinking:
|
|
|
|
* BUILDLINK_FILES.pkg (not shown above) is a shell glob pattern relative to $
|
|
{BUILDLINK_PREFIX.pkg} to be symlinked into ${BUILDLINK_DIR}, e.g. include/
|
|
*.h.
|
|
|
|
* BUILDLINK_FILES_CMD.pkg (not shown above) is a shell pipeline that outputs
|
|
to stdout a list of files relative to ${BUILDLINK_PREFIX.pkg}. The
|
|
resulting files are to be symlinked into ${BUILDLINK_DIR}. By default, this
|
|
takes the +CONTENTS of a pkg and filters it through $
|
|
{BUILDLINK_CONTENTS_FILTER.pkg}.
|
|
|
|
* BUILDLINK_CONTENTS_FILTER.pkg (not shown above) is a filter command that
|
|
filters +CONTENTS input into a list of files relative to $
|
|
{BUILDLINK_PREFIX.pkg} on stdout. By default for overwrite packages,
|
|
BUILDLINK_CONTENTS_FILTER.pkg outputs the contents of the include and lib
|
|
directories in the package +CONTENTS, and for pkgviews packages, it outputs
|
|
any libtool archives in lib directories.
|
|
|
|
* BUILDLINK_FNAME_TRANSFORM.pkg (not shown above) is a list of sed arguments
|
|
used to transform the name of the source filename into a destination
|
|
filename, e.g. -e "s|/curses.h|/ncurses.h|g".
|
|
|
|
The last section includes any buildlink3.mk needed for pkg's library
|
|
dependencies. Including these buildlink3.mk files means that the headers and
|
|
libraries for these dependencies are also symlinked into ${BUILDLINK_DIR}
|
|
whenever the pkg buildlink3.mk file is included.
|
|
|
|
14.2.2. Updating BUILDLINK_API_DEPENDS.pkg in buildlink3.mk files
|
|
|
|
The situation that requires increasing the dependency listed in
|
|
BUILDLINK_API_DEPENDS.pkg after a package update is when the API or interface
|
|
to the header files change.
|
|
|
|
In this case, BUILDLINK_API_DEPENDS.pkg should be adjusted to require at least
|
|
the new package version. In some cases, the packages that depend on this new
|
|
version may need their PKGREVISIONs increased and, if they have buildlink3.mk
|
|
files, their BUILDLINK_API_DEPENDS.pkg adjusted, too. This is needed so pkgsrc
|
|
will require the correct package dependency and not settle for an older one
|
|
when building the source.
|
|
|
|
BUILDLINK_ABI_DEPENDS.pkg should be increased when the binary interface or
|
|
sonames (major number of the library version) of any installed shared libraries
|
|
change. This is needed so that binary packages made using it will require the
|
|
correct package dependency and not settle for an older one which will not
|
|
contain the necessary shared libraries.
|
|
|
|
See Section 19.1.6, "Handling dependencies" for more information about
|
|
dependencies on other packages, including the BUILDLINK_ABI_DEPENDS and
|
|
ABI_DEPENDS definitions.
|
|
|
|
Please take careful consideration before adjusting BUILDLINK_API_DEPENDS.pkg or
|
|
BUILDLINK_ABI_DEPENDS.pkg as we don't want to cause unneeded package deletions
|
|
and rebuilds. In many cases, new versions of packages work just fine with older
|
|
dependencies.
|
|
|
|
Also it is not needed to set BUILDLINK_ABI_DEPENDS.pkg when it is identical to
|
|
BUILDLINK_API_DEPENDS.pkg.
|
|
|
|
14.3. Writing builtin.mk files
|
|
|
|
Some packages in pkgsrc install headers and libraries that coincide with
|
|
headers and libraries present in the base system. Aside from a buildlink3.mk
|
|
file, these packages should also include a builtin.mk file that includes the
|
|
necessary checks to decide whether using the built-in software or the pkgsrc
|
|
software is appropriate.
|
|
|
|
The only requirements of a builtin.mk file for pkg are:
|
|
|
|
1. It should set USE_BUILTIN.pkg to either "yes" or "no" after it is included.
|
|
|
|
2. It should not override any USE_BUILTIN.pkg which is already set before the
|
|
builtin.mk file is included.
|
|
|
|
3. It should be written to allow multiple inclusion. This is very important
|
|
and takes careful attention to Makefile coding.
|
|
|
|
14.3.1. Anatomy of a builtin.mk file
|
|
|
|
The following is the recommended template for builtin.mk files:
|
|
|
|
.if !defined(IS_BUILTIN.foo)
|
|
#
|
|
# IS_BUILTIN.foo is set to "yes" or "no" depending on whether "foo"
|
|
# genuinely exists in the system or not.
|
|
#
|
|
IS_BUILTIN.foo?= no
|
|
|
|
# BUILTIN_PKG.foo should be set here if "foo" is built-in and its package
|
|
# version can be determined.
|
|
#
|
|
. if !empty(IS_BUILTIN.foo:M[yY][eE][sS])
|
|
BUILTIN_PKG.foo?= foo-1.0
|
|
. endif
|
|
.endif # IS_BUILTIN.foo
|
|
|
|
.if !defined(USE_BUILTIN.foo)
|
|
USE_BUILTIN.foo?= ${IS_BUILTIN.foo}
|
|
. if defined(BUILTIN_PKG.foo)
|
|
. for _depend_ in ${BUILDLINK_API_DEPENDS.foo}
|
|
. if !empty(USE_BUILTIN.foo:M[yY][eE][sS])
|
|
USE_BUILTIN.foo!= \
|
|
${PKG_ADMIN} pmatch '${_depend_}' ${BUILTIN_PKG.foo} \
|
|
&& ${ECHO} "yes" || ${ECHO} "no"
|
|
. endif
|
|
. endfor
|
|
. endif
|
|
.endif # USE_BUILTIN.foo
|
|
|
|
CHECK_BUILTIN.foo?= no
|
|
.if !empty(CHECK_BUILTIN.foo:M[nN][oO])
|
|
#
|
|
# Here we place code that depends on whether USE_BUILTIN.foo is set to
|
|
# "yes" or "no".
|
|
#
|
|
.endif # CHECK_BUILTIN.foo
|
|
|
|
The first section sets IS_BUILTIN.pkg depending on if pkg really exists in the
|
|
base system. This should not be a base system software with similar
|
|
functionality to pkg; it should only be "yes" if the actual package is included
|
|
as part of the base system. This variable is only used internally within the
|
|
builtin.mk file.
|
|
|
|
The second section sets BUILTIN_PKG.pkg to the version of pkg in the base
|
|
system if it exists (if IS_BUILTIN.pkg is "yes"). This variable is only used
|
|
internally within the builtin.mk file.
|
|
|
|
The third section sets USE_BUILTIN.pkg and is required in all builtin.mk files.
|
|
The code in this section must make the determination whether the built-in
|
|
software is adequate to satisfy the dependencies listed in
|
|
BUILDLINK_API_DEPENDS.pkg. This is typically done by comparing BUILTIN_PKG.pkg
|
|
against each of the dependencies in BUILDLINK_API_DEPENDS.pkg. USE_BUILTIN.pkg
|
|
must be set to the correct value by the end of the builtin.mk file. Note that
|
|
USE_BUILTIN.pkg may be "yes" even if IS_BUILTIN.pkg is "no" because we may make
|
|
the determination that the built-in version of the software is similar enough
|
|
to be used as a replacement.
|
|
|
|
The last section is guarded by CHECK_BUILTIN.pkg, and includes code that uses
|
|
the value of USE_BUILTIN.pkg set in the previous section. This typically
|
|
includes, e.g., adding additional dependency restrictions and listing
|
|
additional files to symlink into ${BUILDLINK_DIR} (via BUILDLINK_FILES.pkg).
|
|
|
|
14.3.2. Global preferences for native or pkgsrc software
|
|
|
|
When building packages, it's possible to choose whether to set a global
|
|
preference for using either the built-in (native) version or the pkgsrc version
|
|
of software to satisfy a dependency. This is controlled by setting
|
|
PREFER_PKGSRC and PREFER_NATIVE. These variables take values of either "yes",
|
|
"no", or a list of packages. PREFER_PKGSRC tells pkgsrc to use the pkgsrc
|
|
versions of software, while PREFER_NATIVE tells pkgsrc to use the built-in
|
|
versions. Preferences are determined by the most specific instance of the
|
|
package in either PREFER_PKGSRC or PREFER_NATIVE. If a package is specified in
|
|
neither or in both variables, then PREFER_PKGSRC has precedence over
|
|
PREFER_NATIVE. For example, to require using pkgsrc versions of software for
|
|
all but the most basic bits on a NetBSD system, you can set:
|
|
|
|
PREFER_PKGSRC= yes
|
|
PREFER_NATIVE= getopt skey tcp_wrappers
|
|
|
|
A package must have a builtin.mk file to be listed in PREFER_NATIVE, otherwise
|
|
it is simply ignored in that list.
|
|
|
|
Chapter 15. The pkginstall framework
|
|
|
|
Table of Contents
|
|
|
|
15.1. Files and directories outside the installation prefix
|
|
|
|
15.1.1. Directory manipulation
|
|
15.1.2. File manipulation
|
|
|
|
15.2. Configuration files
|
|
|
|
15.2.1. How PKG_SYSCONFDIR is set
|
|
15.2.2. Telling the software where configuration files are
|
|
15.2.3. Patching installations
|
|
15.2.4. Disabling handling of configuration files
|
|
|
|
15.3. System startup scripts
|
|
|
|
15.3.1. Disabling handling of system startup scripts
|
|
|
|
15.4. System users and groups
|
|
15.5. System shells
|
|
|
|
15.5.1. Disabling shell registration
|
|
|
|
15.6. Fonts
|
|
|
|
15.6.1. Disabling automatic update of the fonts databases
|
|
|
|
This chapter describes the framework known as pkginstall, whose key features
|
|
are:
|
|
|
|
* Generic installation and manipulation of directories and files outside the
|
|
pkgsrc-handled tree, LOCALBASE.
|
|
|
|
* Automatic handling of configuration files during installation, provided
|
|
that packages are correctly designed.
|
|
|
|
* Generation and installation of system startup scripts.
|
|
|
|
* Registration of system users and groups.
|
|
|
|
* Registration of system shells.
|
|
|
|
* Automatic updating of fonts databases.
|
|
|
|
The following sections inspect each of the above points in detail.
|
|
|
|
You may be thinking that many of the things described here could be easily done
|
|
with simple code in the package's post-installation target (post-install). This
|
|
is incorrect, as the code in them is only executed when building from source.
|
|
Machines using binary packages could not benefit from it at all (as the code
|
|
itself could be unavailable). Therefore, the only way to achieve any of the
|
|
items described above is by means of the installation scripts, which are
|
|
automatically generated by pkginstall.
|
|
|
|
15.1. Files and directories outside the installation prefix
|
|
|
|
As you already know, the PLIST file holds a list of files and directories that
|
|
belong to a package. The names used in it are relative to the installation
|
|
prefix (${PREFIX}), which means that it cannot register files outside this
|
|
directory (absolute path names are not allowed). Despite this restriction, some
|
|
packages need to install files outside this location; e.g., under ${VARBASE} or
|
|
${PKG_SYSCONFDIR}. The only way to achieve this is to create such files during
|
|
installation time by using installation scripts.
|
|
|
|
The generic installation scripts are shell scripts that can contain arbitrary
|
|
code. The list of scripts to execute is taken from the INSTALL_FILE variable,
|
|
which defaults to INSTALL. A similar variable exists for package removal
|
|
(DEINSTALL_FILE, whose default is DEINSTALL). These scripts can run arbitrary
|
|
commands, so they have the potential to create and manage files anywhere in the
|
|
file system.
|
|
|
|
Using these general installation files is not recommended, but may be needed in
|
|
some special cases. One reason for avoiding them is that the user has to trust
|
|
the packager that there is no unwanted or simply erroneous code included in the
|
|
installation script. Also, previously there were many similar scripts for the
|
|
same functionality, and fixing a common error involved finding and changing all
|
|
of them.
|
|
|
|
The pkginstall framework offers another, standardized way. It provides generic
|
|
scripts to abstract the manipulation of such files and directories based on
|
|
variables set in the package's Makefile. The rest of this section describes
|
|
these variables.
|
|
|
|
15.1.1. Directory manipulation
|
|
|
|
The following variables can be set to request the creation of directories
|
|
anywhere in the file system:
|
|
|
|
* MAKE_DIRS and OWN_DIRS contain a list of directories that should be created
|
|
and should attempt to be destroyed by the installation scripts. The
|
|
difference between the two is that the latter prompts the administrator to
|
|
remove any directories that may be left after deinstallation (because they
|
|
were not empty), while the former does not.
|
|
|
|
* MAKE_DIRS_PERMS and OWN_DIRS_PERMS contain a list of tuples describing
|
|
which directories should be created and should attempt to be destroyed by
|
|
the installation scripts. Each tuple holds the following values, separated
|
|
by spaces: the directory name, its owner, its group and its numerical mode.
|
|
For example:
|
|
|
|
MAKE_DIRS_PERMS+= ${VARBASE}/foo/private ${ROOT_USER} ${ROOT_GROUP} 0700
|
|
|
|
The difference between the two is exactly the same as their non-PERMS
|
|
counterparts.
|
|
|
|
15.1.2. File manipulation
|
|
|
|
Creating non-empty files outside the installation prefix is tricky because the
|
|
PLIST forces all files to be inside it. To overcome this problem, the only
|
|
solution is to extract the file in the known place (i.e., inside the
|
|
installation prefix) and copy it to the appropriate location during
|
|
installation (done by the installation scripts generated by pkginstall). We
|
|
will call the former the master file in the following paragraphs, which
|
|
describe the variables that can be used to automatically and consistently
|
|
handle files outside the installation prefix:
|
|
|
|
* CONF_FILES and SUPPORT_FILES are pairs of master and target files. During
|
|
installation time, the master file is copied to the target one if and only
|
|
if the latter does not exist. Upon deinstallation, the target file is
|
|
removed provided that it was not modified by the installation.
|
|
|
|
The difference between the two is that the latter prompts the administrator
|
|
to remove any files that may be left after deinstallation (because they
|
|
were not empty), while the former does not.
|
|
|
|
* CONF_FILES_PERMS and SUPPORT_FILES_PERMS contain tuples describing master
|
|
files as well as their target locations. For each of them, it also
|
|
specifies their owner, their group and their numeric permissions, in this
|
|
order. For example:
|
|
|
|
SUPPORT_FILES_PERMS+= ${PREFIX}/share/somefile ${VARBASE}/somefile ${ROOT_USER} ${ROOT_GROUP} 0700
|
|
|
|
The difference between the two is exactly the same as their non-PERMS
|
|
counterparts.
|
|
|
|
15.2. Configuration files
|
|
|
|
Configuration files are special in the sense that they are installed in their
|
|
own specific directory, PKG_SYSCONFDIR, and need special treatment during
|
|
installation (most of which is automated by pkginstall). The main concept you
|
|
must bear in mind is that files marked as configuration files are automatically
|
|
copied to the right place (somewhere inside PKG_SYSCONFDIR) during installation
|
|
if and only if they didn't exist before. Similarly, they will not be removed if
|
|
they have local modifications. This ensures that administrators never lose any
|
|
custom changes they may have made.
|
|
|
|
15.2.1. How PKG_SYSCONFDIR is set
|
|
|
|
As said before, the PKG_SYSCONFDIR variable specifies where configuration files
|
|
shall be installed. Its contents are set based upon the following variables:
|
|
|
|
* PKG_SYSCONFBASE: The configuration's root directory. Defaults to ${PREFIX}/
|
|
etc although it may be overridden by the user to point to his preferred
|
|
location (e.g., /etc, /etc/pkg, etc.). Packages must not use it directly.
|
|
|
|
* PKG_SYSCONFSUBDIR: A subdirectory of PKG_SYSCONFBASE under which the
|
|
configuration files for the package being built shall be installed. The
|
|
definition of this variable only makes sense in the package's Makefile
|
|
(i.e., it is not user-customizable).
|
|
|
|
As an example, consider the Apache package, www/apache2, which places its
|
|
configuration files under the httpd/ subdirectory of PKG_SYSCONFBASE. This
|
|
should be set in the package Makefile.
|
|
|
|
* PKG_SYSCONFVAR: Specifies the name of the variable that holds this
|
|
package's configuration directory (if different from PKG_SYSCONFBASE). It
|
|
defaults to PKGBASE's value, and is always prefixed with PKG_SYSCONFDIR.
|
|
|
|
* PKG_SYSCONFDIR.${PKG_SYSCONFVAR}: Holds the directory where the
|
|
configuration files for the package identified by PKG_SYSCONFVAR's shall be
|
|
placed.
|
|
|
|
Based on the above variables, pkginstall determines the value of
|
|
PKG_SYSCONFDIR, which is the only variable that can be used within a package to
|
|
refer to its configuration directory. The algorithm used to set its value is
|
|
basically the following:
|
|
|
|
1. If PKG_SYSCONFDIR.${PKG_SYSCONFVAR} is set, its value is used.
|
|
|
|
2. If the previous variable is not defined but PKG_SYSCONFSUBDIR is set in the
|
|
package's Makefile, the resulting value is ${PKG_SYSCONFBASE}/$
|
|
{PKG_SYSCONFSUBDIR}.
|
|
|
|
3. Otherwise, it is set to ${PKG_SYSCONFBASE}.
|
|
|
|
It is worth mentioning that ${PKG_SYSCONFDIR} is automatically added to
|
|
OWN_DIRS. See Section 15.1.1, "Directory manipulation" what this means.
|
|
|
|
15.2.2. Telling the software where configuration files are
|
|
|
|
Given that pkgsrc (and users!) expect configuration files to be in a known
|
|
place, you need to teach each package where it shall install its files. In some
|
|
cases you will have to patch the package Makefiles to achieve it. If you are
|
|
lucky, though, it may be as easy as passing an extra flag to the configuration
|
|
script; this is the case of GNU Autoconf- generated files:
|
|
|
|
CONFIGURE_ARGS+= --sysconfdir=${PKG_SYSCONFDIR}
|
|
|
|
Note that this specifies where the package has to look for its configuration
|
|
files, not where they will be originally installed (although the difference is
|
|
never explicit, unfortunately).
|
|
|
|
15.2.3. Patching installations
|
|
|
|
As said before, pkginstall automatically handles configuration files. This
|
|
means that the packages themselves must not touch the contents of $
|
|
{PKG_SYSCONFDIR} directly. Bad news is that many software installation scripts
|
|
will, out of the box, mess with the contents of that directory. So what is the
|
|
correct procedure to fix this issue?
|
|
|
|
You must teach the package (usually by manually patching it) to install any
|
|
configuration files under the examples hierarchy, share/examples/${PKGBASE}/.
|
|
This way, the PLIST registers them and the administrator always has the
|
|
original copies available.
|
|
|
|
Once the required configuration files are in place (i.e., under the examples
|
|
hierarchy), the pkginstall framework can use them as master copies during the
|
|
package installation to update what is in ${PKG_SYSCONFDIR}. To achieve this,
|
|
the variables CONF_FILES and CONF_FILES_PERMS are used. Check out
|
|
Section 15.1.2, "File manipulation" for information about their syntax and
|
|
their purpose. Here is an example, taken from the mail/mutt package:
|
|
|
|
EGDIR= ${PREFIX}/share/doc/mutt/samples
|
|
CONF_FILES= ${EGDIR}/Muttrc ${PKG_SYSCONFDIR}/Muttrc
|
|
|
|
Note that the EGDIR variable is specific to that package and has no meaning
|
|
outside it.
|
|
|
|
15.2.4. Disabling handling of configuration files
|
|
|
|
The automatic copying of config files can be toggled by setting the environment
|
|
variable PKG_CONFIG prior to package installation.
|
|
|
|
15.3. System startup scripts
|
|
|
|
System startup scripts are special files because they must be installed in a
|
|
place known by the underlying OS, usually outside the installation prefix.
|
|
Therefore, the same rules described in Section 15.1, "Files and directories
|
|
outside the installation prefix" apply, and the same solutions can be used.
|
|
However, pkginstall provides a special mechanism to handle these files.
|
|
|
|
In order to provide system startup scripts, the package has to:
|
|
|
|
1. Store the script inside ${FILESDIR}, with the .sh suffix appended.
|
|
Considering the print/cups package as an example, it has a cupsd.sh in its
|
|
files directory.
|
|
|
|
2. Tell pkginstall to handle it, appending the name of the script, without its
|
|
extension, to the RCD_SCRIPTS variable. Continuing the previous example:
|
|
|
|
RCD_SCRIPTS+= cupsd
|
|
|
|
Once this is done, pkginstall will do the following steps for each script in an
|
|
automated fashion:
|
|
|
|
1. Process the file found in the files directory applying all the
|
|
substitutions described in the FILES_SUBST variable.
|
|
|
|
2. Copy the script from the files directory to the examples hierarchy, $
|
|
{PREFIX}/share/examples/rc.d/. Note that this master file must be
|
|
explicitly registered in the PLIST.
|
|
|
|
3. Add code to the installation scripts to copy the startup script from the
|
|
examples hierarchy into the system-wide startup scripts directory.
|
|
|
|
15.3.1. Disabling handling of system startup scripts
|
|
|
|
The automatic copying of config files can be toggled by setting the environment
|
|
variable PKG_RCD_SCRIPTS prior to package installation. Note that the scripts
|
|
will be always copied inside the examples hierarchy, ${PREFIX}/share/examples/
|
|
rc.d/, no matter what the value of this variable is.
|
|
|
|
15.4. System users and groups
|
|
|
|
If a package needs to create special users and/or groups during installation,
|
|
it can do so by using the pkginstall framework.
|
|
|
|
Users can be created by adding entries to the PKG_USERS variable. Each entry
|
|
has the following syntax:
|
|
|
|
user:group
|
|
|
|
Further specification of user details may be done by setting per-user
|
|
variables. PKG_UID.user is the numeric UID for the user. PKG_GECOS.user is the
|
|
user's description or comment. PKG_HOME.user is the user's home directory, and
|
|
defaults to /nonexistent if not specified. PKG_SHELL.user is the user's shell,
|
|
and defaults to /sbin/nologin if not specified.
|
|
|
|
Similarly, groups can be created by adding entries to the PKG_GROUPS variable,
|
|
whose syntax is:
|
|
|
|
group
|
|
|
|
The numeric GID of the group may be set by defining PKG_GID.group.
|
|
|
|
If a package needs to create the users and groups at an earlier stage, then it
|
|
can set USERGROUP_PHASE to either configure or build to indicate the phase
|
|
before which the users and groups are created. In this case, the numeric UIDs
|
|
and GIDs of the created users and groups are automatically hardcoded into the
|
|
final installation scripts.
|
|
|
|
15.5. System shells
|
|
|
|
Packages that install system shells should register them in the shell database,
|
|
/etc/shells, to make things easier to the administrator. This must be done from
|
|
the installation scripts to keep binary packages working on any system.
|
|
pkginstall provides an easy way to accomplish this task.
|
|
|
|
When a package provides a shell interpreter, it has to set the PKG_SHELL
|
|
variable to its absolute file name. This will add some hooks to the
|
|
installation scripts to handle it. Consider the following example, taken from
|
|
shells/zsh:
|
|
|
|
PKG_SHELL= ${PREFIX}/bin/zsh
|
|
|
|
15.5.1. Disabling shell registration
|
|
|
|
The automatic registration of shell interpreters can be disabled by the
|
|
administrator by setting the PKG_REGISTER_SHELLS environment variable to NO.
|
|
|
|
15.6. Fonts
|
|
|
|
Packages that install X11 fonts should update the database files that index the
|
|
fonts within each fonts directory. This can easily be accomplished within the
|
|
pkginstall framework.
|
|
|
|
When a package installs X11 fonts, it must list the directories in which fonts
|
|
are installed in the FONTS_DIRS.type variables, where type can be one of "ttf",
|
|
"type1" or "x11". This will add hooks to the installation scripts to run the
|
|
appropriate commands to update the fonts database files within each of those
|
|
directories. For convenience, if the directory path is relative, it is taken to
|
|
be relative to the package's installation prefix. Consider the following
|
|
example, taken from fonts/dbz-ttf:
|
|
|
|
FONTS_DIRS.ttf= ${PREFIX}/lib/X11/fonts/TTF
|
|
|
|
15.6.1. Disabling automatic update of the fonts databases
|
|
|
|
The automatic update of fonts databases can be disabled by the administrator by
|
|
setting the PKG_UPDATE_FONTS_DB environment variable to NO.
|
|
|
|
Chapter 16. Options handling
|
|
|
|
Table of Contents
|
|
|
|
16.1. Global default options
|
|
16.2. Converting packages to use bsd.options.mk
|
|
16.3. Option Names
|
|
16.4. Determining the options of dependencies
|
|
|
|
Many packages have the ability to be built to support different sets of
|
|
features. bsd.options.mk is a framework in pkgsrc that provides generic
|
|
handling of those options that determine different ways in which the packages
|
|
can be built. It's possible for the user to specify exactly which sets of
|
|
options will be built into a package or to allow a set of global default
|
|
options apply.
|
|
|
|
There are two broad classes of behaviors that one might want to control via
|
|
options. One is whether some particular feature is enabled in a program that
|
|
will be built anyway, often by including or not including a dependency on some
|
|
other package. The other is whether or not an additional program will be built
|
|
as part of the package. Generally, it is better to make a split package for
|
|
such additional programs instead of using options, because it enables binary
|
|
packages to be built which can then be added separately. For example, the foo
|
|
package might have minimal dependencies (those packages without which foo
|
|
doesn't make sense), and then the foo-gfoo package might include the GTK
|
|
frontend program gfoo. This is better than including a gtk option to foo that
|
|
adds gfoo, because either that option is default, in which case binary users
|
|
can't get foo without gfoo, or not default, in which case they can't get gfoo.
|
|
With split packages, they can install foo without having GTK, and later decide
|
|
to install gfoo (pulling in GTK at that time). This is an advantage to source
|
|
users too, avoiding the need for rebuilds.
|
|
|
|
Plugins with widely varying dependencies should usually be split instead of
|
|
options.
|
|
|
|
It is often more work to maintain split packages, especially if the upstream
|
|
package does not support this. The decision of split vs. option should be made
|
|
based on the likelihood that users will want or object to the various pieces,
|
|
the size of the dependencies that are included, and the amount of work.
|
|
|
|
A further consideration is licensing. Non-free parts, or parts that depend on
|
|
non-free dependencies (especially plugins) should almost always be split if
|
|
feasible.
|
|
|
|
16.1. Global default options
|
|
|
|
Global default options are listed in PKG_DEFAULT_OPTIONS, which is a list of
|
|
the options that should be built into every package if that option is
|
|
supported. This variable should be set in mk.conf.
|
|
|
|
16.2. Converting packages to use bsd.options.mk
|
|
|
|
The following example shows how bsd.options.mk should be used by the
|
|
hypothetical ``wibble'' package, either in the package Makefile, or in a file,
|
|
e.g. options.mk, that is included by the main package Makefile.
|
|
|
|
PKG_OPTIONS_VAR= PKG_OPTIONS.wibble
|
|
PKG_SUPPORTED_OPTIONS= wibble-foo ldap
|
|
PKG_OPTIONS_OPTIONAL_GROUPS= database
|
|
PKG_OPTIONS_GROUP.database= mysql pgsql
|
|
PKG_SUGGESTED_OPTIONS= wibble-foo
|
|
PKG_OPTIONS_LEGACY_VARS+= WIBBLE_USE_OPENLDAP:ldap
|
|
PKG_OPTIONS_LEGACY_OPTS+= foo:wibble-foo
|
|
|
|
.include "../../mk/bsd.prefs.mk"
|
|
|
|
# this package was previously named wibble2
|
|
.if defined(PKG_OPTIONS.wibble2)
|
|
PKG_LEGACY_OPTIONS+= ${PKG_OPTIONS.wibble2}
|
|
PKG_OPTIONS_DEPRECATED_WARNINGS+= \
|
|
"Deprecated variable PKG_OPTIONS.wibble2 used, use ${PKG_OPTIONS_VAR} instead."
|
|
.endif
|
|
|
|
.include "../../mk/bsd.options.mk"
|
|
|
|
# Package-specific option-handling
|
|
|
|
###
|
|
### FOO support
|
|
###
|
|
.if !empty(PKG_OPTIONS:Mwibble-foo)
|
|
CONFIGURE_ARGS+= --enable-foo
|
|
.endif
|
|
|
|
###
|
|
### LDAP support
|
|
###
|
|
.if !empty(PKG_OPTIONS:Mldap)
|
|
. include "../../databases/openldap-client/buildlink3.mk"
|
|
CONFIGURE_ARGS+= --enable-ldap=${BUILDLINK_PREFIX.openldap-client}
|
|
.endif
|
|
|
|
###
|
|
### database support
|
|
###
|
|
.if !empty(PKG_OPTIONS:Mmysql)
|
|
. include "../../mk/mysql.buildlink3.mk"
|
|
.endif
|
|
.if !empty(PKG_OPTIONS:Mpgsql)
|
|
. include "../../mk/pgsql.buildlink3.mk"
|
|
.endif
|
|
|
|
The first section contains the information about which build options are
|
|
supported by the package, and any default options settings if needed.
|
|
|
|
1. PKG_OPTIONS_VAR is the name of the make(1) variable that the user can set
|
|
to override the default options. It should be set to PKG_OPTIONS.pkgbase.
|
|
Do not set it to PKG_OPTIONS.${PKGBASE}, since PKGBASE is not defined at
|
|
the point where the options are processed.
|
|
|
|
2. PKG_SUPPORTED_OPTIONS is a list of build options supported by the package.
|
|
|
|
3. PKG_OPTIONS_OPTIONAL_GROUPS is a list of names of groups of mutually
|
|
exclusive options. The options in each group are listed in
|
|
PKG_OPTIONS_GROUP.groupname. The most specific setting of any option from
|
|
the group takes precedence over all other options in the group. Options
|
|
from the groups will be automatically added to PKG_SUPPORTED_OPTIONS.
|
|
|
|
4. PKG_OPTIONS_REQUIRED_GROUPS is like PKG_OPTIONS_OPTIONAL_GROUPS, but
|
|
building the packages will fail if no option from the group is selected.
|
|
|
|
5. PKG_OPTIONS_NONEMPTY_SETS is a list of names of sets of options. At least
|
|
one option from each set must be selected. The options in each set are
|
|
listed in PKG_OPTIONS_SET.setname. Options from the sets will be
|
|
automatically added to PKG_SUPPORTED_OPTIONS. Building the package will
|
|
fail if no option from the set is selected.
|
|
|
|
6. PKG_SUGGESTED_OPTIONS is a list of build options which are enabled by
|
|
default.
|
|
|
|
7. PKG_OPTIONS_LEGACY_VARS is a list of "USE_VARIABLE:option" pairs that map
|
|
legacy mk.conf variables to their option counterparts. Pairs should be
|
|
added with "+=" to keep the listing of global legacy variables. A warning
|
|
will be issued if the user uses a legacy variable.
|
|
|
|
8. PKG_OPTIONS_LEGACY_OPTS is a list of "old-option:new-option" pairs that map
|
|
options that have been renamed to their new counterparts. Pairs should be
|
|
added with "+=" to keep the listing of global legacy options. A warning
|
|
will be issued if the user uses a legacy option.
|
|
|
|
9. PKG_LEGACY_OPTIONS is a list of options implied by deprecated variables
|
|
used. This can be used for cases that neither PKG_OPTIONS_LEGACY_VARS nor
|
|
PKG_OPTIONS_LEGACY_OPTS can handle, e. g. when PKG_OPTIONS_VAR is renamed.
|
|
|
|
10. PKG_OPTIONS_DEPRECATED_WARNINGS is a list of warnings about deprecated
|
|
variables or options used, and what to use instead.
|
|
|
|
A package should never modify PKG_DEFAULT_OPTIONS or the variable named in
|
|
PKG_OPTIONS_VAR. These are strictly user-settable. To suggest a default set of
|
|
options, use PKG_SUGGESTED_OPTIONS.
|
|
|
|
PKG_OPTIONS_VAR must be defined before including bsd.options.mk. If none of
|
|
PKG_SUPPORTED_OPTIONS, PKG_OPTIONS_OPTIONAL_GROUPS, and
|
|
PKG_OPTIONS_REQUIRED_GROUPS are defined (as can happen with platform-specific
|
|
options if none of them is supported on the current platform), PKG_OPTIONS is
|
|
set to the empty list and the package is otherwise treated as not using the
|
|
options framework.
|
|
|
|
After the inclusion of bsd.options.mk, the variable PKG_OPTIONS contains the
|
|
list of selected build options, properly filtered to remove unsupported and
|
|
duplicate options.
|
|
|
|
The remaining sections contain the logic that is specific to each option. The
|
|
correct way to check for an option is to check whether it is listed in
|
|
PKG_OPTIONS:
|
|
|
|
.if !empty(PKG_OPTIONS:Moption)
|
|
|
|
16.3. Option Names
|
|
|
|
Options that enable similar features in different packages (like optional
|
|
support for a library) should use a common name in all packages that support it
|
|
(like the name of the library). If another package already has an option with
|
|
the same meaning, use the same name.
|
|
|
|
Options that enable features specific to one package, where it's unlikely that
|
|
another (unrelated) package has the same (or a similar) optional feature,
|
|
should use a name prefixed with pkgname-.
|
|
|
|
If a group of related packages share an optional feature specific to that
|
|
group, prefix it with the name of the "main" package (e. g.
|
|
djbware-errno-hack).
|
|
|
|
For new options, add a line to mk/defaults/options.description. Lines have two
|
|
fields, separated by tab. The first field is the option name, the second its
|
|
description. The description should be a whole sentence (starting with an
|
|
uppercase letter and ending with a period) that describes what enabling the
|
|
option does. E. g. "Enable ispell support." The file is sorted by option names.
|
|
|
|
16.4. Determining the options of dependencies
|
|
|
|
When writing buildlink3.mk files, it is often necessary to list different
|
|
dependencies based on the options with which the package was built. For
|
|
querying these options, the file pkgsrc/mk/pkg-build-options.mk should be used.
|
|
A typical example looks like this:
|
|
|
|
pkgbase := libpurple
|
|
.include "../../mk/pkg-build-options.mk"
|
|
|
|
.if !empty(PKG_BUILD_OPTIONS.libpurple:Mdbus)
|
|
...
|
|
.endif
|
|
|
|
Including pkg-build-options.mk here will set the variable
|
|
PKG_BUILD_OPTIONS.libpurple to the build options of the libpurple package,
|
|
which can then be queried like PKG_OPTIONS in the options.mk file. See the file
|
|
pkg-build-options.mk for more details.
|
|
|
|
Chapter 17. The build process
|
|
|
|
Table of Contents
|
|
|
|
17.1. Introduction
|
|
17.2. Program location
|
|
17.3. Directories used during the build process
|
|
17.4. Running a phase
|
|
17.5. The fetch phase
|
|
|
|
17.5.1. What to fetch and where to get it from
|
|
17.5.2. How are the files fetched?
|
|
|
|
17.6. The checksum phase
|
|
17.7. The extract phase
|
|
17.8. The patch phase
|
|
17.9. The tools phase
|
|
17.10. The wrapper phase
|
|
17.11. The configure phase
|
|
17.12. The build phase
|
|
17.13. The test phase
|
|
17.14. The install phase
|
|
17.15. The package phase
|
|
17.16. Cleaning up
|
|
17.17. Other helpful targets
|
|
|
|
17.1. Introduction
|
|
|
|
This chapter gives a detailed description on how a package is built. Building a
|
|
package is separated into different phases (for example fetch, build, install),
|
|
all of which are described in the following sections. Each phase is splitted
|
|
into so-called stages, which take the name of the containing phase, prefixed by
|
|
one of pre-, do- or post-. (Examples are pre-configure, post-build.) Most of
|
|
the actual work is done in the do-* stages.
|
|
|
|
Never override the regular targets (like fetch), if you have to, override the
|
|
do-* ones instead.
|
|
|
|
The basic steps for building a program are always the same. First the program's
|
|
source (distfile) must be brought to the local system and then extracted. After
|
|
any pkgsrc-specific patches to compile properly are applied, the software can
|
|
be configured, then built (usually by compiling), and finally the generated
|
|
binaries, etc. can be put into place on the system.
|
|
|
|
To get more details about what is happening at each step, you can set the
|
|
PKG_VERBOSE variable, or the PATCH_DEBUG variable if you are just interested in
|
|
more details about the patch step.
|
|
|
|
17.2. Program location
|
|
|
|
Before outlining the process performed by the NetBSD package system in the next
|
|
section, here's a brief discussion on where programs are installed, and which
|
|
variables influence this.
|
|
|
|
The automatic variable PREFIX indicates where all files of the final program
|
|
shall be installed. It is usually set to LOCALBASE (/usr/pkg), or CROSSBASE for
|
|
pkgs in the cross category. The value of PREFIX needs to be put into the
|
|
various places in the program's source where paths to these files are encoded.
|
|
See Section 11.3, "patches/*" and Section 19.3.1, "Shared libraries - libtool"
|
|
for more details.
|
|
|
|
When choosing which of these variables to use, follow the following rules:
|
|
|
|
* PREFIX always points to the location where the current pkg will be
|
|
installed. When referring to a pkg's own installation path, use "${PREFIX}
|
|
".
|
|
|
|
* LOCALBASE is where all non-X11 pkgs are installed. If you need to construct
|
|
a -I or -L argument to the compiler to find includes and libraries
|
|
installed by another non-X11 pkg, use "${LOCALBASE}". The name LOCALBASE
|
|
stems from FreeBSD, which installed all packages in /usr/local. As pkgsrc
|
|
leaves /usr/local for the system administrator, this variable is a
|
|
misnomer.
|
|
|
|
* X11BASE is where the actual X11 distribution (from xsrc, etc.) is
|
|
installed. When looking for standard X11 includes (not those installed by a
|
|
package), use "${X11BASE}".
|
|
|
|
* X11-based packages are special in that they may be installed in either
|
|
X11BASE or LOCALBASE.
|
|
|
|
Usually, X11 packages should be installed under LOCALBASE whenever
|
|
possible. Note that you will need to include ../../mk/x11.buildlink3.mk in
|
|
them to request the presence of X11 and to get the right compilation flags.
|
|
|
|
Even though, there are some packages that cannot be installed under
|
|
LOCALBASE: those that come with app-defaults files. These packages are
|
|
special and they must be placed under X11BASE. To accomplish this, set
|
|
either USE_X11BASE or USE_IMAKE in your package.
|
|
|
|
Some notes: If you need to find includes or libraries installed by a pkg
|
|
that has USE_IMAKE or USE_X11BASE in its pkg Makefile, you need to look in
|
|
both ${X11BASE} and ${LOCALBASE}. To force installation of all X11 packages
|
|
in LOCALBASE, the pkgtools/xpkgwedge package is enabled by default.
|
|
|
|
* X11PREFIX should be used to refer to the installed location of an X11
|
|
package. X11PREFIX will be set to X11BASE if xpkgwedge is not installed,
|
|
and to LOCALBASE if xpkgwedge is installed.
|
|
|
|
* If xpkgwedge is installed, it is possible to have some packages installed
|
|
in X11BASE and some in LOCALBASE. To determine the prefix of an installed
|
|
package, the EVAL_PREFIX definition can be used. It takes pairs in the
|
|
format "DIRNAME=<package>", and the make(1) variable DIRNAME will be set to
|
|
the prefix of the installed package <package>, or "${X11PREFIX}" if the
|
|
package is not installed.
|
|
|
|
This is best illustrated by example.
|
|
|
|
The following lines are taken from pkgsrc/wm/scwm/Makefile:
|
|
|
|
EVAL_PREFIX+= GTKDIR=gtk+
|
|
CONFIGURE_ARGS+= --with-guile-prefix=${LOCALBASE:Q}
|
|
CONFIGURE_ARGS+= --with-gtk-prefix=${GTKDIR:Q}
|
|
CONFIGURE_ARGS+= --enable-multibyte
|
|
|
|
Specific defaults can be defined for the packages evaluated using
|
|
EVAL_PREFIX, by using a definition of the form:
|
|
|
|
GTKDIR_DEFAULT= ${LOCALBASE}
|
|
|
|
where GTKDIR corresponds to the first definition in the EVAL_PREFIX pair.
|
|
|
|
* Within ${PREFIX}, packages should install files according to hier(7), with
|
|
the exception that manual pages go into ${PREFIX}/man, not ${PREFIX}/share/
|
|
man.
|
|
|
|
17.3. Directories used during the build process
|
|
|
|
When building a package, various directories are used to store source files,
|
|
temporary files, pkgsrc-internal files, and so on. These directories are
|
|
explained here.
|
|
|
|
Some of the directory variables contain relative pathnames. There are two
|
|
common base directories for these relative directories: PKGSRCDIR/PKGPATH is
|
|
used for directories that are pkgsrc-specific. WRKSRC is used for directories
|
|
inside the package itself.
|
|
|
|
PKGSRCDIR
|
|
|
|
This is an absolute pathname that points to the pkgsrc root directory.
|
|
Generally, you don't need it.
|
|
|
|
PKGDIR
|
|
|
|
This is an absolute pathname that points to the current package.
|
|
|
|
PKGPATH
|
|
|
|
This is a pathname relative to PKGSRCDIR that points to the current
|
|
package.
|
|
|
|
WRKDIR
|
|
|
|
This is an absolute pathname pointing to the directory where all work takes
|
|
place. The distfiles are extracted to this directory. It also contains
|
|
temporary directories and log files used by the various pkgsrc frameworks,
|
|
like buildlink or the wrappers.
|
|
|
|
WRKSRC
|
|
|
|
This is an absolute pathname pointing to the directory where the distfiles
|
|
are extracted. It is usually a direct subdirectory of WRKDIR, and often
|
|
it's the only directory entry that isn't hidden. This variable may be
|
|
changed by a package Makefile.
|
|
|
|
The CREATE_WRKDIR_SYMLINK definition takes either the value yes or no and
|
|
defaults to yes. It indicates whether a symbolic link to the WRKDIR is to be
|
|
created in the pkgsrc entry's directory. If users would like to have their
|
|
pkgsrc trees behave in a read-only manner, then the value of
|
|
CREATE_WRKDIR_SYMLINK should be set to no.
|
|
|
|
17.4. Running a phase
|
|
|
|
You can run a particular phase by typing make phase, where phase is the name of
|
|
the phase. This will automatically run all phases that are required for this
|
|
phase. The default phase is build, that is, when you run make without
|
|
parameters in a package directory, the package will be built, but not
|
|
installed.
|
|
|
|
17.5. The fetch phase
|
|
|
|
The first step in building a package is to fetch the distribution files
|
|
(distfiles) from the sites that are providing them. This is the task of the
|
|
fetch phase.
|
|
|
|
17.5.1. What to fetch and where to get it from
|
|
|
|
In simple cases, MASTER_SITES defines all URLs from where the distfile, whose
|
|
name is derived from the DISTNAME variable, is fetched. The more complicated
|
|
cases are described below.
|
|
|
|
The variable DISTFILES specifies the list of distfiles that have to be fetched.
|
|
Its value defaults to ${DISTNAME}${EXTRACT_SUFX}, so that most packages don't
|
|
need to define it at all. EXTRACT_SUFX is .tar.gz by default, but can be
|
|
changed freely. Note that if your package requires additional distfiles to the
|
|
default one, you cannot just append the additional filenames using the +=
|
|
operator, but you have write for example:
|
|
|
|
DISTFILES= ${DISTNAME}${EXTRACT_SUFX} additional-files.tar.gz
|
|
|
|
Each distfile is fetched from a list of sites, usually MASTER_SITES. If the
|
|
package has multiple DISTFILES or multiple PATCHFILES from different sites, you
|
|
can set SITES.distfile to the list of URLs where the file distfile (including
|
|
the suffix) can be found.
|
|
|
|
DISTFILES= ${DISTNAME}${EXTRACT_SUFX}
|
|
DISTFILES+= foo-file.tar.gz
|
|
SITES.foo-file.tar.gz= \
|
|
http://www.somewhere.com/somehow/ \
|
|
http://www.somewhereelse.com/mirror/somehow/
|
|
|
|
When actually fetching the distfiles, each item from MASTER_SITES or SITES.*
|
|
gets the name of each distfile appended to it, without an intermediate slash.
|
|
Therefore, all site values have to end with a slash or other separator
|
|
character. This allows for example to set MASTER_SITES to a URL of a CGI script
|
|
that gets the name of the distfile as a parameter. In this case, the definition
|
|
would look like:
|
|
|
|
MASTER_SITES= http://www.example.com/download.cgi?file=
|
|
|
|
There are some predefined values for MASTER_SITES, which can be used in
|
|
packages. The names of the variables should speak for themselves.
|
|
|
|
${MASTER_SITE_APACHE}
|
|
${MASTER_SITE_BACKUP}
|
|
${MASTER_SITE_CYGWIN}
|
|
${MASTER_SITE_DEBIAN}
|
|
${MASTER_SITE_FREEBSD}
|
|
${MASTER_SITE_FREEBSD_LOCAL}
|
|
${MASTER_SITE_GENTOO}
|
|
${MASTER_SITE_GNOME}
|
|
${MASTER_SITE_GNU}
|
|
${MASTER_SITE_GNUSTEP}
|
|
${MASTER_SITE_IFARCHIVE}
|
|
${MASTER_SITE_KDE}
|
|
${MASTER_SITE_MOZILLA}
|
|
${MASTER_SITE_MYSQL}
|
|
${MASTER_SITE_OPENOFFICE}
|
|
${MASTER_SITE_PERL_CPAN}
|
|
${MASTER_SITE_PGSQL}
|
|
${MASTER_SITE_R_CRAN}
|
|
${MASTER_SITE_SOURCEFORGE}
|
|
${MASTER_SITE_SOURCEFORGE_JP}
|
|
${MASTER_SITE_SUNSITE}
|
|
${MASTER_SITE_SUSE}
|
|
${MASTER_SITE_TEX_CTAN}
|
|
${MASTER_SITE_XCONTRIB}
|
|
${MASTER_SITE_XEMACS}
|
|
|
|
Some explanations for the less self-explaining ones: MASTER_SITE_BACKUP
|
|
contains backup sites for packages that are maintained in ftp://ftp.NetBSD.org/
|
|
pub/NetBSD/packages/distfiles/${DIST_SUBDIR}. MASTER_SITE_LOCAL contains local
|
|
package source distributions that are maintained in ftp://ftp.NetBSD.org/pub/
|
|
NetBSD/packages/distfiles/LOCAL_PORTS/.
|
|
|
|
If you choose one of these predefined sites, you may want to specify a
|
|
subdirectory of that site. Since these macros may expand to more than one
|
|
actual site, you must use the following construct to specify a subdirectory:
|
|
|
|
MASTER_SITES= ${MASTER_SITE_GNU:=subdirectory/name/}
|
|
MASTER_SITES= ${MASTER_SITE_SOURCEFORGE:=project_name/}
|
|
|
|
Note the trailing slash after the subdirectory name.
|
|
|
|
17.5.2. How are the files fetched?
|
|
|
|
The fetch phase makes sure that all the distfiles exist in a local directory
|
|
(DISTDIR, which can be set by the pkgsrc user). If the files do not exist, they
|
|
are fetched using commands of the form
|
|
|
|
${FETCH_CMD} ${FETCH_BEFORE_ARGS} ${site}${file} ${FETCH_AFTER_ARGS}
|
|
|
|
where ${site} varies through several possibilities in turn: first,
|
|
MASTER_SITE_OVERRIDE is tried, then the sites specified in either SITES.file if
|
|
defined, else MASTER_SITES or PATCH_SITES, as applies, then finally the value
|
|
of MASTER_SITE_BACKUP. The order of all except the first and the last can be
|
|
optionally sorted by the user, via setting either MASTER_SORT_RANDOM, and
|
|
MASTER_SORT_AWK or MASTER_SORT_REGEX.
|
|
|
|
The distfiles mirror run by the NetBSD Foundation uses the mirror-distfiles
|
|
target to mirror the distfiles, if they are freely distributable. Packages
|
|
setting NO_SRC_ON_FTP (usually to "${RESTRICTED}") will not have their
|
|
distfiles mirrored.
|
|
|
|
17.6. The checksum phase
|
|
|
|
After the distfile(s) are fetched, their checksum is generated and compared
|
|
with the checksums stored in the distinfo file. If the checksums don't match,
|
|
the build is aborted. This is to ensure the same distfile is used for building,
|
|
and that the distfile wasn't changed, e.g. by some malign force, deliberately
|
|
changed distfiles on the master distribution site or network lossage.
|
|
|
|
17.7. The extract phase
|
|
|
|
When the distfiles are present on the local system, they need to be extracted,
|
|
as they usually come in the form of some compressed archive format.
|
|
|
|
By default, all DISTFILES are extracted. If you only need some of them, you can
|
|
set the EXTRACT_ONLY variable to the list of those files.
|
|
|
|
Extracting the files is usually done by a little program, mk/extract/extract,
|
|
which already knows how to extract various archive formats, so most likely you
|
|
will not need to change anything here. But if you need, the following variables
|
|
may help you:
|
|
|
|
EXTRACT_OPTS_{BIN,LHA,PAX,RAR,TAR,ZIP,ZOO}
|
|
|
|
Use these variables to override the default options for an extract command,
|
|
which are defined in mk/extract/extract.
|
|
|
|
EXTRACT_USING
|
|
|
|
This variable can be set to bsdtar, gtar, nbtar (which is the default
|
|
value), pax, or an absolute pathname pointing to the command with which tar
|
|
archives should be extracted. It is preferred to choose bsdtar over gtar if
|
|
NetBSD's pax-as-tar is not good enough.
|
|
|
|
If the extract program doesn't serve your needs, you can also override the
|
|
EXTRACT_CMD variable, which holds the command used for extracting the files.
|
|
This command is executed in the ${WRKSRC} directory. During execution of this
|
|
command, the shell variable extract_file holds the absolute pathname of the
|
|
file that is going to be extracted.
|
|
|
|
And if that still does not suffice, you can override the do-extract target in
|
|
the package Makefile.
|
|
|
|
17.8. The patch phase
|
|
|
|
After extraction, all the patches named by the PATCHFILES, those present in the
|
|
patches subdirectory of the package as well as in $LOCALPATCHES/$PKGPATH (e.g.
|
|
/usr/local/patches/graphics/png) are applied. Patchfiles ending in .Z or .gz
|
|
are uncompressed before they are applied, files ending in .orig or .rej are
|
|
ignored. Any special options to patch(1) can be handed in PATCH_DIST_ARGS. See
|
|
Section 11.3, "patches/*" for more details.
|
|
|
|
By default patch(1) is given special args to make it fail if the patches apply
|
|
with some lines of fuzz. Please fix (regen) the patches so that they apply
|
|
cleanly. The rationale behind this is that patches that don't apply cleanly may
|
|
end up being applied in the wrong place, and cause severe harm there.
|
|
|
|
17.9. The tools phase
|
|
|
|
This is covered in Chapter 18, Tools needed for building or running.
|
|
|
|
17.10. The wrapper phase
|
|
|
|
This phase creates wrapper programs for the compilers and linkers. The
|
|
following variables can be used to tweak the wrappers.
|
|
|
|
ECHO_WRAPPER_MSG
|
|
|
|
The command used to print progress messages. Does nothing by default. Set
|
|
to ${ECHO} to see the progress messages.
|
|
|
|
WRAPPER_DEBUG
|
|
|
|
This variable can be set to yes (default) or no, depending on whether you
|
|
want additional information in the wrapper log file.
|
|
|
|
WRAPPER_UPDATE_CACHE
|
|
|
|
This variable can be set to yes or no, depending on whether the wrapper
|
|
should use its cache, which will improve the speed. The default value is
|
|
yes, but is forced to no if the platform does not support it.
|
|
|
|
WRAPPER_REORDER_CMDS
|
|
|
|
A list of reordering commands. A reordering command has the form reorder:l:
|
|
lib1:lib2. It ensures that that -llib1 occurs before -llib2.
|
|
|
|
WRAPPER_TRANSFORM_CMDS
|
|
|
|
A list of transformation commands. [TODO: investigate further]
|
|
|
|
17.11. The configure phase
|
|
|
|
Most pieces of software need information on the header files, system calls, and
|
|
library routines which are available on the platform they run on. The process
|
|
of determining this information is known as configuration, and is usually
|
|
automated. In most cases, a script is supplied with the distfiles, and its
|
|
invocation results in generation of header files, Makefiles, etc.
|
|
|
|
If the package contains a configure script, this can be invoked by setting
|
|
HAS_CONFIGURE to "yes". If the configure script is a GNU autoconf script, you
|
|
should set GNU_CONFIGURE to "yes" instead. What happens in the configure phase
|
|
is roughly:
|
|
|
|
.for d in ${CONFIGURE_DIRS}
|
|
cd ${WRKSRC} \
|
|
&& cd ${d} \
|
|
&& env ${CONFIGURE_ENV} ${CONFIGURE_SCRIPT} ${CONFIGURE_ARGS}
|
|
.endfor
|
|
|
|
CONFIGURE_DIRS (default: ".") is a list of pathnames relative to WRKSRC. In
|
|
each of these directories, the configure script is run with the environment
|
|
CONFIGURE_ENV and arguments CONFIGURE_ARGS. The variables CONFIGURE_ENV,
|
|
CONFIGURE_SCRIPT (default: "./configure") and CONFIGURE_ARGS may all be changed
|
|
by the package.
|
|
|
|
If the program uses an Imakefile for configuration, the appropriate steps can
|
|
be invoked by setting USE_IMAKE to "yes". (If you only want the package
|
|
installed in ${X11PREFIX} but xmkmf not being run, set USE_X11BASE instead.)
|
|
You can add variables to xmkmf's environment by adding them to the SCRIPTS_ENV
|
|
variable.
|
|
|
|
If the program uses cmake for configuration, the appropriate steps can be
|
|
invoked by setting USE_CMAKE to "yes". You can add variables to cmake's
|
|
environment by adding them to the CONFIGURE_ENV variable and arguments to cmake
|
|
by adding them to the CMAKE_ARGS variable. The top directory argument is given
|
|
by the CMAKE_ARG_PATH variable, that defaults to "." (relative to
|
|
CONFIGURE_DIRS)
|
|
|
|
If there is no configure step at all, set NO_CONFIGURE to "yes".
|
|
|
|
17.12. The build phase
|
|
|
|
For building a package, a rough equivalent of the following code is executed.
|
|
|
|
.for d in ${BUILD_DIRS}
|
|
cd ${WRKSRC} \
|
|
&& cd ${d} \
|
|
&& env ${MAKE_ENV} \
|
|
${MAKE_PROGRAM} ${BUILD_MAKE_FLAGS} \
|
|
-f ${MAKE_FILE} \
|
|
${BUILD_TARGET}
|
|
.endfor
|
|
|
|
BUILD_DIRS (default: ".") is a list of pathnames relative to WRKSRC. In each of
|
|
these directories, MAKE_PROGRAM is run with the environment MAKE_ENV and
|
|
arguments BUILD_MAKE_FLAGS. The variables MAKE_ENV, BUILD_MAKE_FLAGS, MAKE_FILE
|
|
and BUILD_TARGET may all be changed by the package.
|
|
|
|
The default value of MAKE_PROGRAM is "gmake" if USE_TOOLS contains "gmake",
|
|
"make" otherwise. The default value of MAKE_FILE is "Makefile", and
|
|
BUILD_TARGET defaults to "all".
|
|
|
|
If there is no build step at all, set NO_BUILD to "yes".
|
|
|
|
17.13. The test phase
|
|
|
|
[TODO]
|
|
|
|
17.14. The install phase
|
|
|
|
Once the build stage has completed, the final step is to install the software
|
|
in public directories, so users can access the programs and files.
|
|
|
|
In the install phase, a rough equivalent of the following code is executed.
|
|
Additionally, before and after this code, much magic is performed to do
|
|
consistency checks, registering the package, and so on.
|
|
|
|
.for d in ${INSTALL_DIRS}
|
|
cd ${WRKSRC} \
|
|
&& cd ${d} \
|
|
&& env ${MAKE_ENV} \
|
|
${MAKE_PROGRAM} ${INSTALL_MAKE_FLAGS} \
|
|
-f ${MAKE_FILE} \
|
|
${INSTALL_TARGET}
|
|
.endfor
|
|
|
|
The variable's meanings are analogous to the ones in the build phase.
|
|
INSTALL_DIRS defaults to BUILD_DIRS. INSTALL_TARGET is "install" by default,
|
|
plus "install.man" if USE_IMAKE is defined and NO_INSTALL_MANPAGES is not
|
|
defined.
|
|
|
|
In the install phase, the following variables are useful. They are all
|
|
variations of the install(1) command that have the owner, group and permissions
|
|
preset. INSTALL is the plain install command. The specialized variants,
|
|
together with their intended use, are:
|
|
|
|
INSTALL_PROGRAM_DIR
|
|
|
|
directories that contain binaries
|
|
|
|
INSTALL_SCRIPT_DIR
|
|
|
|
directories that contain scripts
|
|
|
|
INSTALL_LIB_DIR
|
|
|
|
directories that contain shared and static libraries
|
|
|
|
INSTALL_DATA_DIR
|
|
|
|
directories that contain data files
|
|
|
|
INSTALL_MAN_DIR
|
|
|
|
directories that contain man pages
|
|
|
|
INSTALL_PROGRAM
|
|
|
|
binaries that can be stripped from debugging symbols
|
|
|
|
INSTALL_SCRIPT
|
|
|
|
binaries that cannot be stripped
|
|
|
|
INSTALL_GAME
|
|
|
|
game binaries
|
|
|
|
INSTALL_LIB
|
|
|
|
shared and static libraries
|
|
|
|
INSTALL_DATA
|
|
|
|
data files
|
|
|
|
INSTALL_GAME_DATA
|
|
|
|
data files for games
|
|
|
|
INSTALL_MAN
|
|
|
|
man pages
|
|
|
|
Some other variables are:
|
|
|
|
INSTALLATION_DIRS
|
|
|
|
A list of directories relative to PREFIX that are created by pkgsrc at the
|
|
beginning of the install phase. The package is supposed to create all
|
|
needed directories itself before installing files to it and list all other
|
|
directories here.
|
|
|
|
In the rare cases that a package shouldn't install anything, set NO_INSTALL to
|
|
"yes". This is mostly relevant for packages in the regress category.
|
|
|
|
17.15. The package phase
|
|
|
|
Once the install stage has completed, a binary package of the installed files
|
|
can be built. These binary packages can be used for quick installation without
|
|
previous compilation, e.g. by the make bin-install or by using pkg_add.
|
|
|
|
By default, the binary packages are created in ${PACKAGES}/All and symlinks are
|
|
created in ${PACKAGES}/category, one for each category in the CATEGORIES
|
|
variable. PACKAGES defaults to pkgsrc/packages.
|
|
|
|
If there should be no binary package, set NO_PACKAGE to "yes". This should only
|
|
be used in rare cases, like when a package definitely is only usable on the
|
|
machine where it is built and even then, a binary package can be useful.
|
|
|
|
17.16. Cleaning up
|
|
|
|
Once you're finished with a package, you can clean the work directory by
|
|
running make clean. If you want to clean the work directories of all
|
|
dependencies too, use make clean-depends.
|
|
|
|
17.17. Other helpful targets
|
|
|
|
pre/post-*
|
|
|
|
For any of the main targets described in the previous section, two
|
|
auxiliary targets exist with "pre-" and "post-" used as a prefix for the
|
|
main target's name. These targets are invoked before and after the main
|
|
target is called, allowing extra configuration or installation steps be
|
|
performed from a package's Makefile, for example, which a program's
|
|
configure script or install target omitted.
|
|
|
|
do-*
|
|
|
|
Should one of the main targets do the wrong thing, and should there be no
|
|
variable to fix this, you can redefine it with the do-* target. (Note that
|
|
redefining the target itself instead of the do-* target is a bad idea, as
|
|
the pre-* and post-* targets won't be called anymore, etc.) You will not
|
|
usually need to do this.
|
|
|
|
reinstall
|
|
|
|
If you did a make install and you noticed some file was not installed
|
|
properly, you can repeat the installation with this target, which will
|
|
ignore the "already installed" flag.
|
|
|
|
This is the default value of DEPENDS_TARGET except in the case of make
|
|
update and make package, where the defaults are "package" and "update",
|
|
respectively.
|
|
|
|
deinstall
|
|
|
|
This target does a pkg_delete(1) in the current directory, effectively
|
|
de-installing the package. The following variables can be used to tune the
|
|
behaviour:
|
|
|
|
PKG_VERBOSE
|
|
|
|
Add a "-v" to the pkg_delete(1) command.
|
|
|
|
DEINSTALLDEPENDS
|
|
|
|
Remove all packages that require (depend on) the given package. This
|
|
can be used to remove any packages that may have been pulled in by a
|
|
given package, e.g. if make deinstall DEINSTALLDEPENDS=1 is done in
|
|
pkgsrc/x11/kde, this is likely to remove whole KDE. Works by adding
|
|
"-R" to the pkg_delete(1) command line.
|
|
|
|
bin-install
|
|
|
|
Install a binary package from local disk and via FTP from a list of sites
|
|
(see the BINPKG_SITES variable), and do a make package if no binary package
|
|
is available anywhere. The arguments given to pkg_add can be set via
|
|
BIN_INSTALL_FLAGS e.g., to do verbose operation, etc.
|
|
|
|
update
|
|
|
|
This target causes the current package to be updated to the latest version.
|
|
The package and all depending packages first get de-installed, then current
|
|
versions of the corresponding packages get compiled and installed. This is
|
|
similar to manually noting which packages are currently installed, then
|
|
performing a series of make deinstall and make install (or whatever
|
|
UPDATE_TARGET is set to) for these packages.
|
|
|
|
You can use the "update" target to resume package updating in case a
|
|
previous make update was interrupted for some reason. However, in this
|
|
case, make sure you don't call make clean or otherwise remove the list of
|
|
dependent packages in WRKDIR. Otherwise, you lose the ability to
|
|
automatically update the current package along with the dependent packages
|
|
you have installed.
|
|
|
|
Resuming an interrupted make update will only work as long as the package
|
|
tree remains unchanged. If the source code for one of the packages to be
|
|
updated has been changed, resuming make update will most certainly fail!
|
|
|
|
The following variables can be used either on the command line or in
|
|
mk.conf to alter the behaviour of make update:
|
|
|
|
UPDATE_TARGET
|
|
|
|
Install target to recursively use for the updated package and the
|
|
dependent packages. Defaults to DEPENDS_TARGET if set, "install"
|
|
otherwise for make update. Other good targets are "package" or
|
|
"bin-install". Do not set this to "update" or you will get stuck in an
|
|
endless loop!
|
|
|
|
NOCLEAN
|
|
|
|
Don't clean up after updating. Useful if you want to leave the work
|
|
sources of the updated packages around for inspection or other
|
|
purposes. Be sure you eventually clean up the source tree (see the
|
|
"clean-update" target below) or you may run into troubles with old
|
|
source code still lying around on your next make or make update.
|
|
|
|
REINSTALL
|
|
|
|
Deinstall each package before installing (making DEPENDS_TARGET). This
|
|
may be necessary if the "clean-update" target (see below) was called
|
|
after interrupting a running make update.
|
|
|
|
DEPENDS_TARGET
|
|
|
|
Allows you to disable recursion and hardcode the target for packages.
|
|
The default is "update" for the update target, facilitating a recursive
|
|
update of prerequisite packages. Only set DEPENDS_TARGET if you want to
|
|
disable recursive updates. Use UPDATE_TARGET instead to just set a
|
|
specific target for each package to be installed during make update
|
|
(see above).
|
|
|
|
clean-update
|
|
|
|
Clean the source tree for all packages that would get updated if make
|
|
update was called from the current directory. This target should not be
|
|
used if the current package (or any of its depending packages) have already
|
|
been de-installed (e.g., after calling make update) or you may lose some
|
|
packages you intended to update. As a rule of thumb: only use this target
|
|
before the first time you run make update and only if you have a dirty
|
|
package tree (e.g., if you used NOCLEAN).
|
|
|
|
If you are unsure about whether your tree is clean, you can either perform
|
|
a make clean at the top of the tree, or use the following sequence of
|
|
commands from the directory of the package you want to update (before
|
|
running make update for the first time, otherwise you lose all the packages
|
|
you wanted to update!):
|
|
|
|
# make clean-update
|
|
# make clean CLEANDEPENDS=YES
|
|
# make update
|
|
|
|
|
|
The following variables can be used either on the command line or in
|
|
mk.conf to alter the behaviour of make clean-update:
|
|
|
|
CLEAR_DIRLIST
|
|
|
|
After make clean, do not reconstruct the list of directories to update
|
|
for this package. Only use this if make update successfully installed
|
|
all packages you wanted to update. Normally, this is done automatically
|
|
on make update, but may have been suppressed by the NOCLEAN variable
|
|
(see above).
|
|
|
|
replace
|
|
|
|
Update the installation of the current package. This differs from update in
|
|
that it does not replace dependent packages. You will need to install
|
|
pkgtools/pkg_tarup for this target to work.
|
|
|
|
Be careful when using this target! There are no guarantees that dependent
|
|
packages will still work, in particular they will most certainly break if
|
|
you make replace a library package whose shared library major version
|
|
changed between your installed version and the new one. For this reason,
|
|
this target is not officially supported and only recommended for advanced
|
|
users.
|
|
|
|
info
|
|
|
|
This target invokes pkg_info(1) for the current package. You can use this
|
|
to check which version of a package is installed.
|
|
|
|
index
|
|
|
|
This is a top-level command, i.e. it should be used in the pkgsrc
|
|
directory. It creates a database of all packages in the local pkgsrc tree,
|
|
including dependencies, comment, maintainer, and some other useful
|
|
information. Individual entries are created by running make describe in the
|
|
packages' directories. This index file is saved as pkgsrc/INDEX. It can be
|
|
displayed in verbose format by running make print-index. You can search in
|
|
it with make search key=something. You can extract a list of all packages
|
|
that depend on a particular one by running make show-deps PKG=somepackage.
|
|
|
|
Running this command takes a very long time, some hours even on fast
|
|
machines!
|
|
|
|
readme
|
|
|
|
This target generates a README.html file, which can be viewed using a
|
|
browser such as www/firefox or www/links. The generated files contain
|
|
references to any packages which are in the PACKAGES directory on the local
|
|
host. The generated files can be made to refer to URLs based on
|
|
FTP_PKG_URL_HOST and FTP_PKG_URL_DIR. For example, if I wanted to generate
|
|
README.html files which pointed to binary packages on the local machine, in
|
|
the directory /usr/packages, set FTP_PKG_URL_HOST=file://localhost and
|
|
FTP_PKG_URL_DIR=/usr/packages. The ${PACKAGES} directory and its
|
|
subdirectories will be searched for all the binary packages.
|
|
|
|
The target can be run at the toplevel or in category directories, in which
|
|
case it descends recursively.
|
|
|
|
readme-all
|
|
|
|
This is a top-level command, run it in pkgsrc. Use this target to create a
|
|
file README-all.html which contains a list of all packages currently
|
|
available in the NetBSD Packages Collection, together with the category
|
|
they belong to and a short description. This file is compiled from the
|
|
pkgsrc/*/README.html files, so be sure to run this after a make readme.
|
|
|
|
cdrom-readme
|
|
|
|
This is very much the same as the "readme" target (see above), but is to be
|
|
used when generating a pkgsrc tree to be written to a CD-ROM. This target
|
|
also produces README.html files, and can be made to refer to URLs based on
|
|
CDROM_PKG_URL_HOST and CDROM_PKG_URL_DIR.
|
|
|
|
show-distfiles
|
|
|
|
This target shows which distfiles and patchfiles are needed to build the
|
|
package (ALLFILES, which contains all DISTFILES and PATCHFILES, but not
|
|
patches/*).
|
|
|
|
show-downlevel
|
|
|
|
This target shows nothing if the package is not installed. If a version of
|
|
this package is installed, but is not the version provided in this version
|
|
of pkgsrc, then a warning message is displayed. This target can be used to
|
|
show which of your installed packages are downlevel, and so the old
|
|
versions can be deleted, and the current ones added.
|
|
|
|
show-pkgsrc-dir
|
|
|
|
This target shows the directory in the pkgsrc hierarchy from which the
|
|
package can be built and installed. This may not be the same directory as
|
|
the one from which the package was installed. This target is intended to be
|
|
used by people who may wish to upgrade many packages on a single host, and
|
|
can be invoked from the top-level pkgsrc Makefile by using the
|
|
"show-host-specific-pkgs" target.
|
|
|
|
show-installed-depends
|
|
|
|
This target shows which installed packages match the current package's
|
|
DEPENDS. Useful if out of date dependencies are causing build problems.
|
|
|
|
check-shlibs
|
|
|
|
After a package is installed, check all its binaries and (on ELF platforms)
|
|
shared libraries to see if they find the shared libs they need. Run by
|
|
default if PKG_DEVELOPER is set in mk.conf.
|
|
|
|
print-PLIST
|
|
|
|
After a "make install" from a new or upgraded pkg, this prints out an
|
|
attempt to generate a new PLIST from a find -newer work/.extract_done. An
|
|
attempt is made to care for shared libs etc., but it is strongly
|
|
recommended to review the result before putting it into PLIST. On upgrades,
|
|
it's useful to diff the output of this command against an already existing
|
|
PLIST file.
|
|
|
|
If the package installs files via tar(1) or other methods that don't update
|
|
file access times, be sure to add these files manually to your PLIST, as
|
|
the "find -newer" command used by this target won't catch them!
|
|
|
|
See Section 13.3, "Tweaking output of make print-PLIST" for more
|
|
information on this target.
|
|
|
|
bulk-package
|
|
|
|
Used to do bulk builds. If an appropriate binary package already exists, no
|
|
action is taken. If not, this target will compile, install and package it
|
|
(and its depends, if PKG_DEPENDS is set properly. See Section 7.3.1,
|
|
"Configuration"). After creating the binary package, the sources, the
|
|
just-installed package and its required packages are removed, preserving
|
|
free disk space.
|
|
|
|
Beware that this target may deinstall all packages installed on a system!
|
|
|
|
bulk-install
|
|
|
|
Used during bulk-installs to install required packages. If an up-to-date
|
|
binary package is available, it will be installed via pkg_add(1). If not,
|
|
make bulk-package will be executed, but the installed binary won't be
|
|
removed.
|
|
|
|
A binary package is considered "up-to-date" to be installed via pkg_add(1)
|
|
if:
|
|
|
|
* None of the package's files (Makefile, ...) were modified since it was
|
|
built.
|
|
|
|
* None of the package's required (binary) packages were modified since it
|
|
was built.
|
|
|
|
Beware that this target may deinstall all packages installed on a system!
|
|
|
|
Chapter 18. Tools needed for building or running
|
|
|
|
Table of Contents
|
|
|
|
18.1. Tools for pkgsrc builds
|
|
18.2. Tools needed by packages
|
|
18.3. Tools provided by platforms
|
|
18.4. Questions regarding the tools
|
|
|
|
The USE_TOOLS definition is used both internally by pkgsrc and also for
|
|
individual packages to define what commands are needed for building a package
|
|
(like BUILD_DEPENDS) or for later run-time of an installed packaged (such as
|
|
DEPENDS). If the native system provides an adequate tool, then in many cases, a
|
|
pkgsrc package will not be used.
|
|
|
|
When building a package, the replacement tools are made available in a
|
|
directory (as symlinks or wrapper scripts) that is early in the executable
|
|
search path. Just like the buildlink system, this helps with consistent builds.
|
|
|
|
A tool may be needed to help build a specific package. For example, perl, GNU
|
|
make (gmake) or yacc may be needed.
|
|
|
|
Also a tool may be needed, for example, because the native system's supplied
|
|
tool may be inefficient for building a package with pkgsrc. For example, a
|
|
package may need GNU awk, bison (instead of yacc) or a better sed.
|
|
|
|
The tools used by a package can be listed by running make show-tools.
|
|
|
|
18.1. Tools for pkgsrc builds
|
|
|
|
The default set of tools used by pkgsrc is defined in bsd.pkg.mk. This includes
|
|
standard Unix tools, such as: cat, awk, chmod, test, and so on. These can be
|
|
seen by running: make show-var VARNAME=USE_TOOLS.
|
|
|
|
If a package needs a specific program to build then the USE_TOOLS variable can
|
|
be used to define the tools needed.
|
|
|
|
18.2. Tools needed by packages
|
|
|
|
In the following examples, the :pkgsrc means to use the pkgsrc version and not
|
|
the native version for a build dependency. And the :run means that it is used
|
|
for a run-time dependencies also (and becomes a DEPENDS). The default is a
|
|
build dependency which can be set with :build. (So in this example, it is the
|
|
same as gmake:build and pkg-config:build.)
|
|
|
|
USE_TOOLS+= mktemp:pkgsrc
|
|
USE_TOOLS+= gmake perl:run pkg-config
|
|
|
|
When using the tools framework, a TOOLS_PATH.foo variable is defined which
|
|
contains the full path to the appropriate tool. For example, TOOLS_PATH.bash
|
|
could be "/bin/bash" on Linux systems.
|
|
|
|
If you always need a pkgsrc version of the tool at run-time, then just use
|
|
DEPENDS instead.
|
|
|
|
18.3. Tools provided by platforms
|
|
|
|
When improving or porting pkgsrc to a new platform, have a look at (or create)
|
|
the corresponding platform specific make file fragment under pkgsrc/mk/tools/
|
|
tools.${OPSYS}.mk which defines the name of the common tools. For example:
|
|
|
|
.if exists(/usr/bin/bzcat)
|
|
TOOLS_PLATFORM.bzcat?= /usr/bin/bzcat
|
|
.elif exists(/usr/bin/bzip2)
|
|
TOOLS_PLATFORM.bzcat?= /usr/bin/bzip2 -cd
|
|
.endif
|
|
|
|
TOOLS_PLATFORM.true?= true # shell builtin
|
|
|
|
18.4. Questions regarding the tools
|
|
|
|
18.4.1. How do I add a new tool?
|
|
18.4.2. How do I get a list of all available tools?
|
|
18.4.3. How can I get a list of all the tools that a package is using while
|
|
being built? I want to know whether it uses sed or not.
|
|
|
|
18.4.1. How do I add a new tool?
|
|
|
|
TODO
|
|
|
|
18.4.2. How do I get a list of all available tools?
|
|
|
|
TODO
|
|
|
|
18.4.3. How can I get a list of all the tools that a package is using while
|
|
being built? I want to know whether it uses sed or not.
|
|
|
|
Currently, you can't. (TODO: But I want to be able to do it.)
|
|
|
|
Chapter 19. Making your package work
|
|
|
|
Table of Contents
|
|
|
|
19.1. General operation
|
|
|
|
19.1.1. Portability of packages
|
|
19.1.2. How to pull in user-settable variables from mk.conf
|
|
19.1.3. User interaction
|
|
19.1.4. Handling licenses
|
|
19.1.5. Restricted packages
|
|
19.1.6. Handling dependencies
|
|
19.1.7. Handling conflicts with other packages
|
|
19.1.8. Packages that cannot or should not be built
|
|
19.1.9. Packages which should not be deleted, once installed
|
|
19.1.10. Handling packages with security problems
|
|
19.1.11. How to handle incrementing versions when fixing an existing
|
|
package
|
|
19.1.12. Substituting variable text in the package files (the SUBST
|
|
framework)
|
|
|
|
19.2. Fixing problems in the fetch phase
|
|
|
|
19.2.1. Packages whose distfiles aren't available for plain downloading
|
|
19.2.2. How to handle modified distfiles with the 'old' name
|
|
|
|
19.3. Fixing problems in the configure phase
|
|
|
|
19.3.1. Shared libraries - libtool
|
|
19.3.2. Using libtool on GNU packages that already support libtool
|
|
19.3.3. GNU Autoconf/Automake
|
|
|
|
19.4. Programming languages
|
|
|
|
19.4.1. C, C++, and Fortran
|
|
19.4.2. Java
|
|
19.4.3. Packages containing perl scripts
|
|
19.4.4. Other programming languages
|
|
|
|
19.5. Fixing problems in the build phase
|
|
|
|
19.5.1. Compiling C and C++ code conditionally
|
|
19.5.2. How to handle compiler bugs
|
|
19.5.3. Undefined reference to "..."
|
|
19.5.4. Running out of memory
|
|
|
|
19.6. Fixing problems in the install phase
|
|
|
|
19.6.1. Creating needed directories
|
|
19.6.2. Where to install documentation
|
|
19.6.3. Installing highscore files
|
|
19.6.4. Adding DESTDIR support to packages
|
|
19.6.5. Packages with hardcoded paths to other interpreters
|
|
19.6.6. Packages installing perl modules
|
|
19.6.7. Packages installing info files
|
|
19.6.8. Packages installing man pages
|
|
19.6.9. Packages installing GConf data files
|
|
19.6.10. Packages installing scrollkeeper data files
|
|
19.6.11. Packages installing X11 fonts
|
|
19.6.12. Packages installing GTK2 modules
|
|
19.6.13. Packages installing SGML or XML data
|
|
19.6.14. Packages installing extensions to the MIME database
|
|
19.6.15. Packages using intltool
|
|
19.6.16. Packages installing startup scripts
|
|
19.6.17. Packages installing TeX modules
|
|
19.6.18. Packages supporting running binaries in emulation
|
|
19.6.19. Packages installing hicolor theme icons
|
|
19.6.20. Packages installing desktop files
|
|
|
|
19.7. Marking packages as having problems
|
|
|
|
19.1. General operation
|
|
|
|
19.1.1. Portability of packages
|
|
|
|
One appealing feature of pkgsrc is that it runs on many different platforms. As
|
|
a result, it is important to ensure, where possible, that packages in pkgsrc
|
|
are portable. This chapter mentions some particular details you should pay
|
|
attention to while working on pkgsrc.
|
|
|
|
19.1.2. How to pull in user-settable variables from mk.conf
|
|
|
|
The pkgsrc user can configure pkgsrc by overriding several variables in the
|
|
file pointed to by MAKECONF, which is mk.conf by default. When you want to use
|
|
those variables in the preprocessor directives of make(1) (for example .if or
|
|
.for), you need to include the file ../../mk/bsd.prefs.mk before, which in turn
|
|
loads the user preferences.
|
|
|
|
But note that some variables may not be completely defined after ../../mk/
|
|
bsd.prefs.mk has been included, as they may contain references to variables
|
|
that are not yet defined. In shell commands this is no problem, since variables
|
|
are actually macros, which are only expanded when they are used. But in the
|
|
preprocessor directives mentioned above and in dependency lines (of the form
|
|
target: dependencies) the variables are expanded at load time.
|
|
|
|
Note
|
|
|
|
Currently there is no exhaustive list of all variables that tells you whether
|
|
they can be used at load time or only at run time, but it is in preparation.
|
|
|
|
19.1.3. User interaction
|
|
|
|
Occasionally, packages require interaction from the user, and this can be in a
|
|
number of ways:
|
|
|
|
* When fetching the distfiles, some packages require user interaction such as
|
|
entering username/password or accepting a license on a web page.
|
|
|
|
* When extracting the distfiles, some packages may ask for passwords.
|
|
|
|
* help to configure the package before it is built
|
|
|
|
* help during the build process
|
|
|
|
* help during the installation of a package
|
|
|
|
The INTERACTIVE_STAGE definition is provided to notify the pkgsrc mechanism of
|
|
an interactive stage which will be needed, and this should be set in the
|
|
package's Makefile, e.g.:
|
|
|
|
INTERACTIVE_STAGE= build
|
|
|
|
|
|
Multiple interactive stages can be specified:
|
|
|
|
INTERACTIVE_STAGE= configure install
|
|
|
|
|
|
The user can then decide to skip this package by setting the BATCH variable.
|
|
|
|
19.1.4. Handling licenses
|
|
|
|
Authors of software can choose the licence under which software can be copied.
|
|
This is due to copyright law, and reasons for license choices are outside the
|
|
scope of pkgsrc. The pkgsrc system recognizes that there are a number of
|
|
licenses which some users may find objectionable or difficult or impossible to
|
|
comply with. The Free Software Foundation has declared some licenses "Free",
|
|
and the Open Source Initiative has a definition of "Open Source". The pkgsrc
|
|
system, as a policy choice, does not label packages which have licenses that
|
|
are Free or Open Source. However, packages without a license meeting either of
|
|
those tests are labeled with a license tag denoting the license. Note that a
|
|
package with no license to copy trivially does not meet either the Free or Open
|
|
Source test.
|
|
|
|
For packages which are not Free or Open Source, pkgsrc will not build the
|
|
package unless the user has indicated to pkgsrc that packages with that
|
|
particular license may be built. Note that this documentation avoids the term
|
|
"accepted the license". The pkgsrc system is merely providing a mechanism to
|
|
avoid accidentally building a package with a non-free license; judgement and
|
|
responsibility remain with the user. (Installation of binary packages are not
|
|
currently subject to this mechanism; this is a bug.)
|
|
|
|
One might want to only install packages with a BSD license, or the GPL, and not
|
|
the other. The pkgsrc license tag mechanism does not provide a way to do this.
|
|
It might be possible to put in tags for free licenses, and have a default
|
|
ACCEPTABLE_LICENSES variable value, but this is widely viewed as having a very
|
|
poor ratio of benefit to work.
|
|
|
|
The license tag mechanism is intended to address copyright-related issues
|
|
surrounding building, installing and using a package, and not to address
|
|
redistribution issues (see RESTRICTED and NO_SRC_ON_FTP, etc.). However, the
|
|
above definition of licenses for which tags are not needed implies that
|
|
packages with redistribution restrictions should have tags, because Free or
|
|
Open Source programs do not have redistribution restrictions.
|
|
|
|
Denoting that a package may be copied according to a particular license is done
|
|
by placing the license in pkgsrc/licenses and setting the LICENSE variable to a
|
|
string identifying the license, e.g. in graphics/xv:
|
|
|
|
LICENSE= xv-license
|
|
|
|
|
|
When trying to build, the user will get a notice that the package is covered by
|
|
a license which has not been placed in the ACCEPTABLE_LICENSES variable:
|
|
|
|
% make
|
|
===> xv-3.10anb9 has an unacceptable license: xv-license.
|
|
===> To view the license, enter "/usr/bin/make show-license".
|
|
===> To indicate acceptance, add this line to your /etc/mk.conf:
|
|
===> ACCEPTABLE_LICENSES+=xv-license
|
|
*** Error code 1
|
|
|
|
|
|
The license can be viewed with make show-license, and if the user so chooses,
|
|
the line printed above can be added to mk.conf to convey to pkgsrc that it
|
|
should not in the future fail because of that license:
|
|
|
|
ACCEPTABLE_LICENSES+=xv-license
|
|
|
|
|
|
When adding a package with a new license, the license text should be added to
|
|
pkgsrc/licenses for displaying. A list of known licenses can be seen in this
|
|
directory.
|
|
|
|
When the license changes (in a way other than formatting), please make sure
|
|
that the new license has a different name (e.g., append the version number if
|
|
it exists, or the date). Just because a user told pkgsrc to build programs
|
|
under a previous version of a license does not mean that pkgsrc should build
|
|
programs under the new licenses. The higher-level point is that pkgsrc does not
|
|
evaluate licenses for reasonableness; the only test is a mechanistic test of
|
|
whether a particular text has been approved by either of two bodies.
|
|
|
|
The use of LICENSE=shareware, LICENSE=no-commercial-use, and similar language
|
|
is deprecated because it does not crisply refer to a particular license text.
|
|
Another problem with such usage is that it does not enable a user to tell
|
|
pkgsrc to proceed for a single package without also telling pkgsrc to proceed
|
|
for all packages with that tag.
|
|
|
|
19.1.5. Restricted packages
|
|
|
|
Some licenses restrict how software may be re-distributed. Because a license
|
|
tag is required unless the package is Free or Open Source, all packages with
|
|
restrictions should have license tags. By declaring the restrictions, package
|
|
tools can automatically refrain from e.g. placing binary packages on FTP sites.
|
|
|
|
There are four restrictions that may be encoded, which are the cross product of
|
|
sources (distfiles) and binaries not being placed on FTP sites and CD-ROMs.
|
|
Because this is rarely the exact language in any license, and because non-Free
|
|
licenses tend to be different from each other, pkgsrc adopts a definition of
|
|
FTP and CD-ROM. Pkgsrc uses "FTP" to mean that the source or binary file should
|
|
not be made available over the Internet at no charge. Pkgsrc uses "CD-ROM" to
|
|
mean that the source or binary may not be made available on some kind of media,
|
|
together with other source and binary packages, and which is sold for a
|
|
distribution charge.
|
|
|
|
In order to encode these restrictions, the package system defines five make
|
|
variables that can be set to note these restrictions:
|
|
|
|
* RESTRICTED
|
|
|
|
This variable should be set whenever a restriction exists (regardless of
|
|
its kind). Set this variable to a string containing the reason for the
|
|
restriction. It should be understood that those wanting to understand the
|
|
restriction will have to read the license, and perhaps seek advice of
|
|
counsel.
|
|
|
|
* NO_BIN_ON_CDROM
|
|
|
|
Binaries may not be placed on CD-ROM containing other binary packages, for
|
|
which a distribution charge may be made. In this case, set this variable to
|
|
${RESTRICTED}.
|
|
|
|
* NO_BIN_ON_FTP
|
|
|
|
Binaries may not made available on the Internet without charge. In this
|
|
case, set this variable to ${RESTRICTED}. If this variable is set, binary
|
|
packages will not be included on ftp.NetBSD.org.
|
|
|
|
* NO_SRC_ON_CDROM
|
|
|
|
Distfiles may not be placed on CD-ROM, together with other distfiles, for
|
|
which a fee may be charged. In this case, set this variable to $
|
|
{RESTRICTED}.
|
|
|
|
* NO_SRC_ON_FTP
|
|
|
|
Distfiles may not made available via FTP at no charge. In this case, set
|
|
this variable to ${RESTRICTED}. If this variable is set, the distfile(s)
|
|
will not be mirrored on ftp.NetBSD.org.
|
|
|
|
Please note that the use of NO_PACKAGE, IGNORE, NO_CDROM, or other generic make
|
|
variables to denote restrictions is deprecated, because they unconditionally
|
|
prevent users from generating binary packages!
|
|
|
|
19.1.6. Handling dependencies
|
|
|
|
Your package may depend on some other package being present - and there are
|
|
various ways of expressing this dependency. pkgsrc supports the BUILD_DEPENDS
|
|
and DEPENDS definitions, the USE_TOOLS definition, as well as dependencies via
|
|
buildlink3.mk, which is the preferred way to handle dependencies, and which
|
|
uses the variables named above. See Chapter 14, Buildlink methodology for more
|
|
information.
|
|
|
|
The basic difference between the two variables is as follows: The DEPENDS
|
|
definition registers that pre-requisite in the binary package so it will be
|
|
pulled in when the binary package is later installed, whilst the BUILD_DEPENDS
|
|
definition does not, marking a dependency that is only needed for building the
|
|
package.
|
|
|
|
This means that if you only need a package present whilst you are building, it
|
|
should be noted as a BUILD_DEPENDS.
|
|
|
|
The format for a BUILD_DEPENDS and a DEPENDS definition is:
|
|
|
|
<pre-req-package-name>:../../<category>/<pre-req-package>
|
|
|
|
|
|
Please note that the "pre-req-package-name" may include any of the wildcard
|
|
version numbers recognized by pkg_info(1).
|
|
|
|
1. If your package needs another package's binaries or libraries to build or
|
|
run, and if that package has a buildlink3.mk file available, use it:
|
|
|
|
.include "../../graphics/jpeg/buildlink3.mk"
|
|
|
|
|
|
2. If your package needs to use another package to build itself and there is
|
|
no buildlink3.mk file available, use the BUILD_DEPENDS definition:
|
|
|
|
BUILD_DEPENDS+= autoconf-2.13:../../devel/autoconf
|
|
|
|
|
|
3. If your package needs a library with which to link and again there is no
|
|
buildlink3.mk file available, this is specified using the DEPENDS
|
|
definition. For example:
|
|
|
|
DEPENDS+= xpm-3.4j:../../graphics/xpm
|
|
|
|
|
|
You can also use wildcards in package dependencies:
|
|
|
|
DEPENDS+= xpm-[0-9]*:../../graphics/xpm
|
|
|
|
|
|
Note that such wildcard dependencies are retained when creating binary
|
|
packages. The dependency is checked when installing the binary package and
|
|
any package which matches the pattern will be used. Wildcard dependencies
|
|
should be used with care.
|
|
|
|
The "-[0-9]*" should be used instead of "-*" to avoid potentially ambiguous
|
|
matches such as "tk-postgresql" matching a "tk-*" DEPENDS.
|
|
|
|
Wildcards can also be used to specify that a package will only build
|
|
against a certain minimum version of a pre-requisite:
|
|
|
|
DEPENDS+= tiff>=3.5.4:../../graphics/tiff
|
|
|
|
|
|
This means that the package will build against version 3.5.4 of the tiff
|
|
library or newer. Such a dependency may be warranted if, for example, the
|
|
API of the library has changed with version 3.5.4 and a package would not
|
|
compile against an earlier version of tiff.
|
|
|
|
Please note that such dependencies should only be updated if a package
|
|
requires a newer pre-requisite, but not to denote recommendations such as
|
|
ABI changes that do not prevent a package from building correctly. Such
|
|
recommendations can be expressed using ABI_DEPENDS:
|
|
|
|
ABI_DEPENDS+= tiff>=3.6.1:../../graphics/tiff
|
|
|
|
|
|
In addition to the above DEPENDS line, this denotes that while a package
|
|
will build against tiff>=3.5.4, at least version 3.6.1 is recommended.
|
|
ABI_DEPENDS entries will be turned into dependencies unless explicitly
|
|
ignored (in which case a warning will be printed).
|
|
|
|
To ignore these ABI dependency recommendations and just use the required
|
|
DEPENDS, set USE_ABI_DEPENDS=NO. This may make it easier and faster to
|
|
update packages built using pkgsrc, since older compatible dependencies can
|
|
continue to be used. This is useful for people who watch their rebuilds
|
|
very carefully; it is not very good as a general-purpose hammer. If you use
|
|
it, you need to be mindful of possible ABI changes, including those from
|
|
the underlying OS.
|
|
|
|
Packages that are built with recommendations ignored may not be uploaded to
|
|
ftp.NetBSD.org by developers and should not be used across different
|
|
systems that may have different versions of binary packages installed.
|
|
|
|
For security fixes, please update the package vulnerabilities file. See
|
|
Section 19.1.10, "Handling packages with security problems" for more
|
|
information.
|
|
|
|
4. If your package needs some executable to be able to run correctly and if
|
|
there's no buildlink3.mk file, this is specified using the DEPENDS
|
|
variable. The print/lyx package needs to be able to execute the latex
|
|
binary from the teTeX package when it runs, and that is specified:
|
|
|
|
DEPENDS+= teTeX-[0-9]*:../../print/teTeX
|
|
|
|
|
|
The comment about wildcard dependencies from previous paragraph applies
|
|
here, too.
|
|
|
|
If your package needs files from another package to build, add the relevant
|
|
distribution files to DISTFILES, so they will be extracted automatically. See
|
|
the print/ghostscript package for an example. (It relies on the jpeg sources
|
|
being present in source form during the build.)
|
|
|
|
19.1.7. Handling conflicts with other packages
|
|
|
|
Your package may conflict with other packages a user might already have
|
|
installed on his system, e.g. if your package installs the same set of files as
|
|
another package in the pkgsrc tree.
|
|
|
|
In this case you can set CONFLICTS to a space-separated list of packages
|
|
(including version string) your package conflicts with.
|
|
|
|
For example, x11/Xaw3d and x11/Xaw-Xpm install the same shared library, thus
|
|
you set in pkgsrc/x11/Xaw3d/Makefile:
|
|
|
|
CONFLICTS= Xaw-Xpm-[0-9]*
|
|
|
|
|
|
and in pkgsrc/x11/Xaw-Xpm/Makefile:
|
|
|
|
CONFLICTS= Xaw3d-[0-9]*
|
|
|
|
|
|
Packages will automatically conflict with other packages with the name prefix
|
|
and a different version string. "Xaw3d-1.5" e.g. will automatically conflict
|
|
with the older version "Xaw3d-1.3".
|
|
|
|
19.1.8. Packages that cannot or should not be built
|
|
|
|
There are several reasons why a package might be instructed to not build under
|
|
certain circumstances. If the package builds and runs on most platforms, the
|
|
exceptions should be noted with NOT_FOR_PLATFORM. If the package builds and
|
|
runs on a small handful of platforms, set ONLY_FOR_PLATFORM instead. Both
|
|
ONLY_FOR_PLATFORM and NOT_FOR_PLATFORM are OS triples (OS-version-platform)
|
|
that can use glob-style wildcards.
|
|
|
|
Some packages are tightly bound to a specific version of an operating system,
|
|
e.g. LKMs or sysutils/lsof. Such binary packages are not backwards compatible
|
|
with other versions of the OS, and should be uploaded to a version specific
|
|
directory on the FTP server. Mark these packages by setting OSVERSION_SPECIFIC
|
|
to "yes". This variable is not currently used by any of the package system
|
|
internals, but may be used in the future.
|
|
|
|
If the package should be skipped (for example, because it provides
|
|
functionality already provided by the system), set PKG_SKIP_REASON to a
|
|
descriptive message. If the package should fail because some preconditions are
|
|
not met, set PKG_FAIL_REASON to a descriptive message.
|
|
|
|
19.1.9. Packages which should not be deleted, once installed
|
|
|
|
To ensure that a package may not be deleted, once it has been installed, the
|
|
PKG_PRESERVE definition should be set in the package Makefile. This will be
|
|
carried into any binary package that is made from this pkgsrc entry. A
|
|
"preserved" package will not be deleted using pkg_delete(1) unless the "-f"
|
|
option is used.
|
|
|
|
19.1.10. Handling packages with security problems
|
|
|
|
When a vulnerability is found, this should be noted in localsrc/security/
|
|
advisories/pkg-vulnerabilities, and after committing that file, use make upload
|
|
in the same directory to update the file on ftp.NetBSD.org.
|
|
|
|
After fixing the vulnerability by a patch, its PKGREVISION should be increased
|
|
(this is of course not necessary if the problem is fixed by using a newer
|
|
release of the software).
|
|
|
|
Also, if the fix should be applied to the stable pkgsrc branch, be sure to
|
|
submit a pullup request!
|
|
|
|
Binary packages already on ftp.NetBSD.org will be handled semi-automatically by
|
|
a weekly cron job.
|
|
|
|
19.1.11. How to handle incrementing versions when fixing an existing package
|
|
|
|
When making fixes to an existing package it can be useful to change the version
|
|
number in PKGNAME. To avoid conflicting with future versions by the original
|
|
author, a "nb1", "nb2", ... suffix can be used on package versions by setting
|
|
PKGREVISION=1 (2, ...). The "nb" is treated like a "." by the package tools.
|
|
e.g.
|
|
|
|
DISTNAME= foo-17.42
|
|
PKGREVISION= 9
|
|
|
|
|
|
will result in a PKGNAME of "foo-17.42nb9". If you want to use the original
|
|
value of PKGNAME without the "nbX" suffix, e.g. for setting DIST_SUBDIR, use
|
|
PKGNAME_NOREV.
|
|
|
|
When a new release of the package is released, the PKGREVISION should be
|
|
removed, e.g. on a new minor release of the above package, things should be
|
|
like:
|
|
|
|
DISTNAME= foo-17.43
|
|
|
|
|
|
PKGREVISION should be incremented for any non-trivial change in the resulting
|
|
binary package. Without a PKGREVISION bump, someone with the previous version
|
|
installed has no way of knowing that their package is out of date. Thus,
|
|
changes without increasing PKGREVISION are essentially labeled "this is so
|
|
trivial that no reasonable person would want to upgrade", and this is the rough
|
|
test for when increasing PKGREVISION is appropriate. Examples of changes that
|
|
do not merit increasing PKGREVISION are:
|
|
|
|
* Changing HOMEPAGE, MAINTAINER, OWNER, or comments in Makefile.
|
|
|
|
* Changing build variables if the resulting binary package is the same.
|
|
|
|
* Changing DESCR.
|
|
|
|
* Adding PKG_OPTIONS if the default options don't change.
|
|
|
|
Examples of changes that do merit an increase to PKGREVISION include:
|
|
|
|
* Security fixes
|
|
|
|
* Changes or additions to a patch file
|
|
|
|
* Changes to the PLIST
|
|
|
|
* A dependency is changed or renamed.
|
|
|
|
PKGREVISION must also be incremented when dependencies have ABI changes.
|
|
|
|
19.1.12. Substituting variable text in the package files (the SUBST framework)
|
|
|
|
When you want to replace the same text in multiple files or when the
|
|
replacement text varies, patches alone cannot help. This is where the SUBST
|
|
framework comes in. It provides an easy-to-use interface for replacing text in
|
|
files. Example:
|
|
|
|
SUBST_CLASSES+= fix-paths
|
|
SUBST_STAGE.fix-paths= pre-configure
|
|
SUBST_MESSAGE.fix-paths= Fixing absolute paths.
|
|
SUBST_FILES.fix-paths= src/*.c
|
|
SUBST_FILES.fix-paths+= scripts/*.sh
|
|
SUBST_SED.fix-paths= -e 's,"/usr/local,"${PREFIX},g'
|
|
SUBST_SED.fix-paths+= -e 's,"/var/log,"${VARBASE}/log,g'
|
|
|
|
|
|
SUBST_CLASSES is a list of identifiers that are used to identify the different
|
|
SUBST blocks that are defined. The SUBST framework is heavily used by pkgsrc,
|
|
so it is important to always use the += operator with this variable. Otherwise
|
|
some substitutions may be skipped.
|
|
|
|
The remaining variables of each SUBST block are parameterized with the
|
|
identifier from the first line (fix-paths in this case.) They can be seen as
|
|
parameters to a function call.
|
|
|
|
SUBST_STAGE.* specifies the stage at which the replacement will take place. All
|
|
combinations of pre-, do- and post- together with a phase name are possible,
|
|
though only few are actually used. Most commonly used are post-patch and
|
|
pre-configure. Of these two, pre-configure should be preferred because then it
|
|
is possible to run bmake patch and have the state after applying the patches
|
|
but before making any other changes. This is especially useful when you are
|
|
debugging a package in order to create new patches for it. Similarly,
|
|
post-build is preferred over pre-install, because the install phase should
|
|
generally be kept as simple as possible. When you use post-build, you have the
|
|
same files in the working directory that will be installed later, so you can
|
|
check if the substitution has succeeded.
|
|
|
|
SUBST_MESSAGE.* is an optional text that is printed just before the
|
|
substitution is done.
|
|
|
|
SUBST_FILES.* is the list of shell globbing patterns that specifies the files
|
|
in which the substitution will take place. The patterns are interpreted
|
|
relatively to the WRKSRC directory.
|
|
|
|
SUBST_SED.* is a list of arguments to sed(1) that specify the actual
|
|
substitution. Every sed command should be prefixed with -e, so that all SUBST
|
|
blocks look uniform.
|
|
|
|
There are some more variables, but they are so seldomly used that they are only
|
|
documented in the mk/subst.mk file.
|
|
|
|
19.2. Fixing problems in the fetch phase
|
|
|
|
19.2.1. Packages whose distfiles aren't available for plain downloading
|
|
|
|
If you need to download from a dynamic URL you can set DYNAMIC_MASTER_SITES and
|
|
a make fetch will call files/getsite.sh with the name of each file to download
|
|
as an argument, expecting it to output the URL of the directory from which to
|
|
download it. graphics/ns-cult3d is an example of this usage.
|
|
|
|
If the download can't be automated, because the user must submit personal
|
|
information to apply for a password, or must pay for the source, or whatever,
|
|
you can set FETCH_MESSAGE to a list of lines that are displayed to the user
|
|
before aborting the build. Example:
|
|
|
|
FETCH_MESSAGE= "Please download the files"
|
|
FETCH_MESSAGE+= " "${DISTFILES:Q}
|
|
FETCH_MESSAGE+= "manually from "${MASTER_SITES:Q}"."
|
|
|
|
|
|
19.2.2. How to handle modified distfiles with the 'old' name
|
|
|
|
Sometimes authors of a software package make some modifications after the
|
|
software was released, and they put up a new distfile without changing the
|
|
package's version number. If a package is already in pkgsrc at that time, the
|
|
checksum will no longer match. The contents of the new distfile should be
|
|
compared against the old one before changing anything, to make sure the
|
|
distfile was really updated on purpose, and that no trojan horse or so crept
|
|
in. Please mention that the distfiles were compared and what was found in your
|
|
commit message. Then, the correct way to work around this is to set DIST_SUBDIR
|
|
to a unique directory name, usually based on PKGNAME_NOREV. All DISTFILES and
|
|
PATCHFILES for this package will be put in that subdirectory of the local
|
|
distfiles directory. (See Section 19.1.11, "How to handle incrementing versions
|
|
when fixing an existing package" for more details.) In case this happens more
|
|
often, PKGNAME can be used (thus including the nbX suffix) or a date stamp can
|
|
be appended, like ${PKGNAME_NOREV}-YYYYMMDD. Do not forget regenerating the
|
|
distinfo file after that, since it contains the DIST_SUBDIR path in the
|
|
filenames. Also increase the PKGREVISION if the installed package is different.
|
|
Furthermore, a mail to the package's authors seems appropriate telling them
|
|
that changing distfiles after releases without changing the file names is not
|
|
good practice.
|
|
|
|
19.3. Fixing problems in the configure phase
|
|
|
|
19.3.1. Shared libraries - libtool
|
|
|
|
pkgsrc supports many different machines, with different object formats like
|
|
a.out and ELF, and varying abilities to do shared library and dynamic loading
|
|
at all. To accompany this, varying commands and options have to be passed to
|
|
the compiler, linker, etc. to get the Right Thing, which can be pretty annoying
|
|
especially if you don't have all the machines at your hand to test things. The
|
|
devel/libtool pkg can help here, as it just "knows" how to build both static
|
|
and dynamic libraries from a set of source files, thus being
|
|
platform-independent.
|
|
|
|
Here's how to use libtool in a package in seven simple steps:
|
|
|
|
1. Add USE_LIBTOOL=yes to the package Makefile.
|
|
|
|
2. For library objects, use "${LIBTOOL} --mode=compile ${CC}" in place of "$
|
|
{CC}". You could even add it to the definition of CC, if only libraries are
|
|
being built in a given Makefile. This one command will build both PIC and
|
|
non-PIC library objects, so you need not have separate shared and
|
|
non-shared library rules.
|
|
|
|
3. For the linking of the library, remove any "ar", "ranlib", and "ld
|
|
-Bshareable" commands, and instead use:
|
|
|
|
${LIBTOOL} --mode=link \
|
|
${CC} -o ${.TARGET:.a=.la} \
|
|
${OBJS:.o=.lo} \
|
|
-rpath ${PREFIX}/lib \
|
|
-version-info major:minor
|
|
|
|
|
|
Note that the library is changed to have a .la extension, and the objects
|
|
are changed to have a .lo extension. Change OBJS as necessary. This
|
|
automatically creates all of the .a, .so.major.minor, and ELF symlinks (if
|
|
necessary) in the build directory. Be sure to include "-version-info",
|
|
especially when major and minor are zero, as libtool will otherwise strip
|
|
off the shared library version.
|
|
|
|
From the libtool manual:
|
|
|
|
So, libtool library versions are described by three integers:
|
|
|
|
CURRENT
|
|
The most recent interface number that this library implements.
|
|
|
|
REVISION
|
|
The implementation number of the CURRENT interface.
|
|
|
|
AGE
|
|
The difference between the newest and oldest interfaces that
|
|
this library implements. In other words, the library implements
|
|
all the interface numbers in the range from number `CURRENT -
|
|
AGE' to `CURRENT'.
|
|
|
|
If two libraries have identical CURRENT and AGE numbers, then the
|
|
dynamic linker chooses the library with the greater REVISION number.
|
|
|
|
|
|
The "-release" option will produce different results for a.out and ELF
|
|
(excluding symlinks) in only one case. An ELF library of the form
|
|
"libfoo-release.so.x.y" will have a symlink of "libfoo.so.x.y" on an a.out
|
|
platform. This is handled automatically.
|
|
|
|
The "-rpath argument" is the install directory of the library being built.
|
|
|
|
In the PLIST, include only the .la file, the other files will be added
|
|
automatically.
|
|
|
|
4. When linking shared object (.so) files, i.e. files that are loaded via
|
|
dlopen(3), NOT shared libraries, use "-module -avoid-version" to prevent
|
|
them getting version tacked on.
|
|
|
|
The PLIST file gets the foo.so entry.
|
|
|
|
5. When linking programs that depend on these libraries before they are
|
|
installed, preface the cc(1) or ld(1) line with "${LIBTOOL} --mode=link",
|
|
and it will find the correct libraries (static or shared), but please be
|
|
aware that libtool will not allow you to specify a relative path in -L
|
|
(such as "-L../somelib"), because it expects you to change that argument to
|
|
be the .la file. e.g.
|
|
|
|
${LIBTOOL} --mode=link ${CC} -o someprog -L../somelib -lsomelib
|
|
|
|
|
|
should be changed to:
|
|
|
|
${LIBTOOL} --mode=link ${CC} -o someprog ../somelib/somelib.la
|
|
|
|
|
|
and it will do the right thing with the libraries.
|
|
|
|
6. When installing libraries, preface the install(1) or cp(1) command with "$
|
|
{LIBTOOL} --mode=install", and change the library name to .la. e.g.
|
|
|
|
${LIBTOOL} --mode=install ${BSD_INSTALL_DATA} ${SOMELIB:.a=.la} ${PREFIX}/lib
|
|
|
|
|
|
This will install the static .a, shared library, any needed symlinks, and
|
|
run ldconfig(8).
|
|
|
|
7. In your PLIST, include only the .la file (this is a change from previous
|
|
behaviour).
|
|
|
|
19.3.2. Using libtool on GNU packages that already support libtool
|
|
|
|
Add USE_LIBTOOL=yes to the package Makefile. This will override the package's
|
|
own libtool in most cases. For older libtool using packages, libtool is made by
|
|
ltconfig script during the do-configure step; you can check the libtool script
|
|
location by doing make configure; find work*/ -name libtool.
|
|
|
|
LIBTOOL_OVERRIDE specifies which libtool scripts, relative to WRKSRC, to
|
|
override. By default, it is set to "libtool */libtool */*/libtool". If this
|
|
does not match the location of the package's libtool script(s), set it as
|
|
appropriate.
|
|
|
|
If you do not need *.a static libraries built and installed, then use
|
|
SHLIBTOOL_OVERRIDE instead.
|
|
|
|
If your package makes use of the platform-independent library for loading
|
|
dynamic shared objects, that comes with libtool (libltdl), you should include
|
|
devel/libltdl/buildlink3.mk.
|
|
|
|
Some packages use libtool incorrectly so that the package may not work or build
|
|
in some circumstances. Some of the more common errors are:
|
|
|
|
* The inclusion of a shared object (-module) as a dependent library in an
|
|
executable or library. This in itself isn't a problem if one of two things
|
|
has been done:
|
|
|
|
1. The shared object is named correctly, i.e. libfoo.la, not foo.la
|
|
|
|
2. The -dlopen option is used when linking an executable.
|
|
|
|
* The use of libltdl without the correct calls to initialisation routines.
|
|
The function lt_dlinit() should be called and the macro
|
|
LTDL_SET_PRELOADED_SYMBOLS included in executables.
|
|
|
|
19.3.3. GNU Autoconf/Automake
|
|
|
|
If a package needs GNU autoconf or automake to be executed to regenerate the
|
|
configure script and Makefile.in makefile templates, then they should be
|
|
executed in a pre-configure target.
|
|
|
|
For packages that need only autoconf:
|
|
|
|
AUTOCONF_REQD= 2.50 # if default version is not good enough
|
|
USE_TOOLS+= autoconf # use "autoconf213" for autoconf-2.13
|
|
...
|
|
|
|
pre-configure:
|
|
cd ${WRKSRC} && autoconf
|
|
|
|
...
|
|
|
|
|
|
and for packages that need automake and autoconf:
|
|
|
|
AUTOMAKE_REQD= 1.7.1 # if default version is not good enough
|
|
USE_TOOLS+= automake # use "automake14" for automake-1.4
|
|
...
|
|
|
|
pre-configure:
|
|
set -e; cd ${WRKSRC}; \
|
|
aclocal; autoheader; automake -a --foreign -i; autoconf
|
|
|
|
...
|
|
|
|
|
|
Packages which use GNU Automake will almost certainly require GNU Make.
|
|
|
|
There are times when the configure process makes additional changes to the
|
|
generated files, which then causes the build process to try to re-execute the
|
|
automake sequence. This is prevented by touching various files in the configure
|
|
stage. If this causes problems with your package you can set AUTOMAKE_OVERRIDE=
|
|
NO in the package Makefile.
|
|
|
|
19.4. Programming languages
|
|
|
|
19.4.1. C, C++, and Fortran
|
|
|
|
Compilers for the C, C++, and Fortran languages comes with the NetBSD base
|
|
system. By default, pkgsrc assumes that a package is written in C and will hide
|
|
all other compilers (via the wrapper framework, see Chapter 14, Buildlink
|
|
methodology).
|
|
|
|
To declare which language's compiler a package needs, set the USE_LANGUAGES
|
|
variable. Allowed values currently are "c", "c++", and "fortran" (and any
|
|
combination). The default is "c". Packages using GNU configure scripts, even if
|
|
written in C++, usually need a C compiler for the configure phase.
|
|
|
|
19.4.2. Java
|
|
|
|
If a program is written in Java, use the Java framework in pkgsrc. The package
|
|
must include ../../mk/java-vm.mk. This Makefile fragment provides the following
|
|
variables:
|
|
|
|
* USE_JAVA defines if a build dependency on the JDK is added. If USE_JAVA is
|
|
set to "run", then there is only a runtime dependency on the JDK. The
|
|
default is "yes", which also adds a build dependency on the JDK.
|
|
|
|
* Set USE_JAVA2 to declare that a package needs a Java2 implementation. The
|
|
supported values are "yes", "1.4", and "1.5". "yes" accepts any Java2
|
|
implementation, "1.4" insists on versions 1.4 or above, and "1.5" only
|
|
accepts versions 1.5 or above. This variable is not set by default.
|
|
|
|
19.4.3. Packages containing perl scripts
|
|
|
|
If your package contains interpreted perl scripts, add "perl" to the USE_TOOLS
|
|
variable and set REPLACE_PERL to ensure that the proper interpreter path is
|
|
set. REPLACE_PERL should contain a list of scripts, relative to WRKSRC, that
|
|
you want adjusted. Every occurrence of */bin/perl will be replaced with the
|
|
full path to the perl executable.
|
|
|
|
If a particular version of perl is needed, set the PERL5_REQD variable to the
|
|
version number. The default is "5.0".
|
|
|
|
See Section 19.6.6, "Packages installing perl modules" for information about
|
|
handling perl modules.
|
|
|
|
19.4.4. Other programming languages
|
|
|
|
Currently, there is no special handling for other languages in pkgsrc. If a
|
|
compiler package provides a buildlink3.mk file, include that, otherwise just
|
|
add a (build) dependency on the appropriate compiler package.
|
|
|
|
19.5. Fixing problems in the build phase
|
|
|
|
The most common failures when building a package are that some platforms do not
|
|
provide certain header files, functions or libraries, or they provide the
|
|
functions in a library that the original package author didn't know. To work
|
|
around this, you can rewrite the source code in most cases so that it does not
|
|
use the missing functions or provides a replacement function.
|
|
|
|
19.5.1. Compiling C and C++ code conditionally
|
|
|
|
If a package already comes with a GNU configure script, the preferred way to
|
|
fix the build failure is to change the configure script, not the code. In the
|
|
other cases, you can utilize the C preprocessor, which defines certain macros
|
|
depending on the operating system and hardware architecture it compiles for.
|
|
These macros can be queried using for example #if defined(__i386). Almost every
|
|
operating system, hardware architecture and compiler has its own macro. For
|
|
example, if the macros __GNUC__, __i386__ and __NetBSD__ are all defined, you
|
|
know that you are using NetBSD on an i386 compatible CPU, and your compiler is
|
|
GCC.
|
|
|
|
The list of the following macros for hardware and operating system depends on
|
|
the compiler that is used. For example, if you want to conditionally compile
|
|
code on Solaris, don't use __sun__, as the SunPro compiler does not define it.
|
|
Use __sun instead.
|
|
|
|
19.5.1.1. C preprocessor macros to identify the operating system
|
|
|
|
To distinguish between 4.4 BSD-derived systems and the rest of the world, you
|
|
should use the following code.
|
|
|
|
#include <sys/param.h>
|
|
#if (defined(BSD) && BSD >= 199306)
|
|
/* BSD-specific code goes here */
|
|
#else
|
|
/* non-BSD-specific code goes here */
|
|
#endif
|
|
|
|
If this distinction is not fine enough, you can also test for the following
|
|
macros.
|
|
|
|
FreeBSD __FreeBSD__
|
|
DragonFly __DragonFly__
|
|
Interix __INTERIX
|
|
IRIX __sgi (TODO: get a definite source for this)
|
|
Linux linux, __linux, __linux__
|
|
NetBSD __NetBSD__
|
|
OpenBSD __OpenBSD__
|
|
Solaris sun, __sun
|
|
|
|
19.5.1.2. C preprocessor macros to identify the hardware architecture
|
|
|
|
i386 i386, __i386, __i386__
|
|
MIPS __mips
|
|
SPARC sparc, __sparc
|
|
|
|
19.5.1.3. C preprocessor macros to identify the compiler
|
|
|
|
GCC __GNUC__ (major version), __GNUC_MINOR__
|
|
MIPSpro _COMPILER_VERSION (0x741 for MIPSpro 7.41)
|
|
SunPro __SUNPRO_C (0x570 for Sun C 5.7)
|
|
SunPro C++ __SUNPRO_CC (0x580 for Sun C++ 5.8)
|
|
|
|
19.5.2. How to handle compiler bugs
|
|
|
|
Some source files trigger bugs in the compiler, based on combinations of
|
|
compiler version and architecture and almost always relation to optimisation
|
|
being enabled. Common symptoms are gcc internal errors or never finishing
|
|
compiling a file.
|
|
|
|
Typically, a workaround involves testing the MACHINE_ARCH and compiler version,
|
|
disabling optimisation for that combination of file, MACHINE_ARCH and compiler,
|
|
and documenting it in pkgsrc/doc/HACKS. See that file for a number of examples.
|
|
|
|
19.5.3. Undefined reference to "..."
|
|
|
|
This error message often means that a package did not link to a shared library
|
|
it needs. The following functions are known to cause this error message over
|
|
and over.
|
|
|
|
+-----------------------------------------------------+
|
|
| Function |Library |Affected platforms|
|
|
|-------------------------+--------+------------------|
|
|
|accept, bind, connect |-lsocket|Solaris |
|
|
|-------------------------+--------+------------------|
|
|
|crypt |-lcrypt |DragonFly, NetBSD |
|
|
|-------------------------+--------+------------------|
|
|
|dlopen, dlsym |-ldl |Linux |
|
|
|-------------------------+--------+------------------|
|
|
|gethost* |-lnsl |Solaris |
|
|
|-------------------------+--------+------------------|
|
|
|inet_aton |-lresolv|Solaris |
|
|
|-------------------------+--------+------------------|
|
|
|nanosleep, sem_*, timer_*|-lrt |Solaris |
|
|
|-------------------------+--------+------------------|
|
|
|openpty |-lutil |Linux |
|
|
+-----------------------------------------------------+
|
|
|
|
To fix these linker errors, it is often sufficient to say LIBS.OperatingSystem+
|
|
= -lfoo to the package Makefile and then say bmake clean; bmake.
|
|
|
|
19.5.3.1. Special issue: The SunPro compiler
|
|
|
|
When you are using the SunPro compiler, there is another possibility. That
|
|
compiler cannot handle the following code:
|
|
|
|
extern int extern_func(int);
|
|
|
|
static inline int
|
|
inline_func(int x)
|
|
{
|
|
return extern_func(x);
|
|
}
|
|
|
|
int main(void)
|
|
{
|
|
return 0;
|
|
}
|
|
|
|
It generates the code for inline_func even if that function is never used. This
|
|
code then refers to extern_func, which can usually not be resolved. To solve
|
|
this problem you can try to tell the package to disable inlining of functions.
|
|
|
|
19.5.4. Running out of memory
|
|
|
|
Sometimes packages fail to build because the compiler runs into an operating
|
|
system specific soft limit. With the UNLIMIT_RESOURCES variable pkgsrc can be
|
|
told to unlimit the resources. Currently, the allowed values are "datasize" and
|
|
"stacksize" (or both). Setting this variable is similar to running the shell
|
|
builtin ulimit command to raise the maximum data segment size or maximum stack
|
|
size of a process, respectively, to their hard limits.
|
|
|
|
19.6. Fixing problems in the install phase
|
|
|
|
19.6.1. Creating needed directories
|
|
|
|
The BSD-compatible install supplied with some operating systems cannot create
|
|
more than one directory at a time. As such, you should call ${INSTALL_*_DIR}
|
|
like this:
|
|
|
|
${INSTALL_DATA_DIR} ${PREFIX}/dir1
|
|
${INSTALL_DATA_DIR} ${PREFIX}/dir2
|
|
|
|
|
|
You can also just append "dir1 dir2" to the INSTALLATION_DIRS variable, which
|
|
will automatically do the right thing.
|
|
|
|
19.6.2. Where to install documentation
|
|
|
|
In general, documentation should be installed into ${PREFIX}/share/doc/$
|
|
{PKGBASE} or ${PREFIX}/share/doc/${PKGNAME} (the latter includes the version
|
|
number of the package).
|
|
|
|
Many modern packages using GNU autoconf allow to set the directory where HTML
|
|
documentation is installed with the "--with-html-dir" option. Sometimes using
|
|
this flag is needed because otherwise the documentation ends up in ${PREFIX}/
|
|
share/doc/html or other places.
|
|
|
|
An exception to the above is that library API documentation generated with the
|
|
textproc/gtk-doc tools, for use by special browsers (devhelp) should be left at
|
|
their default location, which is ${PREFIX}/share/gtk-doc. Such documentation
|
|
can be recognized from files ending in .devhelp or .devhelp2. (It is also
|
|
acceptable to install such files in ${PREFIX}/share/doc/${PKGBASE} or ${PREFIX}
|
|
/share/doc/${PKGNAME}; the .devhelp* file must be directly in that directory
|
|
then, no additional subdirectory level is allowed in this case. This is usually
|
|
achieved by using "--with-html-dir=${PREFIX}/share/doc". ${PREFIX}/share/
|
|
gtk-doc is preferred though.)
|
|
|
|
19.6.3. Installing highscore files
|
|
|
|
Certain packages, most of them in the games category, install a score file that
|
|
allows all users on the system to record their highscores. In order for this to
|
|
work, the binaries need to be installed setgid and the score files owned by the
|
|
appropriate group and/or owner (traditionally the "games" user/group). The
|
|
following variables, documented in more detail in mk/defaults/mk.conf, control
|
|
this behaviour: SETGIDGAME, GAMEDATAMODE, GAMEGRP, GAMEMODE, GAMEOWN.
|
|
|
|
Note that per default, setgid installation of games is disabled; setting
|
|
SETGIDGAME=YES will set all the other variables accordingly.
|
|
|
|
A package should therefore never hard code file ownership or access permissions
|
|
but rely on INSTALL_GAME and INSTALL_GAME_DATA to set these correctly.
|
|
|
|
19.6.4. Adding DESTDIR support to packages
|
|
|
|
DESTDIR support means that a package installs into a staging directory, not the
|
|
final location of the files. Then a binary package is created which can be used
|
|
for installation as usual. There are two ways: Either the package must install
|
|
as root ("destdir") or the package can install as non-root user
|
|
("user-destdir").
|
|
|
|
* PKG_DESTDIR_SUPPORT has to be set to "destdir" or "user-destdir". If
|
|
bsd.prefs.mk is included in the Makefile, PKG_DESTDIR_SUPPORT needs to be
|
|
set before the inclusion.
|
|
|
|
* All installation operations have to be prefixed with ${DESTDIR}.
|
|
|
|
* automake gets this DESTDIR mostly right automatically. Many manual rules
|
|
and pre/post-install often are incorrect; fix them.
|
|
|
|
* If files are installed with special owner/group either use @owner/@group in
|
|
the PLIST (preferred) or use SPECIAL_PERMS (discouraged). Note that @owner/
|
|
@group are sticky during install, keep this in mind.
|
|
|
|
* In general, packages should support UNPRIVILEGED to be able to use DESTDIR.
|
|
|
|
19.6.5. Packages with hardcoded paths to other interpreters
|
|
|
|
Your package may also contain scripts with hardcoded paths to other
|
|
interpreters besides (or as well as) perl. To correct the full pathname to the
|
|
script interpreter, you need to set the following definitions in your Makefile
|
|
(we shall use tclsh in this example):
|
|
|
|
REPLACE_INTERPRETER+= tcl
|
|
REPLACE.tcl.old= .*/bin/tclsh
|
|
REPLACE.tcl.new= ${PREFIX}/bin/tclsh
|
|
REPLACE_FILES.tcl= # list of tcl scripts which need to be fixed,
|
|
# relative to ${WRKSRC}, just as in REPLACE_PERL
|
|
|
|
|
|
Note
|
|
|
|
Before March 2006, these variables were called _REPLACE.* and _REPLACE_FILES.*.
|
|
|
|
19.6.6. Packages installing perl modules
|
|
|
|
Makefiles of packages providing perl5 modules should include the Makefile
|
|
fragment ../../lang/perl5/module.mk. It provides a do-configure target for the
|
|
standard perl configuration for such modules as well as various hooks to tune
|
|
this configuration. See comments in this file for details.
|
|
|
|
Perl5 modules will install into different places depending on the version of
|
|
perl used during the build process. To address this, pkgsrc will append lines
|
|
to the PLIST corresponding to the files listed in the installed .packlist file
|
|
generated by most perl5 modules. This is invoked by defining PERL5_PACKLIST to
|
|
a space-separated list of paths to packlist files, e.g.:
|
|
|
|
PERL5_PACKLIST= ${PERL5_SITEARCH}/auto/Pg/.packlist
|
|
|
|
|
|
The variables PERL5_SITELIB, PERL5_SITEARCH, and PERL5_ARCHLIB represent the
|
|
three locations in which perl5 modules may be installed, and may be used by
|
|
perl5 packages that don't have a packlist. These three variables are also
|
|
substituted for in the PLIST.
|
|
|
|
19.6.7. Packages installing info files
|
|
|
|
Some packages install info files or use the "makeinfo" or "install-info"
|
|
commands. INFO_FILES should be defined in the package Makefile so that INSTALL
|
|
and DEINSTALL scripts will be generated to handle registration of the info
|
|
files in the Info directory file. The "install-info" command used for the info
|
|
files registration is either provided by the system, or by a special purpose
|
|
package automatically added as dependency if needed.
|
|
|
|
PKGINFODIR is the directory under ${PREFIX} where info files are primarily
|
|
located. PKGINFODIR defaults to "info" and can be overridden by the user.
|
|
|
|
The info files for the package should be listed in the package PLIST; however
|
|
any split info files need not be listed.
|
|
|
|
A package which needs the "makeinfo" command at build time must add "makeinfo"
|
|
to USE_TOOLS in its Makefile. If a minimum version of the "makeinfo" command is
|
|
needed it should be noted with the TEXINFO_REQD variable in the package
|
|
Makefile. By default, a minimum version of 3.12 is required. If the system does
|
|
not provide a makeinfo command or if it does not match the required minimum, a
|
|
build dependency on the devel/gtexinfo package will be added automatically.
|
|
|
|
The build and installation process of the software provided by the package
|
|
should not use the install-info command as the registration of info files is
|
|
the task of the package INSTALL script, and it must use the appropriate
|
|
makeinfo command.
|
|
|
|
To achieve this goal, the pkgsrc infrastructure creates overriding scripts for
|
|
the install-info and makeinfo commands in a directory listed early in PATH.
|
|
|
|
The script overriding install-info has no effect except the logging of a
|
|
message. The script overriding makeinfo logs a message and according to the
|
|
value of TEXINFO_REQD either runs the appropriate makeinfo command or exit on
|
|
error.
|
|
|
|
19.6.8. Packages installing man pages
|
|
|
|
All packages that install manual pages should install them into the same
|
|
directory, so that there is one common place to look for them. In pkgsrc, this
|
|
place is ${PREFIX}/${PKGMANDIR}, and this expression should be used in
|
|
packages. The default for PKGMANDIR is "man". Another often-used value is
|
|
"share/man".
|
|
|
|
Note
|
|
|
|
The support for a custom PKGMANDIR is far from complete.
|
|
|
|
The PLIST files can just use man/ as the top level directory for the man page
|
|
file entries, and the pkgsrc framework will convert as needed. In all other
|
|
places, the correct PKGMANDIR must be used.
|
|
|
|
Packages that are configured with GNU_CONFIGURE set as "yes", by default will
|
|
use the ./configure --mandir switch to set where the man pages should be
|
|
installed. The path is GNU_CONFIGURE_MANDIR which defaults to ${PREFIX}/$
|
|
{PKGMANDIR}.
|
|
|
|
Packages that use GNU_CONFIGURE but do not use --mandir, can set
|
|
CONFIGURE_HAS_MANDIR to "no". Or if the ./configure script uses a non-standard
|
|
use of --mandir, you can set GNU_CONFIGURE_MANDIR as needed.
|
|
|
|
See Section 13.5, "Man page compression" for information on installation of
|
|
compressed manual pages.
|
|
|
|
19.6.9. Packages installing GConf data files
|
|
|
|
If a package installs .schemas or .entries files, used by GConf, you need to
|
|
take some extra steps to make sure they get registered in the database:
|
|
|
|
1. Include ../../devel/GConf/schemas.mk instead of its buildlink3.mk file.
|
|
This takes care of rebuilding the GConf database at installation and
|
|
deinstallation time, and tells the package where to install GConf data
|
|
files using some standard configure arguments. It also disallows any access
|
|
to the database directly from the package.
|
|
|
|
2. Ensure that the package installs its .schemas files under ${PREFIX}/share/
|
|
gconf/schemas. If they get installed under ${PREFIX}/etc, you will need to
|
|
manually patch the package.
|
|
|
|
3. Check the PLIST and remove any entries under the etc/gconf directory, as
|
|
they will be handled automatically. See Section 9.13, "How do I change the
|
|
location of configuration files?" for more information.
|
|
|
|
4. Define the GCONF_SCHEMAS variable in your Makefile with a list of all
|
|
.schemas files installed by the package, if any. Names must not contain any
|
|
directories in them.
|
|
|
|
5. Define the GCONF_ENTRIES variable in your Makefile with a list of all
|
|
.entries files installed by the package, if any. Names must not contain any
|
|
directories in them.
|
|
|
|
19.6.10. Packages installing scrollkeeper data files
|
|
|
|
If a package installs .omf files, used by scrollkeeper, you need to take some
|
|
extra steps to make sure they get registered in the database:
|
|
|
|
1. Include ../../textproc/rarian/omf.mk instead of its buildlink3.mk
|
|
file. This takes care of rebuilding the scrollkeeper database at
|
|
installation and deinstallation time, and disallows any access to it
|
|
directly from the package.
|
|
|
|
2. Check the PLIST and remove any entries under the libdata/scrollkeeper
|
|
directory, as they will be handled automatically.
|
|
|
|
3. Remove the share/omf directory from the PLIST. It will be handled by
|
|
scrollkeeper.
|
|
|
|
19.6.11. Packages installing X11 fonts
|
|
|
|
If a package installs font files, you will need to rebuild the fonts database
|
|
in the directory where they get installed at installation and deinstallation
|
|
time. This can be automatically done by using the pkginstall framework.
|
|
|
|
You can list the directories where fonts are installed in the FONTS_DIRS.type
|
|
variables, where type can be one of "ttf", "type1" or "x11". Also make sure
|
|
that the database file fonts.dir is not listed in the PLIST.
|
|
|
|
Note that you should not create new directories for fonts; instead use the
|
|
standard ones to avoid that the user needs to manually configure his X server
|
|
to find them.
|
|
|
|
19.6.12. Packages installing GTK2 modules
|
|
|
|
If a package installs GTK2 immodules or loaders, you need to take some extra
|
|
steps to get them registered in the GTK2 database properly:
|
|
|
|
1. Include ../../x11/gtk2/modules.mk instead of its buildlink3.mk file. This
|
|
takes care of rebuilding the database at installation and deinstallation
|
|
time.
|
|
|
|
2. Set GTK2_IMMODULES=YES if your package installs GTK2 immodules.
|
|
|
|
3. Set GTK2_LOADERS=YES if your package installs GTK2 loaders.
|
|
|
|
4. Patch the package to not touch any of the GTK2 databases directly. These
|
|
are:
|
|
|
|
* libdata/gtk-2.0/gdk-pixbuf.loaders
|
|
|
|
* libdata/gtk-2.0/gtk.immodules
|
|
|
|
5. Check the PLIST and remove any entries under the libdata/gtk-2.0 directory,
|
|
as they will be handled automatically.
|
|
|
|
19.6.13. Packages installing SGML or XML data
|
|
|
|
If a package installs SGML or XML data files that need to be registered in
|
|
system-wide catalogs (like DTDs, sub-catalogs, etc.), you need to take some
|
|
extra steps:
|
|
|
|
1. Include ../../textproc/xmlcatmgr/catalogs.mk in your Makefile, which takes
|
|
care of registering those files in system-wide catalogs at installation and
|
|
deinstallation time.
|
|
|
|
2. Set SGML_CATALOGS to the full path of any SGML catalogs installed by the
|
|
package.
|
|
|
|
3. Set XML_CATALOGS to the full path of any XML catalogs installed by the
|
|
package.
|
|
|
|
4. Set SGML_ENTRIES to individual entries to be added to the SGML catalog.
|
|
These come in groups of three strings; see xmlcatmgr(1) for more
|
|
information (specifically, arguments recognized by the 'add' action). Note
|
|
that you will normally not use this variable.
|
|
|
|
5. Set XML_ENTRIES to individual entries to be added to the XML catalog. These
|
|
come in groups of three strings; see xmlcatmgr(1) for more information
|
|
(specifically, arguments recognized by the 'add' action). Note that you
|
|
will normally not use this variable.
|
|
|
|
19.6.14. Packages installing extensions to the MIME database
|
|
|
|
If a package provides extensions to the MIME database by installing .xml files
|
|
inside ${PREFIX}/share/mime/packages, you need to take some extra steps to
|
|
ensure that the database is kept consistent with respect to these new files:
|
|
|
|
1. Include ../../databases/shared-mime-info/mimedb.mk (avoid using the
|
|
buildlink3.mk file from this same directory, which is reserved for
|
|
inclusion from other buildlink3.mk files). It takes care of rebuilding the
|
|
MIME database at installation and deinstallation time, and disallows any
|
|
access to it directly from the package.
|
|
|
|
2. Check the PLIST and remove any entries under the share/mime directory,
|
|
except for files saved under share/mime/packages. The former are handled
|
|
automatically by the update-mime-database program, but the latter are
|
|
package-dependent and must be removed by the package that installed them in
|
|
the first place.
|
|
|
|
3. Remove any share/mime/* directories from the PLIST. They will be handled by
|
|
the shared-mime-info package.
|
|
|
|
19.6.15. Packages using intltool
|
|
|
|
If a package uses intltool during its build, add intltool to the USE_TOOLS,
|
|
which forces it to use the intltool package provided by pkgsrc, instead of the
|
|
one bundled with the distribution file.
|
|
|
|
This tracks intltool's build-time dependencies and uses the latest available
|
|
version; this way, the package benefits of any bug fixes that may have appeared
|
|
since it was released.
|
|
|
|
19.6.16. Packages installing startup scripts
|
|
|
|
If a package contains a rc.d script, it won't be copied into the startup
|
|
directory by default, but you can enable it, by adding the option
|
|
PKG_RCD_SCRIPTS=YES in mk.conf. This option will copy the scripts into /etc/
|
|
rc.d when a package is installed, and it will automatically remove the scripts
|
|
when the package is deinstalled.
|
|
|
|
19.6.17. Packages installing TeX modules
|
|
|
|
If a package installs TeX packages into the texmf tree, the ls-R database of
|
|
the tree needs to be updated.
|
|
|
|
Note
|
|
|
|
Except the main TeX packages such as teTeX-texmf, packages should install files
|
|
into PKG_LOCALTEXMFPREFIX, not PKG_TEXMFPREFIX.
|
|
|
|
1. Include ../../print/teTeX/module.mk instead of ../../mk/tex.buildlink3.mk.
|
|
This takes care of rebuilding the ls-R database at installation and
|
|
deinstallation time.
|
|
|
|
2. If your package installs files into a texmf tree other than the one at
|
|
PKG_LOCALTEXMFPREFIX, set TEXMFDIRS to the list of all texmf trees that
|
|
need database update.
|
|
|
|
If your package also installs font map files that need to be registered
|
|
using updmap, set TEX_FONTMAPS to the list of all such font map files. Then
|
|
updmap will be run automatically at installation/deinstallation to enable/
|
|
disable font map files for TeX output drivers.
|
|
|
|
3. Make sure that none of ls-R databases are included in PLIST, as they will
|
|
be removed only by the teTeX-bin package.
|
|
|
|
19.6.18. Packages supporting running binaries in emulation
|
|
|
|
There are some packages that provide libraries and executables for running
|
|
binaries from a one operating system on a different one (if the latter supports
|
|
it). One example is running Linux binaries on NetBSD.
|
|
|
|
The pkgtools/rpm2pkg helps in extracting and packaging Linux rpm packages.
|
|
|
|
The CHECK_SHLIBS can be set to no to avoid the check-shlibs target, which tests
|
|
if all libraries for each installed executable can be found by the dynamic
|
|
linker. Since the standard dynamic linker is run, this fails for emulation
|
|
packages, because the libraries used by the emulation are not in the standard
|
|
directories.
|
|
|
|
19.6.19. Packages installing hicolor theme icons
|
|
|
|
If a package installs images under the share/icons/hicolor and/or updates the
|
|
share/icons/hicolor/icon-theme.cache database, you need to take some extra
|
|
steps to make sure that the shared theme directory is handled appropriately and
|
|
that the cache database is rebuilt:
|
|
|
|
1. Include ../../graphics/hicolor-icon-theme/buildlink3.mk.
|
|
|
|
2. Check the PLIST and remove the entry that refers to the theme cache.
|
|
|
|
3. Ensure that the PLIST does not remove the shared icon directories from the
|
|
share/icons/hicolor hierarchy because they will be handled automatically.
|
|
|
|
The best way to verify that the PLIST is correct with respect to the last two
|
|
points is to regenerate it using make print-PLIST.
|
|
|
|
19.6.20. Packages installing desktop files
|
|
|
|
If a package installs .desktop files under share/applications and these include
|
|
MIME information, you need to take extra steps to ensure that they are
|
|
registered into the MIME database:
|
|
|
|
1. Include ../../sysutils/desktop-file-utils/desktopdb.mk.
|
|
|
|
2. Check the PLIST and remove the entry that refers to the share/applications/
|
|
mimeinfo.cache file. It will be handled automatically.
|
|
|
|
The best way to verify that the PLIST is correct with respect to the last point
|
|
is to regenerate it using make print-PLIST.
|
|
|
|
19.7. Marking packages as having problems
|
|
|
|
In some cases one does not have the time to solve a problem immediately. There
|
|
are currently two ways to declare that one knows that a package has problems.
|
|
|
|
* The first way is to plainly mark it as broken. For this, one just sets the
|
|
variable BROKEN to the reason why the package is broken (similar to the
|
|
RESTRICTED variable). A user trying to build the package will immediately
|
|
be shown this message, and the build will not be even tried.
|
|
|
|
* After each pkgsrc freeze period (a time when the tree is stabilized and a
|
|
new pkgsrc branch is cut), the packages that were not building in the
|
|
official branch build on the latest NetBSD release will be marked as broken
|
|
on that branch. This is done by setting the BROKEN_IN variable to the
|
|
branch name (or appending the branch name to it). If a user tries to build
|
|
such a package and the build fails, the user gets a message that says that
|
|
the package was broken on the respective branch(es).
|
|
|
|
Both types of packages are removed from pkgsrc in irregular intervals.
|
|
|
|
Chapter 20. Debugging
|
|
|
|
To check out all the gotchas when building a package, here are the steps that I
|
|
do in order to get a package working. Please note this is basically the same as
|
|
what was explained in the previous sections, only with some debugging aids.
|
|
|
|
* Be sure to set PKG_DEVELOPER=yes in mk.conf.
|
|
|
|
* Install pkgtools/url2pkg, create a directory for a new package, change into
|
|
it, then run url2pkg:
|
|
|
|
% mkdir /usr/pkgsrc/category/examplepkg
|
|
% cd /usr/pkgsrc/category/examplepkg
|
|
% url2pkg http://www.example.com/path/to/distfile.tar.gz
|
|
|
|
* Edit the Makefile as requested.
|
|
|
|
* Fill in the DESCR file
|
|
|
|
* Run make configure
|
|
|
|
* Add any dependencies glimpsed from documentation and the configure step to
|
|
the package's Makefile.
|
|
|
|
* Make the package compile, doing multiple rounds of
|
|
|
|
% make
|
|
% pkgvi ${WRKSRC}/some/file/that/does/not/compile
|
|
% mkpatches
|
|
% patchdiff
|
|
% mv ${WRKDIR}/.newpatches/* patches
|
|
% make mps
|
|
% make clean
|
|
|
|
Doing this step as non-root user will ensure that no files are modified
|
|
that shouldn't be, especially during the build phase. mkpatches, patchdiff
|
|
and pkgvi are from the pkgtools/pkgdiff package.
|
|
|
|
* Look at the Makefile, fix if necessary; see Section 11.1, "Makefile".
|
|
|
|
* Generate a PLIST:
|
|
|
|
# make install
|
|
# make print-PLIST >PLIST
|
|
# make deinstall
|
|
# make install
|
|
# make deinstall
|
|
|
|
You usually need to be root to do this. Look if there are any files left:
|
|
|
|
# make print-PLIST
|
|
|
|
If this reveals any files that are missing in PLIST, add them.
|
|
|
|
* Now that the PLIST is OK, install the package again and make a binary
|
|
package:
|
|
|
|
# make reinstall
|
|
# make package
|
|
|
|
* Delete the installed package:
|
|
|
|
# pkg_delete examplepkg
|
|
|
|
* Repeat the above make print-PLIST command, which shouldn't find anything
|
|
now:
|
|
|
|
# make print-PLIST
|
|
|
|
* Reinstall the binary package:
|
|
|
|
# pkg_add .../examplepkg.tgz
|
|
|
|
* Play with it. Make sure everything works.
|
|
|
|
* Run pkglint from pkgtools/pkglint, and fix the problems it reports:
|
|
|
|
# pkglint
|
|
|
|
* Submit (or commit, if you have cvs access); see Chapter 21, Submitting and
|
|
Committing.
|
|
|
|
Chapter 21. Submitting and Committing
|
|
|
|
Table of Contents
|
|
|
|
21.1. Submitting binary packages
|
|
21.2. Submitting source packages (for non-NetBSD-developers)
|
|
21.3. General notes when adding, updating, or removing packages
|
|
21.4. Committing: Importing a package into CVS
|
|
21.5. Updating a package to a newer version
|
|
21.6. Moving a package in pkgsrc
|
|
|
|
21.1. Submitting binary packages
|
|
|
|
Our policy is that we accept binaries only from pkgsrc developers to guarantee
|
|
that the packages don't contain any trojan horses etc. This is not to annoy
|
|
anyone but rather to protect our users! You're still free to put up your
|
|
home-made binary packages and tell the world where to get them. NetBSD
|
|
developers doing bulk builds and wanting to upload them please see
|
|
Section 7.3.8, "Uploading results of a bulk build".
|
|
|
|
21.2. Submitting source packages (for non-NetBSD-developers)
|
|
|
|
First, check that your package is complete, compiles and runs well; see
|
|
Chapter 20, Debugging and the rest of this document. Next, generate an
|
|
uuencoded gzipped tar(1) archive that contains all files that make up the
|
|
package. Finally, send this package to the pkgsrc bug tracking system, either
|
|
with the send-pr(1) command, or if you don't have that, go to the web page
|
|
http://www.NetBSD.org/support/send-pr.html, which contains some instructions
|
|
and a link to a form, where you can submit packages.
|
|
|
|
In the form of the problem report, the category should be "pkg", the synopsis
|
|
should include the package name and version number, and the description field
|
|
should contain a short description of your package (contents of the COMMENT
|
|
variable or DESCR file are OK). The uuencoded package data should go into the
|
|
"fix" field.
|
|
|
|
If you want to submit several packages, please send a separate PR for each one,
|
|
it's easier for us to track things that way.
|
|
|
|
Alternatively, you can also import new packages into pkgsrc-wip ("pkgsrc
|
|
work-in-progress"); see the homepage at http://pkgsrc-wip.sourceforge.net/ for
|
|
details.
|
|
|
|
21.3. General notes when adding, updating, or removing packages
|
|
|
|
Please note all package additions, updates, moves, and removals in pkgsrc/doc/
|
|
CHANGES-YYYY. It's very important to keep this file up to date and conforming
|
|
to the existing format, because it will be used by scripts to automatically
|
|
update pages on www.NetBSD.org and other sites. Additionally, check the pkgsrc/
|
|
doc/TODO file and remove the entry for the package you updated or removed, in
|
|
case it was mentioned there.
|
|
|
|
When the PKGREVISION of a package is bumped, the change should appear in pkgsrc
|
|
/doc/CHANGES-YYYY if it is security related or otherwise relevant. Mass bumps
|
|
that result from a dependency being updated should not be mentioned. In all
|
|
other cases it's the developer's decision.
|
|
|
|
There is a make target that helps in creating proper CHANGES-YYYY entries: make
|
|
changes-entry. It uses the optional CTYPE and NETBSD_LOGIN_NAME variables. The
|
|
general usage is to first make sure that your CHANGES-YYYY file is up-to-date
|
|
(to avoid having to resolve conflicts later-on) and then to cd to the package
|
|
directory. For package updates, make changes-entry is enough. For new packages,
|
|
or package moves or removals, set the CTYPE variable on the command line to
|
|
"Added", "Moved", or "Removed". You can set NETBSD_LOGIN_NAME in mk.conf if
|
|
your local login name is not the same as your NetBSD login name. Don't forget
|
|
to commit the changes to pkgsrc/doc/CHANGES-YYYY!
|
|
|
|
21.4. Committing: Importing a package into CVS
|
|
|
|
This section is only of interest for pkgsrc developers with write access to the
|
|
pkgsrc repository. Please remember that cvs imports files relative to the
|
|
current working directory, and that the pathname that you give the cvs import
|
|
command is so that it knows where to place the files in the repository. Newly
|
|
created packages should be imported with a vendor tag of "TNF" and a release
|
|
tag of "pkgsrc-base", e.g:
|
|
|
|
$ cd .../pkgsrc/category/pkgname
|
|
$ cvs import pkgsrc/category/pkgname TNF pkgsrc-base
|
|
|
|
Remember to move the directory from which you imported out of the way, or cvs
|
|
will complain the next time you "cvs update" your source tree. Also don't
|
|
forget to add the new package to the category's Makefile.
|
|
|
|
The commit message of the initial import should include part of the DESCR file,
|
|
so people reading the mailing lists know what the package is/does.
|
|
|
|
For new packages, "cvs import" is preferred to "cvs add" because the former
|
|
gets everything with a single command, and provides a consistent tag.
|
|
|
|
21.5. Updating a package to a newer version
|
|
|
|
Please always put a concise, appropriate and relevant summary of the changes
|
|
between old and new versions into the commit log when updating a package. There
|
|
are various reasons for this:
|
|
|
|
* A URL is volatile, and can change over time. It may go away completely or
|
|
its information may be overwritten by newer information.
|
|
|
|
* Having the change information between old and new versions in our CVS
|
|
repository is very useful for people who use either cvs or anoncvs.
|
|
|
|
* Having the change information between old and new versions in our CVS
|
|
repository is very useful for people who read the pkgsrc-changes mailing
|
|
list, so that they can make tactical decisions about when to upgrade the
|
|
package.
|
|
|
|
Please also recognize that, just because a new version of a package has been
|
|
released, it should not automatically be upgraded in the CVS repository. We
|
|
prefer to be conservative in the packages that are included in pkgsrc -
|
|
development or beta packages are not really the best thing for most places in
|
|
which pkgsrc is used. Please use your judgement about what should go into
|
|
pkgsrc, and bear in mind that stability is to be preferred above new and
|
|
possibly untested features.
|
|
|
|
21.6. Moving a package in pkgsrc
|
|
|
|
1. Make a copy of the directory somewhere else.
|
|
|
|
2. Remove all CVS dirs.
|
|
|
|
Alternatively to the first two steps you can also do:
|
|
|
|
% cvs -d user@cvs.NetBSD.org:/cvsroot export -D today pkgsrc/category/package
|
|
|
|
and use that for further work.
|
|
|
|
3. Fix CATEGORIES and any DEPENDS paths that just did "../package" instead of
|
|
"../../category/package".
|
|
|
|
4. cvs import the modified package in the new place.
|
|
|
|
5. Check if any package depends on it:
|
|
|
|
% cd /usr/pkgsrc
|
|
% grep /package */*/Makefile* */*/buildlink*
|
|
|
|
6. Fix paths in packages from step 5 to point to new location.
|
|
|
|
7. cvs rm (-f) the package at the old location.
|
|
|
|
8. Remove from oldcategory/Makefile.
|
|
|
|
9. Add to newcategory/Makefile.
|
|
|
|
10. Commit the changed and removed files:
|
|
|
|
% cvs commit oldcategory/package oldcategory/Makefile newcategory/Makefile
|
|
|
|
(and any packages from step 5, of course).
|
|
|
|
Chapter 22. Frequently Asked Questions
|
|
|
|
This section contains the answers to questions that may arise when you are
|
|
writing a package. If you don't find your question answered here, first have a
|
|
look in the other chapters, and if you still don't have the answer, ask on the
|
|
pkgsrc-users mailing list.
|
|
|
|
22.1. What is the difference between MAKEFLAGS, .MAKEFLAGS and MAKE_FLAGS?
|
|
22.2. What is the difference between MAKE, GMAKE and MAKE_PROGRAM?
|
|
22.3. What is the difference between CC, PKG_CC and PKGSRC_COMPILER?
|
|
22.4. What is the difference between BUILDLINK_LDFLAGS, BUILDLINK_LDADD and
|
|
BUILDLINK_LIBS?
|
|
22.5. Why does make show-var VARNAME=BUILDLINK_PREFIX.foo say it's empty?
|
|
22.6. What does ${MASTER_SITE_SOURCEFORGE:=package/} mean? I don't understand
|
|
the := inside it.
|
|
22.7. Which mailing lists are there for package developers?
|
|
22.8. Where is the pkgsrc documentation?
|
|
22.9. I have a little time to kill. What shall I do?
|
|
|
|
22.1. What is the difference between MAKEFLAGS, .MAKEFLAGS and MAKE_FLAGS?
|
|
|
|
MAKEFLAGS are the flags passed to the pkgsrc-internal invocations of make
|
|
(1), while MAKE_FLAGS are the flags that are passed to the MAKE_PROGRAM
|
|
when building the package. [FIXME: What is .MAKEFLAGS for?]
|
|
|
|
22.2. What is the difference between MAKE, GMAKE and MAKE_PROGRAM?
|
|
|
|
MAKE is the path to the make(1) program that is used in the pkgsrc
|
|
infrastructure. GMAKE is the path to GNU Make, but you need to say
|
|
USE_TOOLS+=gmake to use that. MAKE_PROGRAM is the path to the Make
|
|
program that is used for building the package.
|
|
|
|
22.3. What is the difference between CC, PKG_CC and PKGSRC_COMPILER?
|
|
|
|
CC is the path to the real C compiler, which can be configured by the
|
|
pkgsrc user. PKG_CC is the path to the compiler wrapper. PKGSRC_COMPILER
|
|
is not a path to a compiler, but the type of compiler that should be
|
|
used. See mk/compiler.mk for more information about the latter variable.
|
|
|
|
22.4. What is the difference between BUILDLINK_LDFLAGS, BUILDLINK_LDADD and
|
|
BUILDLINK_LIBS?
|
|
|
|
[FIXME]
|
|
|
|
22.5. Why does make show-var VARNAME=BUILDLINK_PREFIX.foo say it's empty?
|
|
|
|
For optimization reasons, some variables are only available in the
|
|
"wrapper" phase and later. To "simulate" the wrapper phase, append
|
|
PKG_PHASE=wrapper to the above command.
|
|
|
|
22.6. What does ${MASTER_SITE_SOURCEFORGE:=package/} mean? I don't understand
|
|
the := inside it.
|
|
|
|
The := is not really an assignment operator, like you might expect at
|
|
first sight. Instead, it is a degenerate form of ${LIST:old_string=
|
|
new_string}, which is documented in the make(1) man page and which you
|
|
may have seen as in ${SRCS:.c=.o}. In the case of MASTER_SITE_*,
|
|
old_string is the empty string and new_string is package/. That's where
|
|
the : and the = fall together.
|
|
|
|
22.7. Which mailing lists are there for package developers?
|
|
|
|
tech-pkg
|
|
|
|
This is a list for technical discussions related to pkgsrc
|
|
development, e.g. soliciting feedback for changes to pkgsrc
|
|
infrastructure, proposed new features, questions related to porting
|
|
pkgsrc to a new platform, advice for maintaining a package, patches
|
|
that affect many packages, help requests moved from pkgsrc-users when
|
|
an infrastructure bug is found, etc.
|
|
|
|
pkgsrc-bugs
|
|
|
|
All bug reports in category "pkg" sent with send-pr(1) appear here.
|
|
Please do not report your bugs here directly; use one of the other
|
|
mailing lists.
|
|
|
|
22.8. Where is the pkgsrc documentation?
|
|
|
|
There are many places where you can find documentation about pkgsrc:
|
|
|
|
* The pkgsrc guide (this document) is a collection of chapters that
|
|
explain large parts of pkgsrc, but some chapters tend to be outdated.
|
|
Which ones they are is hard to say.
|
|
|
|
* On the mailing list archives (see http://mail-index.NetBSD.org/), you
|
|
can find discussions about certain features, announcements of new
|
|
parts of the pkgsrc infrastructure and sometimes even announcements
|
|
that a certain feature has been marked as obsolete. The benefit here
|
|
is that each message has a date appended to it.
|
|
|
|
* Many of the files in the mk/ directory start with a comment that
|
|
describes the purpose of the file and how it can be used by the
|
|
pkgsrc user and package authors. An easy way to find this
|
|
documentation is to run bmake help.
|
|
|
|
* The CVS log messages are a rich source of information, but they tend
|
|
to be highly abbreviated, especially for actions that occur often.
|
|
Some contain a detailed description of what has changed, but they are
|
|
geared towards the other pkgsrc developers, not towards an average
|
|
pkgsrc user. They also only document changes, so if you don't know
|
|
what has been before, these messages may not be worth too much to
|
|
you.
|
|
|
|
* Some parts of pkgsrc are only "implicitly documented", that is the
|
|
documentation exists only in the mind of the developer who wrote the
|
|
code. To get this information, use the cvs annotate command to see
|
|
who has written it and ask on the tech-pkg mailing list, so that
|
|
others can find your questions later (see above). To be sure that the
|
|
developer in charge reads the mail, you may CC him or her.
|
|
|
|
22.9. I have a little time to kill. What shall I do?
|
|
|
|
This is not really an FAQ yet, but here's the answer anyway.
|
|
|
|
* Run pkg_chk -N (from the pkgtools/pkg_chk package). It will tell you
|
|
about newer versions of installed packages that are available, but
|
|
not yet updated in pkgsrc.
|
|
|
|
* Browse pkgsrc/doc/TODO ? it contains a list of suggested new packages
|
|
and a list of cleanups and enhancements for pkgsrc that would be nice
|
|
to have.
|
|
|
|
* Review packages for which review was requested on the pkgsrc-wip
|
|
review mailing list.
|
|
|
|
Chapter 23. GNOME packaging and porting
|
|
|
|
Table of Contents
|
|
|
|
23.1. Meta packages
|
|
23.2. Packaging a GNOME application
|
|
23.3. Updating GNOME to a newer version
|
|
23.4. Patching guidelines
|
|
|
|
Quoting GNOME's web site:
|
|
|
|
The GNOME project provides two things: The GNOME desktop environment, an
|
|
intuitive and attractive desktop for users, and the GNOME development
|
|
platform, an extensive framework for building applications that integrate
|
|
into the rest of the desktop.
|
|
|
|
pkgsrc provides a seamless way to automatically build and install a complete
|
|
GNOME environment under many different platforms. We can say with confidence
|
|
that pkgsrc is one of the most advanced build and packaging systems for GNOME
|
|
due to its included technologies buildlink3, the wrappers and tools framework
|
|
and automatic configuration file management. Lots of efforts are put into
|
|
achieving a completely clean deinstallation of installed software components.
|
|
|
|
Given that pkgsrc is NetBSD's official packaging system, the above also means
|
|
that great efforts are put into making GNOME work under this operating system.
|
|
Recently, DragonFly BSD also adopted pkgsrc as its preferred packaging system,
|
|
contributing lots of portability fixes to make GNOME build and install under
|
|
it.
|
|
|
|
This chapter is aimed at pkgsrc developers and other people interested in
|
|
helping our GNOME porting and packaging efforts. It provides instructions on
|
|
how to manage the existing packages and some important information regarding
|
|
their internals.
|
|
|
|
We need your help!
|
|
|
|
Should you have some spare cycles to devote to NetBSD, pkgsrc and GNOME and are
|
|
willing to learn new exciting stuff, please jump straight to the pending work
|
|
list! There is still a long way to go to get a fully-functional GNOME desktop
|
|
under NetBSD and we need your help to achieve it!
|
|
|
|
23.1. Meta packages
|
|
|
|
pkgsrc includes three GNOME-related meta packages:
|
|
|
|
* meta-pkgs/gnome-base: Provides the core GNOME desktop environment. It only
|
|
includes the necessary bits to get it to boot correctly, although it may
|
|
lack important functionality for daily operation. The idea behind this
|
|
package is to let end users build their own configurations on top of this
|
|
one, first installing this meta package to achieve a functional setup and
|
|
then adding individual applications.
|
|
|
|
* meta-pkgs/gnome: Provides a complete installation of the GNOME platform and
|
|
desktop as defined by the GNOME project; this is based on the components
|
|
distributed in the platform/x.y/x.y.z/sources and desktop/x.y/x.y.z/sources
|
|
directories of the official FTP server. Developer-only tools found in those
|
|
directories are not installed unless required by some other component to
|
|
work properly. Similarly, packages from the bindings set (bindings/x.y/
|
|
x.y.z/sources) are not pulled in unless required as a dependency for an
|
|
end-user component. This package "extends" meta-pkgs/gnome-base.
|
|
|
|
* meta-pkgs/gnome-devel: Installs all the tools required to build a GNOME
|
|
component when fetched from the CVS repository. These are required to let
|
|
the autogen.sh scripts work appropriately.
|
|
|
|
In all these packages, the DEPENDS lines are sorted in a way that eases
|
|
updates: a package may depend on other packages listed before it but not on any
|
|
listed after it. It is very important to keep this order to ease updates so...
|
|
do not change it to alphabetical sorting!
|
|
|
|
23.2. Packaging a GNOME application
|
|
|
|
Almost all GNOME applications are written in C and use a common set of tools as
|
|
their build system. Things get different with the new bindings to other
|
|
languages (such as Python), but the following will give you a general idea on
|
|
the minimum required tools:
|
|
|
|
* Almost all GNOME applications use the GNU Autotools as their build system.
|
|
As a general rule you will need to tell this to your package:
|
|
|
|
GNU_CONFIGURE=yes
|
|
USE_LIBTOOL=yes
|
|
USE_TOOLS+=gmake
|
|
|
|
* If the package uses pkg-config to detect dependencies, add this tool to the
|
|
list of required utilities:
|
|
|
|
USE_TOOLS+=pkg-config
|
|
|
|
Also use pkgtools/verifypc at the end of the build process to ensure that
|
|
you did not miss to specify any dependency in your package and that the
|
|
version requirements are all correct.
|
|
|
|
* If the package uses intltool, be sure to add intltool to the USE_TOOLS to
|
|
handle dependencies and to force the package to use the latest available
|
|
version.
|
|
|
|
* If the package uses gtk-doc (a documentation generation utility), do not
|
|
add a dependency on it. The tool is rather big and the distfile should come
|
|
with pregenerated documentation anyway; if it does not, it is a bug that
|
|
you ought to report. For such packages you should disable gtk-doc (unless
|
|
it is the default):
|
|
|
|
CONFIGURE_ARGS+=--disable-gtk-doc
|
|
|
|
The default location of installed HTML files (share/gtk-doc/<package-name>)
|
|
is correct and should not be changed unless the package insists on
|
|
installing them somewhere else. Otherwise programs as devhelp will not be
|
|
able to open them. You can do that with an entry similar to:
|
|
|
|
CONFIGURE_ARGS+=--with-html-dir=${PREFIX}/share/gtk-doc/...
|
|
|
|
GNOME uses multiple shared directories and files under the installation prefix
|
|
to maintain databases. In this context, shared means that those exact same
|
|
directories and files are used among several different packages, leading to
|
|
conflicts in the PLIST. pkgsrc currently includes functionality to handle the
|
|
most common cases, so you have to forget about using @unexec ${RMDIR} lines in
|
|
your file lists and omitting shared files from them. If you find yourself doing
|
|
those, your package is most likely incorrect.
|
|
|
|
The following table lists the common situations that result in using shared
|
|
directories or files. For each of them, the appropriate solution is given.
|
|
After applying the solution be sure to regenerate the package's file list with
|
|
make print-PLIST and ensure it is correct.
|
|
|
|
Table 23.1. PLIST handling for GNOME packages
|
|
|
|
+-----------------------------------------------------------------------------+
|
|
| If the package... | Then... |
|
|
|-------------------------------------------+---------------------------------|
|
|
| |See Section 19.6.10, "Packages |
|
|
|Installs OMF files under share/omf. |installing scrollkeeper data |
|
|
| |files". |
|
|
|-------------------------------------------+---------------------------------|
|
|
|Installs icons under the share/icons/ |See Section 19.6.19, "Packages |
|
|
|hicolor hierarchy or updates share/icons/ |installing hicolor theme icons". |
|
|
|hicolor/icon-theme.cache. | |
|
|
|-------------------------------------------+---------------------------------|
|
|
| |See Section 19.6.14, "Packages |
|
|
|Installs files under share/mime/packages. |installing extensions to the MIME|
|
|
| |database". |
|
|
|-------------------------------------------+---------------------------------|
|
|
|Installs .desktop files under share/ |See Section 19.6.20, "Packages |
|
|
|applications and these include MIME |installing desktop files". |
|
|
|information. | |
|
|
+-----------------------------------------------------------------------------+
|
|
|
|
|
|
23.3. Updating GNOME to a newer version
|
|
|
|
When seeing GNOME as a whole, there are two kinds of updates:
|
|
|
|
Major update
|
|
|
|
Given that there is still a very long way for GNOME 3 (if it ever appears),
|
|
we consider a major update one that goes from a 2.X version to a 2.Y one,
|
|
where Y is even and greater than X. These are hard to achieve because they
|
|
introduce lots of changes in the components' code and almost all GNOME
|
|
distfiles are updated to newer versions. Some of them can even break API
|
|
and ABI compatibility with the previous major version series. As a result,
|
|
the update needs to be done all at once to minimize breakage.
|
|
|
|
A major update typically consists of around 80 package updates and the
|
|
addition of some new ones.
|
|
|
|
Minor update
|
|
|
|
We consider a minor update one that goes from a 2.A.X version to a 2.A.Y
|
|
one where Y is greater than X. These are easy to achieve because they do
|
|
not update all GNOME components, can be done in an incremental way and do
|
|
not break API nor ABI compatibility.
|
|
|
|
A minor update typically consists of around 50 package updates, although
|
|
the numbers here may vary a lot.
|
|
|
|
In order to update the GNOME components in pkgsrc to a new stable release
|
|
(either major or minor), the following steps should be followed:
|
|
|
|
1. Get a list of all the tarballs that form the new release by using the
|
|
following commands. These will leave the full list of the components's
|
|
distfiles into the list.txt file:
|
|
|
|
% echo ls "*.tar.bz2" | \
|
|
ftp -V ftp://ftp.gnome.org/pub/gnome/platform/x.y/x.y.z/sources/ | \
|
|
awk '{ print $9 }' >list.txt
|
|
% echo ls "*.tar.bz2" | \
|
|
ftp -V ftp://ftp.gnome.org/pub/gnome/desktop/x.y/x.y.z/sources/ | \
|
|
awk '{ print $9 }' >>list.txt
|
|
|
|
2. Open each meta package's Makefile and bump their version to the release you
|
|
are updating them to. The three meta packages should be always consistent
|
|
with versioning. Obviously remove any PKGREVISIONs that might be in them.
|
|
|
|
3. For each meta package, update all its DEPENDS lines to match the latest
|
|
versions as shown by the above commands. Do not list any newer version
|
|
(even if found in the FTP) because the meta packages are supposed to list
|
|
the exact versions that form a specific GNOME release. Exceptions are
|
|
permitted here if a newer version solves a serious issue in the overall
|
|
desktop experience; these typically come in the form of a revision bump in
|
|
pkgsrc, not in newer versions from the developers.
|
|
|
|
Packages not listed in the list.txt file should be updated to the latest
|
|
version available (if found in pkgsrc). This is the case, for example, of
|
|
the dependencies on the GNU Autotools in the meta-pkgs/gnome-devel meta
|
|
package.
|
|
|
|
4. Generate a patch from the modified meta packages and extract the list of
|
|
"new" lines. This will provide you an outline on what packages need to be
|
|
updated in pkgsrc and in what order:
|
|
|
|
% cvs diff -u gnome-devel gnome-base gnome | grep '^+D' >todo.txt
|
|
|
|
5. For major desktop updates it is recommended to zap all your installed
|
|
packages and start over from scratch at this point.
|
|
|
|
6. Now comes the longest step by far: iterate over the contents of todo.txt
|
|
and update the packages listed in it in order. For major desktop updates
|
|
none of these should be committed until the entire set is completed because
|
|
there are chances of breaking not-yet-updated packages.
|
|
|
|
7. Once the packages are up to date and working, commit them to the tree one
|
|
by one with appropriate log messages. At the end, commit the three meta
|
|
package updates and all the corresponding changes to the doc/CHANGES-<YEAR>
|
|
and pkgsrc/doc/TODO files.
|
|
|
|
23.4. Patching guidelines
|
|
|
|
GNOME is a very big component in pkgsrc which approaches 100 packages. Please,
|
|
it is very important that you always, always, always feed back any portability
|
|
fixes you do to a GNOME package to the mainstream developers (see
|
|
Section 11.3.5, "Feedback to the author"). This is the only way to get their
|
|
attention on portability issues and to ensure that future versions can be built
|
|
out-of-the box on NetBSD. The less custom patches in pkgsrc, the easier further
|
|
updates are. Those developers in charge of issuing major GNOME updates will be
|
|
grateful if you do that.
|
|
|
|
The most common places to report bugs are the GNOME's Bugzilla and the
|
|
freedesktop.org's Bugzilla. Not all components use these to track bugs, but
|
|
most of them do. Do not be short on your reports: always provide detailed
|
|
explanations of the current failure, how it can be improved to achieve maximum
|
|
portability and, if at all possible, provide a patch against CVS head. The more
|
|
verbose you are, the higher chances of your patch being accepted.
|
|
|
|
Also, please avoid using preprocessor magic to fix portability issues. While
|
|
the FreeBSD GNOME people are doing a great job in porting GNOME to their
|
|
operating system, the official GNOME sources are now plagued by conditionals
|
|
that check for __FreeBSD__ and similar macros. This hurts portability. Please
|
|
see our patching guidelines (Section 11.3.4, "Patching guidelines") for more
|
|
details.
|
|
|
|
Part III. The pkgsrc infrastructure internals
|
|
|
|
This part of the guide deals with everything from the infrastructure that is
|
|
behind the interfaces described in the developer's guide. A casual package
|
|
maintainer should not need anything from this part.
|
|
|
|
Table of Contents
|
|
|
|
24. Design of the pkgsrc infrastructure
|
|
|
|
24.1. The meaning of variable definitions
|
|
24.2. Avoiding problems before they arise
|
|
24.3. Variable evaluation
|
|
|
|
24.3.1. At load time
|
|
24.3.2. At runtime
|
|
|
|
24.4. How can variables be specified?
|
|
24.5. Designing interfaces for Makefile fragments
|
|
|
|
24.5.1. Procedures with parameters
|
|
24.5.2. Actions taken on behalf of parameters
|
|
|
|
24.6. The order in which files are loaded
|
|
|
|
24.6.1. The order in bsd.prefs.mk
|
|
24.6.2. The order in bsd.pkg.mk
|
|
|
|
25. Regression tests
|
|
|
|
25.1. The regression tests framework
|
|
25.2. Running the regression tests
|
|
25.3. Adding a new regression test
|
|
|
|
25.3.1. Overridable functions
|
|
25.3.2. Helper functions
|
|
|
|
26. Porting pkgsrc
|
|
|
|
26.1. Porting pkgsrc to a new operating system
|
|
26.2. Adding support for a new compiler
|
|
|
|
Chapter 24. Design of the pkgsrc infrastructure
|
|
|
|
Table of Contents
|
|
|
|
24.1. The meaning of variable definitions
|
|
24.2. Avoiding problems before they arise
|
|
24.3. Variable evaluation
|
|
|
|
24.3.1. At load time
|
|
24.3.2. At runtime
|
|
|
|
24.4. How can variables be specified?
|
|
24.5. Designing interfaces for Makefile fragments
|
|
|
|
24.5.1. Procedures with parameters
|
|
24.5.2. Actions taken on behalf of parameters
|
|
|
|
24.6. The order in which files are loaded
|
|
|
|
24.6.1. The order in bsd.prefs.mk
|
|
24.6.2. The order in bsd.pkg.mk
|
|
|
|
The pkgsrc infrastructure consists of many small Makefile fragments. Each such
|
|
fragment needs a properly specified interface. This chapter explains how such
|
|
an interface looks like.
|
|
|
|
24.1. The meaning of variable definitions
|
|
|
|
Whenever a variable is defined in the pkgsrc infrastructure, the location and
|
|
the way of definition provide much information about the intended use of that
|
|
variable. Additionally, more documentation may be found in a header comment or
|
|
in this pkgsrc guide.
|
|
|
|
A special file is mk/defaults/mk.conf, which lists all variables that are
|
|
intended to be user-defined. They are either defined using the ?= operator or
|
|
they are left undefined because defining them to anything would effectively
|
|
mean "yes". All these variables may be overridden by the pkgsrc user in the
|
|
MAKECONF file.
|
|
|
|
Outside this file, the following conventions apply: Variables that are defined
|
|
using the ?= operator may be overridden by a package.
|
|
|
|
Variables that are defined using the = operator may be used read-only at
|
|
run-time.
|
|
|
|
Variables whose name starts with an underscore must not be accessed outside the
|
|
pkgsrc infrastructure at all. They may change without further notice.
|
|
|
|
Note
|
|
|
|
These conventions are currently not applied consistently to the complete pkgsrc
|
|
infrastructure.
|
|
|
|
24.2. Avoiding problems before they arise
|
|
|
|
All variables that contain lists of things should default to being empty. Two
|
|
examples that do not follow this rule are USE_LANGUAGES and DISTFILES. These
|
|
variables cannot simply be modified using the += operator in package Makefiles
|
|
(or other files included by them), since there is no guarantee whether the
|
|
variable is already set or not, and what its value is. In the case of
|
|
DISTFILES, the packages "know" the default value and just define it as in the
|
|
following example.
|
|
|
|
DISTFILES= ${DISTNAME}${EXTRACT_SUFX} additional-files.tar.gz
|
|
|
|
Because of the selection of this default value, the same value appears in many
|
|
package Makefiles. Similarly for USE_LANGUAGES, but in this case the default
|
|
value ("c") is so short that it doesn't stand out. Nevertheless it is mentioned
|
|
in many files.
|
|
|
|
24.3. Variable evaluation
|
|
|
|
24.3.1. At load time
|
|
|
|
Variable evaluation takes place either at load time or at runtime, depending on
|
|
the context in which they occur. The contexts where variables are evaluated at
|
|
load time are:
|
|
|
|
* The right hand side of the := and != operators,
|
|
|
|
* Make directives like .if or .for,
|
|
|
|
* Dependency lines.
|
|
|
|
A special exception are references to the iteration variables of .for loops,
|
|
which are expanded inline, no matter in which context they appear.
|
|
|
|
As the values of variables may change during load time, care must be taken not
|
|
to evaluate them by accident. Typical examples for variables that should not be
|
|
evaluated at load time are DEPENDS and CONFIGURE_ARGS. To make the effect more
|
|
clear, here is an example:
|
|
|
|
CONFIGURE_ARGS= # none
|
|
CFLAGS= -O
|
|
CONFIGURE_ARGS+= CFLAGS=${CFLAGS:Q}
|
|
|
|
CONFIGURE_ARGS:= ${CONFIGURE_ARGS}
|
|
|
|
CFLAGS+= -Wall
|
|
|
|
|
|
This code shows how the use of the := operator can quickly lead to unexpected
|
|
results. The first paragraph is fairly common code. The second paragraph
|
|
evaluates the CONFIGURE_ARGS variable, which results in CFLAGS=-O. In the third
|
|
paragraph, the -Wall is appended to the CFLAGS, but this addition will not
|
|
appear in CONFIGURE_ARGS. In actual code, the three paragraphs from above
|
|
typically occur in completely unrelated files.
|
|
|
|
24.3.2. At runtime
|
|
|
|
After all the files have been loaded, the values of the variables cannot be
|
|
changed anymore. Variables that are used in the shell commands are expanded at
|
|
this point.
|
|
|
|
24.4. How can variables be specified?
|
|
|
|
There are many ways in which the definition and use of a variable can be
|
|
restricted in order to detect bugs and violations of the (mostly unwritten)
|
|
policies. See the pkglint developer's documentation for further details.
|
|
|
|
24.5. Designing interfaces for Makefile fragments
|
|
|
|
Most of the .mk files fall into one of the following classes. Cases where a
|
|
file falls into more than one class should be avoided as it often leads to
|
|
subtle bugs.
|
|
|
|
24.5.1. Procedures with parameters
|
|
|
|
In a traditional imperative programming language some of the .mk files could be
|
|
described as procedures. They take some input parameters and?after inclusion?
|
|
provide a result in output parameters. Since all variables in Makefiles have
|
|
global scope care must be taken not to use parameter names that have already
|
|
another meaning. For example, PKGNAME is a bad choice for a parameter name.
|
|
|
|
Procedures are completely evaluated at preprocessing time. That is, when
|
|
calling a procedure all input parameters must be completely resolvable. For
|
|
example, CONFIGURE_ARGS should never be an input parameter since it is very
|
|
likely that further text will be added after calling the procedure, which would
|
|
effectively apply the procedure to only a part of the variable. Also,
|
|
references to other variables wit will be modified after calling the procedure.
|
|
|
|
A procedure can declare its output parameters either as suitable for use in
|
|
preprocessing directives or as only available at runtime. The latter
|
|
alternative is for variables that contain references to other runtime
|
|
variables.
|
|
|
|
Procedures shall be written such that it is possible to call the procedure more
|
|
than once. That is, the file must not contain multiple-inclusion guards.
|
|
|
|
Examples for procedures are mk/bsd.options.mk and mk/buildlink3/bsd.builtin.mk.
|
|
To express that the parameters are evaluated at load time, they should be
|
|
assigned using the := operator, which should be used only for this purpose.
|
|
|
|
24.5.2. Actions taken on behalf of parameters
|
|
|
|
Action files take some input parameters and may define runtime variables. They
|
|
shall not define loadtime variables. There are action files that are included
|
|
implicitly by the pkgsrc infrastructure, while other must be included
|
|
explicitly.
|
|
|
|
An example for action files is mk/subst.mk.
|
|
|
|
24.6. The order in which files are loaded
|
|
|
|
Package Makefiles usually consist of a set of variable definitions, and include
|
|
the file ../../mk/bsd.pkg.mk in the very last line. Before that, they may also
|
|
include various other *.mk files if they need to query the availability of
|
|
certain features like the type of compiler or the X11 implementation. Due to
|
|
the heavy use of preprocessor directives like .if and .for, the order in which
|
|
the files are loaded matters.
|
|
|
|
This section describes at which point the various files are loaded and gives
|
|
reasons for that order.
|
|
|
|
24.6.1. The order in bsd.prefs.mk
|
|
|
|
The very first action in bsd.prefs.mk is to define some essential variables
|
|
like OPSYS, OS_VERSION and MACHINE_ARCH.
|
|
|
|
Then, the user settings are loaded from the file specified in MAKECONF, which
|
|
is usually mk.conf. After that, those variables that have not been overridden
|
|
by the user are loaded from mk/defaults/mk.conf.
|
|
|
|
After the user settings, the system settings and platform settings are loaded,
|
|
which may override the user settings.
|
|
|
|
Then, the tool definitions are loaded. The tool wrappers are not yet in effect.
|
|
This only happens when building a package, so the proper variables must be used
|
|
instead of the direct tool names.
|
|
|
|
As the last steps, some essential variables from the wrapper and the package
|
|
system flavor are loaded, as well as the variables that have been cached in
|
|
earlier phases of a package build.
|
|
|
|
24.6.2. The order in bsd.pkg.mk
|
|
|
|
First, bsd.prefs.mk is loaded.
|
|
|
|
Then, the various *-vars.mk files are loaded, which fill default values for
|
|
those variables that have not been defined by the package. These variables may
|
|
later be used even in unrelated files.
|
|
|
|
Then, the file bsd.pkg.error.mk provides the target error-check that is added
|
|
as a special dependency to all other targets that use DELAYED_ERROR_MSG or
|
|
DELAYED_WARNING_MSG.
|
|
|
|
Then, the package-specific hacks from hacks.mk are included.
|
|
|
|
Then, various other files follow. Most of them don't have any dependencies on
|
|
what they need to have included before or after them, though some do.
|
|
|
|
The code to check PKG_FAIL_REASON and PKG_SKIP_REASON is then executed, which
|
|
restricts the use of these variables to all the files that have been included
|
|
before. Appearances in later files will be silently ignored.
|
|
|
|
Then, the files for the main targets are included, in the order of later
|
|
execution, though the actual order should not matter.
|
|
|
|
At last, some more files are included that don't set any interesting variables
|
|
but rather just define make targets to be executed.
|
|
|
|
Chapter 25. Regression tests
|
|
|
|
Table of Contents
|
|
|
|
25.1. The regression tests framework
|
|
25.2. Running the regression tests
|
|
25.3. Adding a new regression test
|
|
|
|
25.3.1. Overridable functions
|
|
25.3.2. Helper functions
|
|
|
|
The pkgsrc infrastructure consists of a large codebase, and there are many
|
|
corners where every little bit of a file is well thought out, making pkgsrc
|
|
likely to fail as soon as anything is changed near those parts. To prevent most
|
|
changes from breaking anything, a suite of regression tests should go along
|
|
with every important part of the pkgsrc infrastructure. This chapter describes
|
|
how regression tests work in pkgsrc and how you can add new tests.
|
|
|
|
25.1. The regression tests framework
|
|
|
|
25.2. Running the regression tests
|
|
|
|
You first need to install the pkgtools/pkg_regress package, which provides the
|
|
pkg_regress command. Then you can simply run that command, which will run all
|
|
tests in the regress category.
|
|
|
|
25.3. Adding a new regression test
|
|
|
|
Every directory in the regress category that contains a file called spec is
|
|
considered a regression test. This file is a shell program that is included by
|
|
the pkg_regress command. The following functions can be overridden to suit your
|
|
needs.
|
|
|
|
25.3.1. Overridable functions
|
|
|
|
These functions do not take any parameters. They are all called in "set -e"
|
|
mode, so you should be careful to check the exitcodes of any commands you run
|
|
in the test.
|
|
|
|
do_setup()
|
|
|
|
This function prepares the environment for the test. By default it does
|
|
nothing.
|
|
|
|
do_test()
|
|
|
|
This function runs the actual test. By default, it calls TEST_MAKE with the
|
|
arguments MAKEARGS_TEST and writes its output including error messages into
|
|
the file TEST_OUTFILE.
|
|
|
|
check_result()
|
|
|
|
This function is run after the test and is typically used to compare the
|
|
actual output from the one that is expected. It can make use of the various
|
|
helper functions from the next section.
|
|
|
|
do_cleanup()
|
|
|
|
This function cleans everything up after the test has been run. By default
|
|
it does nothing.
|
|
|
|
25.3.2. Helper functions
|
|
|
|
exit_status(expected)
|
|
|
|
This function compares the exitcode of the do_test() function with its
|
|
first parameter. If they differ, the test will fail.
|
|
|
|
output_require(regex...)
|
|
|
|
This function checks for each of its parameters if the output from do_test
|
|
() matches the extended regular expression. If it does not, the test will
|
|
fail.
|
|
|
|
output_prohibit(regex...)
|
|
|
|
This function checks for each of its parameters if the output from do_test
|
|
() does not match the extended regular expression. If any of the regular
|
|
expressions matches, the test will fail.
|
|
|
|
Chapter 26. Porting pkgsrc
|
|
|
|
Table of Contents
|
|
|
|
26.1. Porting pkgsrc to a new operating system
|
|
26.2. Adding support for a new compiler
|
|
|
|
The pkgsrc system has already been ported to many operating systems, hardware
|
|
architectures and compilers. This chapter explains the necessary steps to make
|
|
pkgsrc even more portable.
|
|
|
|
26.1. Porting pkgsrc to a new operating system
|
|
|
|
To port pkgsrc to a new operating system (called MyOS in this example), you
|
|
need to touch the following files:
|
|
|
|
pkgtools/bootstrap-mk-files/files/mods/MyOS.sys.mk
|
|
|
|
This file contains some basic definitions, for example the name of the C
|
|
compiler.
|
|
|
|
mk/bsd.prefs.mk
|
|
|
|
Insert code that defines the variables OPSYS, OS_VERSION, LOWER_OS_VERSION,
|
|
LOWER_VENDOR, MACHINE_ARCH, OBJECT_FMT, APPEND_ELF, and the other variables
|
|
that appear in this file.
|
|
|
|
mk/platform/MyOS.mk
|
|
|
|
This file contains the platform-specific definitions that are used by
|
|
pkgsrc. Start by copying one of the other files and edit it to your needs.
|
|
|
|
mk/platform/MyOS.pkg.dist
|
|
|
|
This file contains a list of directories, together with their permission
|
|
bits and ownership. These directories will be created automatically with
|
|
every package that explicitly sets USE_MTREE. This feature will be removed.
|
|
|
|
mk/platform/MyOS.x11.dist
|
|
|
|
Just copy one of the pre-existing x11.dist files to your MyOS.x11.dist.
|
|
|
|
mk/tools/bootstrap.mk
|
|
|
|
On some operating systems, the tools that are provided with the base system
|
|
are not good enough for pkgsrc. For example, there are many versions of sed
|
|
(1) that have a narrow limit on the line length they can process. Therefore
|
|
pkgsrc brings its own tools, which can be enabled here.
|
|
|
|
mk/tools/tools.MyOS.mk
|
|
|
|
This file defines the paths to all the tools that are needed by one or the
|
|
other package in pkgsrc, as well as by pkgsrc itself. Find out where these
|
|
tools are on your platform and add them.
|
|
|
|
Now, you should be able to build some basic packages, like lang/perl5, shells/
|
|
bash.
|
|
|
|
26.2. Adding support for a new compiler
|
|
|
|
TODO
|
|
|
|
Appendix A. A simple example package: bison
|
|
|
|
Table of Contents
|
|
|
|
A.1. files
|
|
|
|
A.1.1. Makefile
|
|
A.1.2. DESCR
|
|
A.1.3. PLIST
|
|
A.1.4. Checking a package with pkglint
|
|
|
|
A.2. Steps for building, installing, packaging
|
|
|
|
We checked to find a piece of software that wasn't in the packages collection,
|
|
and picked GNU bison. Quite why someone would want to have bison when Berkeley
|
|
yacc is already present in the tree is beyond us, but it's useful for the
|
|
purposes of this exercise.
|
|
|
|
A.1. files
|
|
|
|
A.1.1. Makefile
|
|
|
|
# $NetBSD$
|
|
#
|
|
|
|
DISTNAME= bison-1.25
|
|
CATEGORIES= devel
|
|
MASTER_SITES= ${MASTER_SITE_GNU}
|
|
|
|
MAINTAINER= thorpej@NetBSD.org
|
|
HOMEPAGE= http://www.gnu.org/software/bison/bison.html
|
|
COMMENT= GNU yacc clone
|
|
|
|
GNU_CONFIGURE= yes
|
|
INFO_FILES= bison.info
|
|
|
|
.include "../../mk/bsd.pkg.mk"
|
|
|
|
A.1.2. DESCR
|
|
|
|
GNU version of yacc. Can make re-entrant parsers, and numerous other
|
|
improvements. Why you would want this when Berkeley yacc(1) is part
|
|
of the NetBSD source tree is beyond me.
|
|
|
|
A.1.3. PLIST
|
|
|
|
@comment $NetBSD$
|
|
bin/bison
|
|
man/man1/bison.1.gz
|
|
share/bison.simple
|
|
share/bison.hairy
|
|
|
|
A.1.4. Checking a package with pkglint
|
|
|
|
The NetBSD package system comes with pkgtools/pkglint which helps to check the
|
|
contents of these files. After installation it is quite easy to use, just
|
|
change to the directory of the package you wish to examine and execute pkglint:
|
|
|
|
$ pkglint
|
|
looks fine.
|
|
|
|
Depending on the supplied command line arguments (see pkglint(1)), more checks
|
|
will be performed. Use e.g. pkglint -Call -Wall for a very thorough check.
|
|
|
|
A.2. Steps for building, installing, packaging
|
|
|
|
Create the directory where the package lives, plus any auxiliary directories:
|
|
|
|
# cd /usr/pkgsrc/lang
|
|
# mkdir bison
|
|
# cd bison
|
|
# mkdir patches
|
|
|
|
Create Makefile, DESCR and PLIST (see Chapter 11, Package components - files,
|
|
directories and contents) then continue with fetching the distfile:
|
|
|
|
# make fetch
|
|
>> bison-1.25.tar.gz doesn't seem to exist on this system.
|
|
>> Attempting to fetch from ftp://prep.ai.mit.edu/pub/gnu//.
|
|
Requesting ftp://prep.ai.mit.edu/pub/gnu//bison-1.25.tar.gz (via ftp://orpheus.amdahl.com:80/)
|
|
ftp: Error retrieving file: 500 Internal error
|
|
|
|
>> Attempting to fetch from ftp://wuarchive.wustl.edu/systems/gnu//.
|
|
Requesting ftp://wuarchive.wustl.edu/systems/gnu//bison-1.25.tar.gz (via ftp://orpheus.amdahl.com:80/)
|
|
ftp: Error retrieving file: 500 Internal error
|
|
|
|
>> Attempting to fetch from ftp://ftp.freebsd.org/pub/FreeBSD/distfiles//.
|
|
Requesting ftp://ftp.freebsd.org/pub/FreeBSD/distfiles//bison-1.25.tar.gz (via ftp://orpheus.amdahl.com:80/)
|
|
Successfully retrieved file.
|
|
|
|
Generate the checksum of the distfile into distinfo:
|
|
|
|
# make makedistinfo
|
|
|
|
Now compile:
|
|
|
|
# make
|
|
>> Checksum OK for bison-1.25.tar.gz.
|
|
===> Extracting for bison-1.25
|
|
===> Patching for bison-1.25
|
|
===> Ignoring empty patch directory
|
|
===> Configuring for bison-1.25
|
|
creating cache ./config.cache
|
|
checking for gcc... cc
|
|
checking whether we are using GNU C... yes
|
|
checking for a BSD compatible install... /usr/bin/install -c -o bin -g bin
|
|
checking how to run the C preprocessor... cc -E
|
|
checking for minix/config.h... no
|
|
checking for POSIXized ISC... no
|
|
checking whether cross-compiling... no
|
|
checking for ANSI C header files... yes
|
|
checking for string.h... yes
|
|
checking for stdlib.h... yes
|
|
checking for memory.h... yes
|
|
checking for working const... yes
|
|
checking for working alloca.h... no
|
|
checking for alloca... yes
|
|
checking for strerror... yes
|
|
updating cache ./config.cache
|
|
creating ./config.status
|
|
creating Makefile
|
|
===> Building for bison-1.25
|
|
cc -c -DSTDC_HEADERS=1 -DHAVE_STRING_H=1 -DHAVE_STDLIB_H=1 -DHAVE_MEMORY_H=1 -DHAVE_ALLOCA=1 -DHAVE_STRERROR=1 -I./../include -g LR0.c
|
|
cc -c -DSTDC_HEADERS=1 -DHAVE_STRING_H=1 -DHAVE_STDLIB_H=1 -DHAVE_MEMORY_H=1 -DHAVE_ALLOCA=1 -DHAVE_STRERROR=1 -I./../include -g allocate.c
|
|
cc -c -DSTDC_HEADERS=1 -DHAVE_STRING_H=1 -DHAVE_STDLIB_H=1 -DHAVE_MEMORY_H=1 -DHAVE_ALLOCA=1 -DHAVE_STRERROR=1 -I./../include -g closure.c
|
|
cc -c -DSTDC_HEADERS=1 -DHAVE_STRING_H=1 -DHAVE_STDLIB_H=1 -DHAVE_MEMORY_H=1 -DHAVE_ALLOCA=1 -DHAVE_STRERROR=1 -I./../include -g conflicts.c
|
|
cc -c -DSTDC_HEADERS=1 -DHAVE_STRING_H=1 -DHAVE_STDLIB_H=1 -DHAVE_MEMORY_H=1 -DHAVE_ALLOCA=1 -DHAVE_STRERROR=1 -I./../include -g derives.c
|
|
cc -c -DXPFILE=\"/usr/pkg/share/bison.simple\" -DXPFILE1=\"/usr/pkg/share/bison.hairy\" -DSTDC_HEADERS=1 -DHAVE_STRING_H=1 -DHAVE_STDLIB_H=1 -DHAVE_MEMORY_H=1 -DHAVE_ALLOCA=1 -DHAVE_STRERROR=1 -g ./files.c
|
|
cc -c -DSTDC_HEADERS=1 -DHAVE_STRING_H=1 -DHAVE_STDLIB_H=1 -DHAVE_MEMORY_H=1 -DHAVE_ALLOCA=1 -DHAVE_STRERROR=1 -I./../include -g getargs.c
|
|
cc -c -DSTDC_HEADERS=1 -DHAVE_STRING_H=1 -DHAVE_STDLIB_H=1 -DHAVE_MEMORY_H=1 -DHAVE_ALLOCA=1 -DHAVE_STRERROR=1 -I./../include -g gram.c
|
|
cc -c -DSTDC_HEADERS=1 -DHAVE_STRING_H=1 -DHAVE_STDLIB_H=1 -DHAVE_MEMORY_H=1 -DHAVE_ALLOCA=1 -DHAVE_STRERROR=1 -I./../include -g lalr.c
|
|
cc -c -DSTDC_HEADERS=1 -DHAVE_STRING_H=1 -DHAVE_STDLIB_H=1 -DHAVE_MEMORY_H=1 -DHAVE_ALLOCA=1 -DHAVE_STRERROR=1 -I./../include -g lex.c
|
|
cc -c -DSTDC_HEADERS=1 -DHAVE_STRING_H=1 -DHAVE_STDLIB_H=1 -DHAVE_MEMORY_H=1 -DHAVE_ALLOCA=1 -DHAVE_STRERROR=1 -I./../include -g main.c
|
|
cc -c -DSTDC_HEADERS=1 -DHAVE_STRING_H=1 -DHAVE_STDLIB_H=1 -DHAVE_MEMORY_H=1 -DHAVE_ALLOCA=1 -DHAVE_STRERROR=1 -I./../include -g nullable.c
|
|
cc -c -DSTDC_HEADERS=1 -DHAVE_STRING_H=1 -DHAVE_STDLIB_H=1 -DHAVE_MEMORY_H=1 -DHAVE_ALLOCA=1 -DHAVE_STRERROR=1 -I./../include -g output.c
|
|
cc -c -DSTDC_HEADERS=1 -DHAVE_STRING_H=1 -DHAVE_STDLIB_H=1 -DHAVE_MEMORY_H=1 -DHAVE_ALLOCA=1 -DHAVE_STRERROR=1 -I./../include -g print.c
|
|
cc -c -DSTDC_HEADERS=1 -DHAVE_STRING_H=1 -DHAVE_STDLIB_H=1 -DHAVE_MEMORY_H=1 -DHAVE_ALLOCA=1 -DHAVE_STRERROR=1 -I./../include -g reader.c
|
|
cc -c -DSTDC_HEADERS=1 -DHAVE_STRING_H=1 -DHAVE_STDLIB_H=1 -DHAVE_MEMORY_H=1 -DHAVE_ALLOCA=1 -DHAVE_STRERROR=1 -I./../include -g reduce.c
|
|
cc -c -DSTDC_HEADERS=1 -DHAVE_STRING_H=1 -DHAVE_STDLIB_H=1 -DHAVE_MEMORY_H=1 -DHAVE_ALLOCA=1 -DHAVE_STRERROR=1 -I./../include -g symtab.c
|
|
cc -c -DSTDC_HEADERS=1 -DHAVE_STRING_H=1 -DHAVE_STDLIB_H=1 -DHAVE_MEMORY_H=1 -DHAVE_ALLOCA=1 -DHAVE_STRERROR=1 -I./../include -g warshall.c
|
|
cc -c -DSTDC_HEADERS=1 -DHAVE_STRING_H=1 -DHAVE_STDLIB_H=1 -DHAVE_MEMORY_H=1 -DHAVE_ALLOCA=1 -DHAVE_STRERROR=1 -I./../include -g version.c
|
|
cc -c -DSTDC_HEADERS=1 -DHAVE_STRING_H=1 -DHAVE_STDLIB_H=1 -DHAVE_MEMORY_H=1 -DHAVE_ALLOCA=1 -DHAVE_STRERROR=1 -I./../include -g getopt.c
|
|
cc -c -DSTDC_HEADERS=1 -DHAVE_STRING_H=1 -DHAVE_STDLIB_H=1 -DHAVE_MEMORY_H=1 -DHAVE_ALLOCA=1 -DHAVE_STRERROR=1 -I./../include -g getopt1.c
|
|
cc -g -o bison LR0.o allocate.o closure.o conflicts.o derives.o files.o getargs.o gram.o lalr.o lex.o main.o nullable.o output.o print.o reader.o reduce.o symtab.o warshall.o version.o getopt.o getopt1.o
|
|
./files.c:240: warning: mktemp() possibly used unsafely, consider using mkstemp()
|
|
rm -f bison.s1
|
|
sed -e "/^#line/ s|bison|/usr/pkg/share/bison|" < ./bison.simple > bison.s1
|
|
|
|
Everything seems OK, so install the files:
|
|
|
|
# make install
|
|
>> Checksum OK for bison-1.25.tar.gz.
|
|
===> Installing for bison-1.25
|
|
sh ./mkinstalldirs /usr/pkg/bin /usr/pkg/share /usr/pkg/info /usr/pkg/man/man1
|
|
rm -f /usr/pkg/bin/bison
|
|
cd /usr/pkg/share; rm -f bison.simple bison.hairy
|
|
rm -f /usr/pkg/man/man1/bison.1 /usr/pkg/info/bison.info*
|
|
install -c -o bin -g bin -m 555 bison /usr/pkg/bin/bison
|
|
/usr/bin/install -c -o bin -g bin -m 644 bison.s1 /usr/pkg/share/bison.simple
|
|
/usr/bin/install -c -o bin -g bin -m 644 ./bison.hairy /usr/pkg/share/bison.hairy
|
|
cd .; for f in bison.info*; do /usr/bin/install -c -o bin -g bin -m 644 $f /usr/pkg/info/$f; done
|
|
/usr/bin/install -c -o bin -g bin -m 644 ./bison.1 /usr/pkg/man/man1/bison.1
|
|
===> Registering installation for bison-1.25
|
|
|
|
You can now use bison, and also - if you decide so - remove it with pkg_delete
|
|
bison. Should you decide that you want a binary package, do this now:
|
|
|
|
# make package
|
|
>> Checksum OK for bison-1.25.tar.gz.
|
|
===> Building package for bison-1.25
|
|
Creating package bison-1.25.tgz
|
|
Registering depends:.
|
|
Creating gzip'd tar ball in '/u/pkgsrc/lang/bison/bison-1.25.tgz'
|
|
|
|
Now that you don't need the source and object files any more, clean up:
|
|
|
|
# make clean
|
|
===> Cleaning for bison-1.25
|
|
|
|
Appendix B. Build logs
|
|
|
|
Table of Contents
|
|
|
|
B.1. Building figlet
|
|
B.2. Packaging figlet
|
|
|
|
B.1. Building figlet
|
|
|
|
# make
|
|
===> Checking for vulnerabilities in figlet-2.2.1nb2
|
|
=> figlet221.tar.gz doesn't seem to exist on this system.
|
|
=> Attempting to fetch figlet221.tar.gz from ftp://ftp.figlet.org/pub/figlet/program/unix/.
|
|
=> [172219 bytes]
|
|
Connected to ftp.plig.net.
|
|
220 ftp.plig.org NcFTPd Server (licensed copy) ready.
|
|
331 Guest login ok, send your complete e-mail address as password.
|
|
230-You are user #5 of 500 simultaneous users allowed.
|
|
230-
|
|
230- ___ _ _ _
|
|
230- | _| |_ ___ ___| |_|___ ___ ___ ___
|
|
230- | _| _| . |_| . | | | . |_| . | _| . |
|
|
230- |_| |_| | _|_| _|_|_|_ |_|___|_| |_ |
|
|
230- |_| |_| |___| |___|
|
|
230-
|
|
230-** Welcome to ftp.plig.org **
|
|
230-
|
|
230-Please note that all transfers from this FTP site are logged. If you
|
|
230-do not like this, please disconnect now.
|
|
230-
|
|
230-This arhive is available via
|
|
230-
|
|
230-HTTP: http://ftp.plig.org/
|
|
230-FTP: ftp://ftp.plig.org/ (max 500 connections)
|
|
230-RSYNC: rsync://ftp.plig.org/ (max 30 connections)
|
|
230-
|
|
230-Please email comments, bug reports and requests for packages to be
|
|
230-mirrored to ftp-admin@plig.org.
|
|
230-
|
|
230-
|
|
230 Logged in anonymously.
|
|
Remote system type is UNIX.
|
|
Using binary mode to transfer files.
|
|
200 Type okay.
|
|
250 "/pub" is new cwd.
|
|
250-"/pub/figlet" is new cwd.
|
|
250-
|
|
250-Welcome to the figlet archive at ftp.figlet.org
|
|
250-
|
|
250- ftp://ftp.figlet.org/pub/figlet/
|
|
250-
|
|
250-The official FIGlet web page is:
|
|
250- http://www.figlet.org/
|
|
250-
|
|
250-If you have questions, please mailto:info@figlet.org. If you want to
|
|
250-contribute a font or something else, you can email us.
|
|
250
|
|
250 "/pub/figlet/program" is new cwd.
|
|
250 "/pub/figlet/program/unix" is new cwd.
|
|
local: figlet221.tar.gz remote: figlet221.tar.gz
|
|
502 Unimplemented command.
|
|
227 Entering Passive Mode (195,40,6,41,246,104)
|
|
150 Data connection accepted from 84.128.86.72:65131; transfer starting for figlet221.tar.gz (172219 bytes).
|
|
38% |************** | 65800 64.16 KB/s 00:01 ETA
|
|
226 Transfer completed.
|
|
172219 bytes received in 00:02 (75.99 KB/s)
|
|
221 Goodbye.
|
|
=> Checksum OK for figlet221.tar.gz.
|
|
===> Extracting for figlet-2.2.1nb2
|
|
===> Required installed package ccache-[0-9]*: ccache-2.3nb1 found
|
|
===> Patching for figlet-2.2.1nb2
|
|
===> Applying pkgsrc patches for figlet-2.2.1nb2
|
|
===> Overriding tools for figlet-2.2.1nb2
|
|
===> Creating toolchain wrappers for figlet-2.2.1nb2
|
|
===> Configuring for figlet-2.2.1nb2
|
|
===> Building for figlet-2.2.1nb2
|
|
gcc -O2 -DDEFAULTFONTDIR=\"/usr/pkg/share/figlet\" -DDEFAULTFONTFILE=\"standard.flf\" figlet.c zipio.c crc.c inflate.c -o figlet
|
|
chmod a+x figlet
|
|
gcc -O2 -o chkfont chkfont.c
|
|
=> Unwrapping files-to-be-installed.
|
|
#
|
|
# make install
|
|
===> Checking for vulnerabilities in figlet-2.2.1nb2
|
|
===> Installing for figlet-2.2.1nb2
|
|
install -d -o root -g wheel -m 755 /usr/pkg/bin
|
|
install -d -o root -g wheel -m 755 /usr/pkg/man/man6
|
|
mkdir -p /usr/pkg/share/figlet
|
|
cp figlet /usr/pkg/bin
|
|
cp chkfont /usr/pkg/bin
|
|
chmod 555 figlist showfigfonts
|
|
cp figlist /usr/pkg/bin
|
|
cp showfigfonts /usr/pkg/bin
|
|
cp fonts/*.flf /usr/pkg/share/figlet
|
|
cp fonts/*.flc /usr/pkg/share/figlet
|
|
cp figlet.6 /usr/pkg/man/man6
|
|
===> Registering installation for figlet-2.2.1nb2
|
|
#
|
|
|
|
B.2. Packaging figlet
|
|
|
|
# make package
|
|
===> Checking for vulnerabilities in figlet-2.2.1nb2
|
|
===> Packaging figlet-2.2.1nb2
|
|
===> Building binary package for figlet-2.2.1nb2
|
|
Creating package /home/cvs/pkgsrc/packages/i386/All/figlet-2.2.1nb2.tgz
|
|
Using SrcDir value of /usr/pkg
|
|
Registering depends:.
|
|
#
|
|
|
|
Appendix C. Directory layout of the pkgsrc FTP server
|
|
|
|
Table of Contents
|
|
|
|
C.1. bootstrap-pkgsrc: Bootstrap kits
|
|
C.2. distfiles: The distributed source files
|
|
C.3. iso: Currently empty
|
|
C.4. misc: Miscellaneous things
|
|
C.5. packages: Binary packages
|
|
C.6. reports: Bulk build reports
|
|
C.7. current, pkgsrc-200xQy: source packages
|
|
|
|
As in other big projects, the directory layout of pkgsrc is quite complex for
|
|
newbies. This chapter explains where you find things on the FTP server. The
|
|
base directory on ftp.NetBSD.org is /pub/pkgsrc/. On other servers it may be
|
|
different, but inside this directory, everything should look the same, no
|
|
matter on which server you are. This directory contains some subdirectories,
|
|
which are explained below.
|
|
|
|
C.1. bootstrap-pkgsrc: Bootstrap kits
|
|
|
|
This directory used to contain binary packages of the package management tools
|
|
for various platforms. For those package collections that need them, they are
|
|
now stored near the binary packages, so you should look in the packages
|
|
directory.
|
|
|
|
C.2. distfiles: The distributed source files
|
|
|
|
The directory distfiles contains lots of archive files from all pkgsrc
|
|
packages, which are mirrored here. The subdirectories are called after their
|
|
package names and are used when the distributed files have names that don't
|
|
explicitly contain a version number or are otherwise too generic (for example
|
|
release.tar.gz).
|
|
|
|
C.3. iso: Currently empty
|
|
|
|
This directory is currently not in use.
|
|
|
|
C.4. misc: Miscellaneous things
|
|
|
|
This directory contains things that individual pkgsrc developers find worth
|
|
publishing.
|
|
|
|
C.5. packages: Binary packages
|
|
|
|
This directory contains binary packages for the various platforms that are
|
|
supported by pkgsrc. Each subdirectory is of the form OPSYS/ARCH/OSVERSION_TAG.
|
|
The meaning of these variables is:
|
|
|
|
* OPSYS is the name of the operating system for which the packages have been
|
|
built. The name is taken from the output of the uname command, so it may
|
|
differ from the one you are used to hear.
|
|
|
|
* ARCH is the hardware architecture of the platform for which the packages
|
|
have been built. It also includes the ABI (Application Binary Interface)
|
|
for platforms that have several of them.
|
|
|
|
* OSVERSION is the version of the operating system. For version numbers that
|
|
change often (for example NetBSD-current), the often-changing part should
|
|
be replaced with an x, for example 4.99.x.
|
|
|
|
* TAG is either 200xQy for a stable branch, or head for packages built from
|
|
the HEAD branch. The latter should only be used when the packages are
|
|
updated on a regular basis. Otherwise the date from checking out pkgsrc
|
|
should be appended, for example head_20071015.
|
|
|
|
The rationale for exactly this scheme is that the pkgsrc users looking for
|
|
binary packages can quickly click through the directories on the server and
|
|
find the best binary packages for their machines. Since they usually know the
|
|
operating system and the hardware architecture, OPSYS and ARCH are placed
|
|
first. After these choices, they can select the best combination of OSVERSION
|
|
and TAG together, since it is usually the case that packages stay compatible
|
|
between different version of the operating system.
|
|
|
|
In each of these directories, there is a whole binary packages collection for a
|
|
specific platform. It has a directory called All which contains all binary
|
|
packages. Besides that, there are various category directories that contain
|
|
symbolic links to the real binary packages.
|
|
|
|
C.6. reports: Bulk build reports
|
|
|
|
Here are the reports from bulk builds, for those who want to fix packages that
|
|
didn't build on some of the platforms. The structure of subdirectories should
|
|
look like the one in Section C.5, "packages: Binary packages".
|
|
|
|
C.7. current, pkgsrc-200xQy: source packages
|
|
|
|
These directories contain the "real" pkgsrc, that is the files that define how
|
|
to create binary packages from source archives.
|
|
|
|
The directory pkgsrc contains a snapshot of the CVS repository, which is
|
|
updated regularly. The file pkgsrc.tar.gz contains the same as the directory,
|
|
ready to be downloaded as a whole.
|
|
|
|
In the directories for the quarterly branches, there is an additional file
|
|
called pkgsrc-200xQy.tar.gz, which contains the state of pkgsrc when it was
|
|
branched.
|
|
|
|
Appendix D. Editing guidelines for the pkgsrc guide
|
|
|
|
Table of Contents
|
|
|
|
D.1. Make targets
|
|
D.2. Procedure
|
|
|
|
This section contains information on editing the pkgsrc guide itself.
|
|
|
|
D.1. Make targets
|
|
|
|
The pkgsrc guide's source code is stored in pkgsrc/doc/guide/files, and several
|
|
files are created from it:
|
|
|
|
* pkgsrc/doc/pkgsrc.txt
|
|
|
|
* pkgsrc/doc/pkgsrc.html
|
|
|
|
* http://www.NetBSD.org/docs/pkgsrc/
|
|
|
|
* http://www.NetBSD.org/docs/pkgsrc/pkgsrc.pdf: The PDF version of the pkgsrc
|
|
guide.
|
|
|
|
* http://www.NetBSD.org/docs/pkgsrc/pkgsrc.ps: PostScript version of the
|
|
pkgsrc guide.
|
|
|
|
D.2. Procedure
|
|
|
|
The procedure to edit the pkgsrc guide is:
|
|
|
|
1. Make sure you have the packages needed to regenerate the pkgsrc guide (and
|
|
other XML-based NetBSD documentation) installed. These are meta-pkgs/
|
|
netbsd-doc for creating the ASCII and HTML versions, and meta-pkgs/
|
|
netbsd-doc-print for the PostScript and PDF versions. You will need both
|
|
packages installed, to make sure documentation is consistent across all
|
|
formats.
|
|
|
|
2. Run cd doc/guide to get to the right directory. All further steps will take
|
|
place here.
|
|
|
|
3. Edit the XML file(s) in files/.
|
|
|
|
4. Run bmake to check the pkgsrc guide for valid XML and to build the final
|
|
output files. If you get any errors at this stage, you can just edit the
|
|
files, as there are only symbolic links in the working directory, pointing
|
|
to the files in files/.
|
|
|
|
5. (cd files && cvs commit)
|
|
|
|
6. Run bmake clean && bmake to regenerate the output files with the proper RCS
|
|
Ids.
|
|
|
|
7. Run bmake regen to install and commit the files in both pkgsrc/doc and
|
|
htdocs.
|
|
|
|
Note
|
|
|
|
If you have added, removed or renamed some chapters, you need to
|
|
synchronize them using cvs add or cvs delete in the htdocs directory.
|
|
|